Home

Pinnacle DekoTraining Manual

1. 4 Position the cursor in the lower color palette area of the window and left click the desired color to pick it up Notice that nothing changes because you have not yet applied this color to the color button above 5 Right click the Color button to drop in the new color You will see the selected text change immediately to the chosen color E Color palette area Illegal color indicator Color picker Note left click picks a color while right click applies the selected color mi 7 Deko Training 4 30 Type and Modify Text Shortcut Keys General Desktop Controls Select Style Edit window Alt F11 Open Text Browser window Ctrl L FAK Typeface Browser Select Style Look window FAK Look Select Style Font window FAK Font Moving Cursor Selecting Characters Cutting Copying and Pasting Details Styles Graphic Elements Cut element Ctrl X Copy element Ctrl C Paste element Ctrl V Deko Training Lesson 5 Working with Layers and Tabs Deko allows you to define an area where text will be entered along with the style that will be applied to that text This area is referred to as a ext layer Layers are important to the operation of Deko and your knowledge of them will expand in the following lessons Text layers are equivalent to but more flexible than the zab ayers in other CGs All Deko graphics are made up of a combination of a background and one or more a
2. File Edit View Text Layer Transform Channel Macro Window Help MHz Abbreviation for megahertz or millions of cycles per second The bandwidth of the video sional is 4 2 MHz A normal U S television transmission channel is 6 MHz minimize button Appears on the right side of a title bar Clicking this button reduces the window to its smallest size usually an icon at the bottom of the screen For example clicking the minimize button in FXDeko s title bar reduces FXDeko to its application icon To restore FXDeko double click the icon minimize button mixing Combining two or more audio or video sources modem A device used to accept digital signals and add them onto or modulate them on analog sionals for transmission between sites Modem is an abbreviation for MOdulator DEModulator A modem acts not only to convert digital signals to be transmitted in analog form but likewise to demodulate the signals monitor In video a television with composite video inputs A computer monitor usually accepts RGB rather than composite input To watch or listen to or the device through which monitoring takes place monochrome Black and white motion Describes the movement on or off air of elements or sprites of a graphic Each line in a motion script specifies one or more sprites A motion script can be saved in a motion mot file which you can then specify as an effect in a sequence Deko Training Gl
3. Introduction The Deko Training Manual is the primary text for the Pinnacle Systems Deko training program Deko is a full color video character generator from Pinnacle Systems Inc Based on the Windows operating system Deko offers unprecedented performance in broadcast quality How to Use This Manual This manual is designed as an in depth tutorial of the Deko system Lessons are structured in a logical flow taking you from basic concepts to more advanced features and functions Most lessons include self paced exercises that allow you to practice the skills needed for mastery of the Deko system A companion CD contains samples and the source material you will need to perform the exercises Note All Deko references in this manual apply to FXDeko While most of this material is directly applicable to other version of Deko hardware and software features and menus vary between different systems Your Deko system may not include options described in this manual Deko Training li Table of Contents How to Contact Pinnacle Systems Pinnacle Systems Inc 280 N Bernardo Avenue Mountain View CA 94043 What to Do Before You Call Whenever you contact Pinnacle Systems for technical support please have the following information available e Product name and software version number e Product serial number in the Help menu choose About e Precise description of problem and attempted solutions e Exact wording of any error me
4. alle x All Folders Contents of 0 El My Computer Modified a Ee 3 Floppy amp J Adobe che IC Backgrounds H Adobe H Chap 2 01 Firmware 0 Backgrounds BN ews Graphicd S Chap 2 01 Firmware FullShotS9 E Deko Graphics ADeme H 9 FullShotS9 mperweleh f 9 LODeme J imnportwatch apem Lang2559 H E Lan82559 E Mssql HE Mesq L PostDeko E PostDeko Program Files D l 1 objects selected Deko Training File Folder 6 30 00 6 42 Akl File Folder 1710701 8 24 4M File Folder 3711700 8 46 AM File Folder 2 6 01 5 47 AM File Folder 1 12 07 4 59 AM File Folder 1 15 01 4 22 4M File Folder 1 17 07 4 59 AM File Folder of S0 00 6 42 4M File Folder 10 18799 2 12 PM File Folder 10 12 00 11 26 AM File Folder 12 5 00 9 385 4M File Folder 1 9 01 1 44 AM Fai Felt Dd N nn CA Mik d 3 12 Setting up and Managing File Directories Windows Components Programs open within the Windows interface as Windows which can be opened closed resized or repositioned on the Desktop Explorer like other programs opens within a window Windows will have some or all of the following components to allow you to work with them Title Bar I Exploring C 4 File Edit View Tools Help fac HAA a SIGS A xa Adae All Folders Contents of C 4 Desktop B E My Computer J Adobe File Folder 8 30 00 6 42 AM 3 Floppy A D Backgrounds File Folder 1710 01 8 24 4M ERTE l Chap 2 01 Firmware File Fol
5. 3 Go to File gt Import Character From File The Import graphic into the selected character to dialog box appears 4 Browse to the file directory and select the desired file then click OK 5 Repeat Steps 2 through 4 until all graphics are selected 6 Activate the Custom Typeface window Press Save File on the FAK and type the name of the custom typeface Import graphic file into the selected character oe dS Deko Ema Tutorial 5 dko Deko Training Creating and Using Custom Typefaces 7 3 Exercise Build a Weather Graphic Assembling a weather graphic typically requires the import of symbols or logos that were designed on some other application The method by which these symbols are imported can vary Traditionally files are transferred from one device to another via floppy or Zip Deko can accommodate both A faster approach is to transfer via network connection The following will step you through logo import using a Custom Typeface and assembling a typical weather graphic See the finished sample below D untae na para iT Day Text layer Be dra rater haart E Cool Partly ALO T Temperature Text layer Import Weather Logos 1 Select the Style Edit layout File Name Directories ky E PA Go to View gt Custom Typeface The Custom wx_chanceshowers if d deko tutorial i Typeface window will open heac_wiliamsV tf E E gt an Ea red_banner
6. Creating Sequences and Effects Motion Compose Shift Ctrl M rE wher De pe u Bee aa hera pisa Gp ie a ae AD meri ecient l i U Li oi EHG DER ae Fi EEI e za om a ed 2 i nies T iz H i Heo i E Lae oor ee The Timeline Motion Compose window enables you to create a wide variety of complex on screen moves and 3D effects These effects can be applied to any and all elements in the graphic providing for very sophisticated and exiting on screen moves Deko Training 2 6 Navigating the Deko Interface In Lesson 10 you will work through a tutorial to produce a complex graphic move with the timeline You will also learn how the timeline can be used to create sophisticated moves on multiple elements layers of a graphic Custom Layouts The Deko interface can be customized to meet your individual requirements To customize the interface rearrange the windows as necessary Open any windows you wish to include from the view menu Close any windows you do not wish to include Below is an example of a custom layout Ea Ed Yem Ted Layer Channel ecm Dooe Win Hn Pict 7 Smell Cope hate For Help prect Fi TA Ae Te e eaa a ini barm Cooma WA EANA Deko Training Navigating the Deko Interface 2 7 To save your custom layout 1 Goto Windows gt Save Layout As 2 Type the layout name in the Save Layout dialog box and click Save ave Layout As SEC avait Save L
7. Entering Text and Adjusting Layer Attributes 1 With the Text layer tool selected create a new text layer in the lower third position 2 Select a style from the Preset Style window and set the font size at 60 points 3 Click on the Style window then click the Layer button This will reveal the Layer attribute settings 4 Make sure Word wrap is not selected Graphic Font Layer Look 5 Set focus to the Program window mee Justification Horizontal Yertical 6 Enter text and type a name that moves beyond the boundaries of the layer Nancy Jacobson pis 7 Click on the Word Wrap checkbox Notice that the second word in the layer moves below the layer boundaries Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 9 5 Word Wrap Preferences It is often preferable to leave the Word wrap setting off and only turn it on when you need word wrap for specific graphics To change the Word wrap setting 1 Goto Options gt Preferences and choose the Advanced tab 2 Uncheck the Word wrap box and click OK Preferences Auto scaling The Auto scaling feature allows you to have layers automatically size or scale text to fit This is especially useful in templates for graphics such as lower thirds where names can vary in length but must fit within a given screen area The Auto scaling feature has three settings e None no auto scaling e Scale to fit box scales text vertically and horizonta
8. Work well with others Change to a Texture File 1 Click on the Texture button to reveal the Texture dialog box in m Background S ENE the Shader window Color Ramp Texture keyhole 2 Click the checkbox next to File name and then click the Open M File name button below the File Name box CS Open Browse File Marne Directories bulletsbad dko d deko tutorial Cancel blank dko bulletsbod dko chicagosky dko chrome dka chomet dka chrome dka chrome3 dka chrome dko Drives Deko Graphics dko ad Network File info List Files of Type 037 10 98 10 05 244M 71 356 Options Deko Training 5 34 Working with Layers and Tabs In the Scroll menu below File Name scroll to the file bulletsbgd dko and click on it Click OK The file will be loaded into the background of the graphic Alternately you can click on the Browse button to open the Graphic browser and double click on the graphic of your choice to load it into the background Save this File to Disk 1 A Press F12 SK or Save File FAK to save the file to disk Save Graphic As File Hame Directories x be slatel d dekostutarial Aday forecast dko 10 dko 11 dko foe dA o gt Deko T E gt Tutorial ave selectia a 20 dko E List Files of Type Drives Deko Graphics dko E d Network Comment pe Options
9. i 3 from the palette below Right click on the active color box to Color Ran place the selected color in it The background of the graphic will ERIE rene now change to your selected color GaP Color Change the Background to a Ramp 1 From the Shader window choose Ramp You will see a four _ cornered gradient to which you can apply separate colors plus a highlight RGE HSY ce EEE 2 Again pick your colors from the palette below and right click on each quadrant to drop in the selected colors in Deko Training 5 32 Working with Layers and Tabs 3 Check Hilite box Set Value to 90 and right click this new color value to the active Hilite Color box E a Ga EJ Color Texture aaa a LAr Colors Cameo 2 Check the Hilite box 1 Set Ramp values by entering colors in the four boxes RGB HSY Option f i i 4 Right click on C Sat Hilite box to deposit Value 3 new color C Opacity 3 Set value to 90 4 Click on Options This will reveal a settings window to setup the RGB HSY Options highlight Enter the following values e size 60 Hilite e Angle 30 Size 60 e H Offset 70 Ange 3o e VOffset 0 H Offset 70 VOffset 0 S Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 33 This will create an offset highlight to your graphic that should look something like this Motivated for challenging tasks Talented and creative
10. Exercise Fastest Way to Get Random Graphics to Air 1 Press Num Lock to enable the numeric keypad A yellow light will illuminate 2 Press the Effect key to change layout displaying the Preview and Program channels 3 Press Clear Preview and Clear Program 4 Look to the graphics counter on the FAK If a file location is displayed press the Clear key 5 Type 100 6 Press the Read Preview key The next file 101 dko will display in the counter 7 Press the Read Program key The next file 102 dko will display in the counter 8 Set focus to Preview 9 Press the Next key to jump over 102 dko and advance to 103 dko 10 Press the Read Preview key Repeat these steps with other graphics to familiarize with this section of the keyboard This is your best and most efficient tool for on air operation Exercise Fastest Way to Get Sequential Graphics to Air 1 Press Clear Preview and Clear Program 2 Type 100 3 Press the Read Preview key 4 Press the Read Next key Then again Note you will see sequential files read into the Preview channel then swap to the Program channel all in a single keystroke Enable Disable Function Keys To enable disable FastAction function keys F1 F12 1 Go to Options gt Preferences gt Common 2 Under Keyboard click FastAction Function Keys 3 Click OK or press Enter Deko Training FastAction Keyboard 14 5 Note When the FastAction Function Key box is check
11. teamNYblue dko Deko Training Appendix e When saving graphics click on the Option button in the dialog window Be sure to deselect Save with rendered bitmap for faster recall and be sure to se ect Never under Save character glyphs File Save Options Deko Training A 8 Appendix Optional Exercise Make Bio Graphic with a File Association 1 2 Set focus to the Preset Style window and open training_fileassociation pst From the Tools window click on the Add Rectangle tool Pick Preset Style 1 and draw a rectangle in the bottom right corner of the Program window Fig A Figure A Figure B Choose the Add Rectangle tool and draw a rectangle just above and over lapping the first Release when the bottom edge of the layer sits just above safe title Pick Preset Style 2 Fig B From the Shader window click on Texture then open the file team_home dko From the Group list select Letter This creates a sticky texture for random on screen placement In the H Offset field click and release on the up arrow until you reach 30 Notice the texture moving as you edit the Horizontal position In the V Offset field click and release on the down arrow until you reach 2 The graphic should resemble Fig C below SAN FRANCISCU KEL POSITION POSITION AGE AGE HOMETOWN HOMETOWN Figure C Figure D Deko Training Appendix A 9 10 11 t2 13
12. 1 In the Style window click the Layer button Spread Eni ad wrap Auto scaling C None C ACUE to fit gor 3 Then choose style 7 in your tutorial pst window but don t type yet eeke yee 2 Turn off Word wrap and choose Shrink to fit box in the Auto scaling section of the window This enables your text to conform to the boundaries of this layer as it commonly does in lower third titles Create a Text Layer for Job Title 1 Select the Text Layer tool and create a second text layer This layer goes below the previous layer and directly on top of the lower gray rectangle 2 Choose style 8 from the Preset Style window for this layer Don t type yet Set the layer for Shrink to fit box and turn Word wrap off Deko Training 5 18 Working with Layers and Tabs Delete the Default Text Layer 1 Set focus to the Program window 2 Use Page Up to move among your layers to select the Default layer This layer is based on the size of the safe title area Default Layer Name Layer Title Layer 3 Once the default layer is selected tap the Delete key This will make it easier to work with the graphic Save This File to the Hard Drive 1 With the Program window selected go to the File menu and choose Save Graphic As SK F12 FAK Save File 2 Inthe Directories list double click the Deko Tutorial folder to open it 3 Inthe File Name field type template Under the List Files of Type dro
13. Create a Text Layer for the Name 1 From the Tools menu select the add text layer tool 2 Position the tool on the upper left corner of the background s upper blue rectangle and drag it to the bottom right corner to create a text layer that matches the blue rectangle 3 Ifyou need to make any adjustments to the layer make sure that the Move tool is selected so that you do not accidentally scale the text and the layer Open the Tutorial Preset Style 1 Click on the Preset Style window 2 From the File menu select Open F9 The directory path should read D Deko Tutorial If it does not change the directory path by double clicking the D directory and scroll down to the Deko folder 3 Double click the Deko folder to find the Tutorial sub folder 4 Click on the file titled tutorial pst Then press OK Note double clicking on the file tutorial pst will open it as well Open x File Name Directories Cancel tutorial pst foo dh E Deko em Tutorial List Files of Type PRESETS Files pt Dr File info 01727798 08 40AM a 4 C Directory Deko Tutorial folder sub folder Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 17 This will open a new Preset Style window We will use the styles in this window to complete the exercise m Preset stple Style 1 Damas Soe Aa Anal Black cae 5 Blk eee od Arial Arial ea Noe Md Gai hdc Set Auto Scaling Properties and Choose a Style
14. F f a The Deko FastAction Keyboard Deko Training 1 2 Verify and Configure Your Deko Start Up Your Deko Software On the menu monitor you should now be looking at the Windows NT Desktop or maybe the nearly identical Windows 95 98 2000 Desktop if you have PostDeko If the task bar is visible set it to Auto Hide To do this go to Start gt Settings gt Taskbar amp Start Menu Then in the dialog box that appears check the Auto hide box and click OK Ue i i Documents Taskbar Properties El Ei l C Taskbar Options Start Menu Programs tat c Windows NT Work Sound Re a Printers Shut Down M Auto hide Show small icons in Start menu IY Show clock If you do not see the Desktop it may be because some other program is running Close or minimize each program until you see the Desktop By now you are looking at the Desktop and are ready to start the Deko program Depending on which flavor of Deko you have you will find the appropriate Deko entry in the Start Menu Find the correct entry highlight the program and click on it once Maximize Toggle lel es Programs US Accessories A z Startup gt anal i Command Prompt Fo Wi FsDeko 4 1 tation fo FxDeko Uninstall Hasp Shut Down fo lomeqaware fo Startup i Windows NT Expl Ey Ed Settings P aj Windows NT Es
15. Te Open as read only In the Open dialog box double click the file name or select it and click Open Click OK in the Chyron Import Details dialog box or press Enter Deko Training 6 18 Working With File Imports To Convert a Chyron Logo Font into a Custom Typeface 1 Open the Chyron Import window 2 Navigate to the drive and directory that contain the machine file Note that the file description appears E Chyron Import D MOODY MACHINE 0050 fel E3 m Directoy r Font Directoy DA a MOOC moooy m E MACHINE ALI 0045 2050 0051 0056 0057 B CANADIAN RATING SYSTEM Convert Details r Font Mapping 3 Double click the file name to open and import the file into a Custom Typeface window Val Cus tom Typeface sence Display Key Hex Dec C Width mamam me 5 i Se Be eee See Ec cet fra jus fies A B c D E F G v 4 Go to File gt Save Custom Typeface As 5 Navigate to the drive and directory where you will store the file 6 Type a new file name in the File Name field then click OK or press Enter Note the sample file 28SharkElements fac is a custom typeface converted from a Chyron logo font Deko Training 7 1 Lesson 7 Creating and Using Custom Typefaces Custom Typefaces Custom Typefaces allow you to save graphic IDs logos and other graphic content to a typeface font for quick access and recovery Creating a custom typeface i
16. 2 Click in the Program window to se focus and open the sample file D Deko Tutorial training baseline dko A sample logo will appear along with a default text layer 3 Left click in the first Preset Style button to activate that style 4 Go to Layer gt Baseline Edit The graphic Laver window will become a Baseline Edit Properties window as indicated in the title bar Taree Add Test Field Baseline Edit Add Rectangle The text layer tool will become a drawing tool A 5 Click the Ellipse tool and then move the cursor to the Baseline Edit window and position in the very center of the logo 6 Hold down the Ctrl key then click and drag your mouse downward Release the mouse button when your baseline circle begins to enter the blue of the logo If the circle is a little off center select the Move tool and adjust the circle in the center of the logo Deko Training Creating and Using Custom Typefaces 7 Press Alt Enter to accept the baseline or go to Baseline gt Accept The baseline will change showing the text cursor In this mode you can enter text 8 Deko Training Baseline Draw Curve w Edit Curve W Loose Fit Tanl Crt Lassi Smoath SHimMENE Apply Baseline Enter Accept Baseline Al E nter Cancel 8 6 Creating and Using Custom Typefaces Editing a Baseline 1 Select Edit Baseline from the Layer menu Alt L gt B 2 Click on the Rotation tool in the Tools win
17. 6 12 Working With File Imports Exercise Creating a Lower third with a Sticky Texture In lesson 5 we created a series of lower third graphics with a background Sometimes it is desirable to reposition this background in the frame We refer to this effect as a sticky texture In this exercise you will use the elements from the lower third lesson to create a sticky texture lower third 1 Set focus on the Program window and open titlel dko 2 Click on the Background Shader button to turn the background off The text layers will appear without the background FRANK CAPELLI a Se sega 3 Select the Rectangle Shape tool and draw a rectangle over the lower third of the graphic FRANK CAPELLI 4 Click on the Look button in the Style window and delete any E Rectangle Piel Es details other than face Graphic Font 5 Set focus on the Face Shader Click on the Texture button and Details open title tga The lower third background should appear in the rectangle window in front of your two text layers 6 Set focus on the Program window and select the rectangle texture layer 7 Press Ctrl twice to move the texture behind your text layers 8 Inthe Face Shader window under Group choose letter When letter is selected your background graphic should disappear in the window Group FRANKE CAPELLI 2 Deko Training Working With File Imports 6 13 9 Click on the up arrow in th
18. Ger E ais led om exe over ye rR PHT NpeC TT Ono A E rer aT ener ry ea 15 3 CAA AC SO EE tases tess ates oth test Saat E cena ale E audit E T E 15 3 MS 11S AO Posse cenctanscsscsses anes cscdoseteancoussesss ANAS 15 4 To Pop Tet Ontoa Graphit Usine a Text Pop ot Style POD iis hstecnestnccsssaariesenaienensieatiannanisnaetnteaies 15 4 ToTlice Pop Texronto a Graphi enean aaaea ETE OR 15 4 exercise C reae aa U ETOD ennan aE O E EAA 155 Gee aroi DIR a ale 0 nr E E NTR oto ne nee nn nen MOTE REDO SERENE Rem ONY SPD SOM Re Tare 15 5 Crane aoa E EOD aar Aaro O EO A AAE AEC O T CNTR etre eee tT eee en eae eto ee 15 6 ae Wl ode cod a E a nye ee ae orn e a eee 15 7 Using ext OD onenn aAA Aa AOA A 15 8 Vant SNe a8 creer meet cere crore OCT errr Terer reve cree mere 15 9 Usine PIAS POPS versace teccecacseedesn cuca auc E U OOE eck ese putea tala tlle ltt te Sins hie ns eae sa uaaavanat 15 9 Lesson 16 AONA O BREE EERE EERE E EMP nrT CPOE EO PET eon gt Re e E ET OME EDT EDED EDT e Oe Deen near mene neat men rere ne 16 1 NG TDS COIN O A seen ses oa sata on wee casement ce a eS ts os es en indus esa daek Seeded aun whew eed oo eee 16 1 How Does Deko ALO MAA OT WHOL oP urtean uredbiensdeubineins dies nstr acaba a a bol stonswnfeiane den iaibs 16 1 lE aee EE LEa yale 0 eam MeN Meer E TORN ANEA TAEAE E VE EE AEE RE SO ET SOR ORRIN IA ROR AE E ae SIR A T ROT 16 1 BAS Aona O aeaaea EAT TAE Oa aa a i 16 2 ene a Fene EIE eaaa a E a aA 16 3 ae a AE e A E E E E E 1
19. H E Eddiep messages will appear o ES Elarson 98 Beane eee BETE A E D E20 rmer c Corp Identity E Texture m eles Textures FL Media Player TA H E Network Couse A Recycled E texture f a Research Ja H SevicePackG a oe texture _ E textures Delete R E textured H B Wacom vers H Workshops H E E E textured H E F o m textureSil ts Gar UD Teg Teka bas 1 e If the following message appears click yes and the folder or file s will be placed in the Recycle Bin Files placed in the recycle bin can be recovered Confirm File Delete e If this message appears click yes to permanently remove the folder or file s from the drive or system Deko Training Setting up and Managing File Directories 3 9 Note The second message will appear whenever you are deleting files from a networked drive or an external drive such as a zip disk or a floppy Files deleted from external drives or sources cannot be recovered Rescuing a Deleted Folder or File If you deleted a folder and sent it to the Recycle Bin you can easily recover it Windows provides a number of ways to do this Three ways are outlined here Click on the Undo button in the Toolbar lel Es View Tools Help lt Hee Xe SIS L Ctrl Contents of C PostDeko N TSC Samples Copy Ctrl C Paste Cirle 1700 dko 1172KB DEKO Graphi 5 15 98 7 15 AM Paste shor
20. Lance Justify Horizontal Justify Vertical Justifying Text Within a Layer 1 Select a Layer and press the Home key to enter the text layer 2 Without selecting any characters within the layer click on one of the justify tools to reveal the menu and click on the appropriate button Note You can justify text using the keyboard by holding down Ctrl and pressing the numbers on the keypad The positions are represented as follows 7 8 9 top left top center top right middle left middle center middle right bottom left bottom center bottom right 0 justification off Note Selecting all of the text within a layer before justifying will force the layer boundaries to fit the borders of the text and then justify to the safe title boundary If you select only some of the text in the layer a separate layer will be created for that text when it is justified Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 11 Special Settings e Full Horizontal Justification forces all of the rows with exception of the last rows or any hard returns flush with the left and right sides of the text This is full horizontal justification On a text field e Full Vertical Justification spreads the text so the top and bottom lines are flush with the top and bottoms of the layer box This is full vertical justification on a text field Deko Training 5 12 Working with Layers and Tabs e Spread Justification
21. Once you have created a name Deko will automatically increment the number at the end Deko will suggest that your next title be title2 etc Deko Training 5 20 Working with Layers and Tabs Fill in the Second Lower Third El title1 dko Program 1 This one is John Murdouch Eyewitness Remember to put the name and title into their own layers With OVR turned on you can just Tab and type 2 Again Save Graphic As lets you preserve your template file by making a new file on disk Use the default title2 dko Save Graphic As x File Hame Directories title dko d dekostutorial bulletsbgd dko sample dko template dko title 1 dko List Files of Type Deko Graphics dko Drives Network E d Comment Options Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 21 Fill in the Third Title and Save 1 This third CG page is J Christian Bollwage City of Elizabeth Mayor Notice that the Deko has automatically put both layers into a smaller font size to fit it into the available space 2 If the text ses within the layer when it first starts shrinking you will need to center the text within the layer using Ctrl Number key 4 3 Save this graphic 4 Repeat the same steps for these remaining lower third titles 5 Jeanette Hanlein Proprietor and Harold Lambeau Deputy Sheriff If done correctly your Save Graphic As window will look like this on the fifth save Save Graphic As Fi
22. Press the Browse Graphics key to open a window of thumbnail images displaying all graphic files for the current directory Press the Browse Typeface key to display thumbnail images for all fonts loaded on the system Preset Style keys Select text then press any one of eight Preset Style keys to load the look and font displayed in same position of the Preset Styles window located at the bottom of the Style Edit layout Deko Training FastAction Keyboard 14 3 M Function keys Deko s 12 Function keys are enhanced with quick access to commonly used N text functions These include font selection treatment size and spell check Dual Channel Selection For multi channel 2 program and Ipreview systems press the Pom A or Poem B keys for quick dual channel selection Transform Tools Use these tools to manipulate layers and text on screen They include Move Scale Rotate Skew Kern Lead Hold down the Alt key down and press the directional arrows to control transforming Clear Preview and Program Clear Preview and Program channels with a single keystroke This will revert the graphic to a default state containing one default text layer Delete Files and Save Files Delete files and save files rapidly by entering the numeric location Press the Delete or Save key twice to execute that function The graphic counter will advance to the next sequential location Deko Training 14 4 FastAction Keyboard
23. Right click on the Deko program icon and drag it to the desktop Move Here Copy Here 5 Release the right mouse button A menu will be revealed Select Create Shortcut s Here The Deko icon will be placed E on the desktop Cancel 6 Double click the newly made shortcut icon to launch Deko Launching Deko from the Start Menu When other applications are running the Windows Desktop may not be visible An EvDeko alternative way of accessing the shortcut is from the Start menu To place a copy of the shortcut in 4 the Start menu drag the Deko shortcut from the Desktop to EA cS the Start menu button and release A copy of the Shortcut will appear in the Start menu Now you can start Deko by clicking on the Start button and selecting the Deko icon in the menu Thunder Favorites Documents You may wish to place additional programs you use often in the Start menu for easy access Deko Training Verify and Configure Your Deko 1 5 Can t Find Deko in the Programs List 1 Click the Start gt Find gt Files or Folders cil tation 2 j Files or Folders Windows NT Work Type in the name of the desired application in the Named field Such as FXDeko exe FXDekoII exe PostDeko exe Click on the Find Now button Once the search has finished look in the list at the bottom of the window You should see a description of your filename along with a path that indicates its location Double clic
24. To Change the Color of a Selected Detail 1 Choose the selected component to adjust the color picker window HSV and Value are a good starting point 2 Click in the palette window to choose the desired color Note the color in the current color selection Color 3 Right click the Color button to transfer the color to TY the detail E Preset Shaders Preset Shaders oe shader NC i BIEL p E a A a A The 18 Preset Shader buttons appear at the bottom of the Shader window You can use these shader buttons to save your favorite shader settings Any type of shader may be assigned to any preset You can save the Preset Shaders to disk for later retrieval e To use a Preset Shader left click the desired shader and its settings will be deposited in the current shader settings e To save a current shader setting to Preset Shaders right click on any of the 18 Preset Shader buttons and the current setting will be deposited on that button Deko Training 4 20 Type and Modify Text e To save current Preset Shader settings click on the Shader window and choose Save As from the File menu or press F12 SK or Save File FAK Enter the name for the file and press Enter Note Deko will automatically add the extension shd to the file Ramp Shader The Ramp Shader allows you to create color gradients with or without highlight details The four buttons represent the individual color quadrants of the gradient In
25. anaes Eee ie save current shader as Ee preset style A style that has been saved in one of the eight preset style buttons in the Preset Style window Each button displays sample text in the preset style To change what sample text is displayed click Sample in the Typeface Browser and type in new sample text By default sample text on the buttons shows fonts in their actual sizes You can have the buttons display all fonts in standard sizes by choosing Preferences from the Options menu clicking the Advanced tab and un checking the Show actual font size in Presets box Preview window The window that shows a graphic that is not yet on air When playing back a sequence this window shows the next graphic in the sequence Program window The window that shows the current on air graphic The contents of this window match FXDeko s video output with the addition of a cursor safe title lines and other markers Deko Training Glossary G 15 quantizing The numerical value assigned to a digital sample In digital imaging the level of quantizing determines how realistically digital images will be reproduced The more quantizing levels for each sample the truer the digital representation will be to the original analog soutce RAM Abbreviation for random access memory a memory providing access time that is independent of location random access Also referred to as instant access a term used to define
26. click and hold on the In point for the third Timing bar Drag right until it displays an In time of 1 0s 1 sec O frames Click and drag the Out point left until it displays an Out time of 2 10s 2 sec 10 frames Click hold and drag the Scrub bar to preview Out Point Add Actions for Bullet Layers 1 Insert a New Action Object B Laver Layer name or number Position co ja H 1 Position E C r Position mA r l 2 Specify the Object as Layer and in Layer name or number select Col 1a 3 Inthe Parameter section enable X Posction 4 Inthe Timing section move the In potnt for the fourth Timing bar to 2 10 Note Be sure that the third and fourth Timing bars do not overlap Overlap 5 We will use layer naming as a method for grouping multiple layers In this example we will group all layers that begin with Col 1 Ge 99 To do this under Layer name or number replace the a with an Layer name or number asterisk Col E Mier El Drag the Scrub bar to preview This is called a s d card Deko Training Understanding Timeline Motions 10 23 Note Notice the addition of a sub bar below the timing bar This provides more control over grouped Objects and only appears when an Object is specified as Row Word or Character or used as a Wild Overlap Card We will use the round control in the sub bar to create a sequential delay between the placement of each bullet 6 Cli
27. in sequences There are three ways to pop text onto the CG page Text Pop A Text Pop pops in text only from a txt file at the cursor position Text is rendered in the current style For example during a baseball game you can pop stats into a lower third Style Pop A Style Pop pops in text and font at the cursor position This works like a text pop except it renders text in the stored style associated with the pop rather than the current style Place Pop a Place Pop pops in text and style appear on a specific position of the graphic regardless of where the cursor is You can for instance pop Final Results in the center of an on air election graphic even if the cursor is at the top of the page Deko Training SportsWare Pops 15 2 Creating a Text Pop To create a text pop Open a word processing program 1 Type the text 2A x a af Untitled Hotepad ot Saati et ee lt G oe mnnera Text pop aa eases a a E ana Fe er SS A S er E a E cae ee ppoesaanesssnasies ee se ee Navigate to the drive and directory where you will store the file and save the file as a text txt file Save As E3 Tutorial eee T D m i am 7 Deko Training SportsWare Pops 15 3 Creating a Style Pop To create a style pop 1 2 Creating a Place Pop To create a place pop 1 Activate a Program or Preview windo
28. it will take you to My Computer Desktop From My Computer you will go to the 2 3 My Computer J Adobe Desktop H 3 2 Floppy A C Backgrounds Se E C Chap 2 01 Firmware Deko Training 3 4 Network Neighborhood PT Exploring Elarson 984D4T exture File Edit View Tools Help E3 Texture ka Iae o x Setting up and Managing File Directories All Folders Contents of Elarson 984 04 7 exture Lun a Control Panel Modified in E Printers Textured O tga 1 140KB TGA File 12 8 00 2 30 PM gl Scheduled Tasks k E Texture21 taa 1140KB TGA File 12 800 2 31 PM 5 Network Neighborhood E Texture24 tga 1 140KB TGA File 12 8 00 2 32 PM Ele Entire Network E texture 25 tga 1 140KB TGA File 12 9 00 2 32 PM B mage wek E texture30 tga 1140KB TGA File 12 8 00 2 41 PM E es E textured tga 1 140KB TGA File 12 9 00 2 51 PM ce E E texture35 tga 1 140KB TGA File 12 8 00 2 52 PM gt TE c E texture40 tga 1 140KB TGA File 12 8 00 3 11 PM Ey i 5 E textured taa 1 140KB TGA File 12 8 00 3 12 PM JE Corp Identity testure45 tga 1 140KE TGA File 12 8 00 3 12 PM G Eric s E texture50 tga 1 140KB TGA File 12 11200 1 51 PM a Media Player Textures tga 1 140KE TGA File 12 11 00 1 52 PM H E Network Course E TextureS2 tga 1 140KB TGA File 12 11 400 1 52 PM y Recycled E Textured tga 1 140KB TGA File 12 11 400 1 57 PM E T Research H A aE H
29. 1 30th of a second A real time frame grabber can digitize and display full motion video freeze frame 1 The action taken or the device used to pull out a single field or a full frame from a sequence in full motion freeze frame 2 To hold a single frame or picture for a period of time gain A term used for amplification of an electronic signal Also stands for amplitude or volume In projection systems the ability of a screen to amplify incident light In cameras the ability to amplify the input signal to obtain pictures in low light conditions Deko Training Glossary G 9 genlock Circuitry that synchronizes the television signal source of two or more devices All video sionals contain synchronization pulses that are used to reconstruct the picture on the CRT When several signals are used together through a common device such as a switcher they all must be operating on the same sync A master sync generator provides gen ock to signal generating devices cameras VTRs switchers etc so that they can operate in sync glyph The word glyph comes from the Greek ghphe meaning a pictograph or other symbolic character or sign In FXDeko glyphs are actual renderings of characters in a particular style font and look FXDeko normally renders characters as you type them For a style with a large font or complicated look you can increase the speed of typing by pre rendering the style GPI General Purpose Interfa
30. A Restart Cancel Restart All M Sequence Playback Deko Training Appendix A 17 COM1 4 Press the Restart button next to the protocol you have just set up then press the OK button Note If you wish to change the Default Database you must restart the Protocol To do this select a new Default Database as described above Select Preferences Protocol to bring up the Protocol Setup dialog box Click Restart on the assigned channel s 5 Make sure the automation protocol has permission to control the desired channel Choose File menu Preferences then Channel Configuration 6 Inthe Channel Configuration window Notice the second column of checkboxes These checkboxes permit and deny access to the listed channels from the context chosen in the box at the top of the column ThunderNet will appear listed as IO COM1 Context Make sure the desired channel to control has its checkbox checked when IO COM1 Context is selected at the top of the column Hardware Channel 1 Channel Configuration ee T T cL Name Minikon Input Rey Hdw Channel Background Audio a a Hd 1 None Embedded None Embedded None Embedded Embedded lt lt lbo Imi I a x a a xl IO COM1 Context v aa RP fade a None p O poo 1 l Note the IO COM1 Context reference assumes that the Port box in the Protocol Setup window for the ThunderNet protocol
31. Check visually to see if Thunder played the clip 4 On the Thunder system open the Thunder Network Protocol application click on the Protocol button on the Windows Start bar Le Fi Poi CSS Ti tue WD Tite MEINS eee uu A Start ip SQL Server Enterprise Ma ca SQL Server Query Analyzer Thunder NetWork Protocol V IT Thunder Archive pff Shotbox Control QJ Exploring F Archd Exploring Deko Training Appendix A 21 Thunder NetWork Protocol Yer 2 3 54 BSLAB_THUN Chi Oi x 5 Inside this window you will see numerous messages as the two systems communicate Look for an error message you should see either Clip not found or Clip did not load See below 05 44 16 34 gt Loading 0_36 In 00 00 00 00 Out 00 00 05 07 Auto 1 05 44 16 34 gt LoadClip 0_36 Took 43 1257 Frames 05 45 49 03 gt Cmd 2 14 44 30 5F 34 31 28 nulls 01 11 nulls 05 45 49 03 gt CueClip 0_41 Called 05 45 51 15 gt Loading O_41 In 00 00 00 00 Out 00 00 30 05 Auto 1 05 45 51 15 gt LoadClip 0_41 Took 63 8776 Frames 05 50 12 76 gt CreatedN amedPipe pipeT hunderPipe1 05 50 12 76 gt Connected to pipe T hunderPipe1 05 52 01 56 gt Cmd 1 1 0 30 5F 34 05 52 01 56 gt GetDevicelD T hunder 05 52 03 54 gt Cmd 2 2 44 30 5F 34 31 28 nulls 01 11 nulls 05 52 03 54 gt CueClip 0_41 Called 05 52 05 67 gt Loading O_41 In 00 00 00 00 ess 00 40 05 Auto 1 05 52 05 67 gt LoadC
32. Cut Paste commands to move files between drives 1 Go to the drive that has the files you want to move 2 Select the files 3 Right click on one of the highlighted files A menu will appear 4 Click on Cut You will still be able to see the files but the file icons will be grayed out 5 Go to the drive to which you wish to move the files 6 Right click the folder where you wish to place the files in and click on Paste The files will be moved to the new location Note Macintosh users often drag and drop files between folders This is a dangerous practice in Windows as it can break directory links causing files to be lost to the program s search path Do not drag and drop files between folders Instead select the files and copy them then paste them to a new folder 1 Exploring 4Elarson 984D 41 exture File Edit View Tools Help E Texture S 3 fo y Bal xia All Folders Contents of SElarson 9e4 04 7 exture Eddiep mI Elarsoan 98 U01 dko H C Aen Pen Et o 0 H 0 Comer Add to 2p Ei Corp Identity m Texture 0 ip and E Mail Texture zip E a Eric s H Textures era a aSa a l H m Media Player 5 Testure d Bi nir E ule E texture25 ore ET Recycled g fexturega EOP H E Research m TI ServicePack6 textures Create Shortcut hexture so Ban Texture Delete ci WacomDrivers mj textured Rename o B Workshops m textur
33. Do one of the following 2wap owap e Inthe Channel menu choose Frame Grab Program to Preview Read Next Read Next e Inthe Keying and routing menu choose Frame Grab Frame Grab Grab Options gt Motion Suppress d Motion Suppress Now To Grab with Key 5 s Interpolate Scan Lines In the Keying and routing menu enable Grab with key perp v Preserve Field 1 Preserve Field 2 To Suppress Motion Jitter Go to Channel menu choose Motion suppress then select Motion suppress now You can optionally choose to suppress all Motion jitter while grabbing and other options handling fields and scan lines Deko Training 14 1 Lesson 14 FastAction Keyboard The FastAction Keyboard FAK enables common tasks to perform with a single keystroke It is designed for use in real time on air environments where speed is critical Though the Deko User Manual provides a detailed description of all FAK functions this Lesson contains a Quick Start Chart condensed descriptions to help get you started and steps to enable your FastAction keyboard N Dual Channel P Clear Channels FAK Quick Start Chart K Browse Graphics L Preset O Transform Q Delete File Browse Typefaces Styles Tools Save File J Macro Record amp Selection M Function Keys B Numeric Keypad for fast Graphic Recall G Preset F Transform Macro And Text Formatting Controls A Graphics Counter Use the
34. E A caddunrdads dled ches teanaue 5 4 WN Vel ee eE ES TT E T NOR TT TIN tenon NT arn 5 4 Word Wrap Prel ienes unani e E E ERE a ease 5 5 PICO AS CAIN a E E N O N TET dy Underneatnanssaliosuersuinentte 5 5 Exercise Continued Adus Une AUTO SCAN iian ea t a ONNETON ORRAT 5 6 The Move Tool Moving a Layer vs Movino Text csse a eieaa e ENAA 5 6 Movino SElCCHE GT OX eren TEE E NO OEE EO E 5 6 Seale Rotate Skew Kern and Justify Controls sssrssecnnnossnonuneaniniern a a s 5 7 Se Ea OAE e gs Re eee ee T E E Ree E E Sone E oe Me A E E T 5 7 Tosca eA Laye anae EE TE E A T O E 5 8 KOE Ea E eee 5 8 Gf orcs sin eE a EE E a E N A E E E AE E E A E E T 5 10 Tenma Teew inae Tay r a OO T ae hatin 5 10 Character Spacing Kerning and Row Spacing Leading eeesesessssesrsssseresrssesserestsrerenesrssrneneerressrnenesresenesse 5 12 Character Spacine Kerning and Row Spacing adine ccicscsscensosissrascutec sth C e e ORRA 5 13 Exercise Creating a Lower Third Template with a Keyed Background esssseesessssesssesessrreseserresesesrereseseses 5 14 Exercise Creating a Lower Third Template with a Keyed Backeround wee eeseseseeeeseseeseseseeseseeesseeees 5 15 CTH SM a a G E E E tse ts oc cs se Pele Se oat tin 5 15 Sep Dr ep Lower Wl Dit witlt LOCO visu tenn dscdeus antes OA AE leached auslatluisnan tacsta cate diac 5 15 Pe xetcise CG ieatine Grapes 1 Ot AW ei pol CS et neta tla lar a oni 5 19 Ea Yelk Ev aal om aeo e E EA rene Ree ee Rie eA Uy eye tT
35. However tga and tif work best since they are the commonly used formats that store a key sional Note Lesson 6 will introduce importing graphics and define and discuss the use of key signals alpha channels Step by Step Lower Third with Logo Clear the Program window Press Clear Program FAK or Alt F8 SK You will be creating a three part lower third a background image plus two text layers The two layers will be used for a two line lower third to hold a name and job title Load up the Sample Background Image 1 Set focus to the Program window 2 Press Clear Read FAK or F9 SK to reveal the File Open dialog Your directory path should read D Deko Tutorial 3 Change the file format from dko Deko to tga Targa in the List Files of Type box in the bottom left of the Open dialog box Open Fa File Name Directories idk Cancel Sd Pee gt Deka title_tga Targa TGA Pict PCT B Tutorial TEE ETIR a z Targa TGA Ue Network Targ 1 Network File info 01715798 O2 43 34PM 1 399 698 Options Deko Training 5 16 Working with Layers and Tabs 4 Double click title tga in the File Name list to open it Deko automatically loads title tga as a background into the Program window This image was created on a paint system and saved as a Targa file It includes a logo and textured lower third bars with semi transparency
36. Import a Text Document Since Deko supports standard ASCII text it can import text files such as credits from other applications You will use a sample text document provided in the Tutorial folder and place the contents of this document into the Deko program We will use the default layer provided Your text will be imported and placed into this layer according to the Current Style 1 Clear out the Program window Set up for vertical scrolling as instructed in this lesson Be sure to also set the window for Word wrap it should have a check mark next to it in the Text pull down menu Set the desired style and size that you would like for your text Open the file titled credits txt from the Tutorial folder Changing directory paths and File types should be familiar to you by now Your text will be placed according to the specifications you have set for justification style and size If you would like to specify justification make sure Num Lock is on and use the numeric keypad for these shortcut key combinations Ctrl 7 top left Ctrl 8 top center Ctrl 9 top right Save this file as a native dko Deko file in the same folder as your other files Set up your sequence to play these credits as you did in steps 5 and 6 of this lesson Deko Training Creating Sequences and Effects Exercise Create and Run a Crawl Before You Start A crawl is almost identical to a roll In both cases there are two sp
37. J abies Ei workshops T m selected 1 11MB Network Neighborhood displays the available network connections for your system In the above example the Network Connection Elarson 98 is open displaying its directory contents The Folder Texture located in the D directory is highlighted with its contents in the right window Network connections can be navigated in the same way as drive connections Note Not all network connections or directories will be available to you without proper authorization or a password If the Enter Network Password dialog box appears enter your login name in the Connect As field and your password in the Password field See your network administrator for help accessing the files you need Enter Network Password Incorrect password or Unknown Username for A nero Cancel Connect As Help Password Deko Training Setting up and Managing File Directories 3 5 Managing Files and Folders Copying Files Between Drives or Folders 1 Go to the drive and folder that have the original files you want to copy 2 Select the file you want to copy To select more than one file hold down the Ctrl key and click on each of the files you want 3 Click the right mouse button right click on one of the highlighted files A menu will appear 4 Click on Copy You won t see anything happen but the files are now copied to the Clipboard a temporary storage area on your computer BY Exploring C Po
38. Matte Linear Abekas Clean Linear Sony Cyber Key On Cyber Key Off VGV The following switchers require an unshaped input Manufacturer Model GVG 110 200 300 Ross All Echolab All BVS All VGV DX60 DX120 D2500 D X300 DX320 The following switchers accept a shaped input Manufacturer Model GVG All digital switchers VGV CN 60 CV 120 CV 132 CV 332 Sony All digital switchers BTS All digital switchers Abekas All Deko Training Appendix A 13 There is a simple test to check which mode your keyer is in Put up a box on your Deko using the drawing tools Fill the box with a ramp where the left side is 100 white 100 opaque and the right side is 100 white 0 opaque If you view the video or key for that matter output of the Deko on a waveform monitor you will see a straight line from 100 IRE down to black If you key this over a black signal and view the output of the keyer it should look the same if it is configured properly If you see a curved line it means the keyer is expecting an unshaped signal The optional Unshaper enables Deko to produce unshaped video The Unshaper s proprietary fill widening circuitry enables unshaped keying of the highest quality The unshaping can be turned on and off under software control allowing Deko to be used with any external linear keyer Deko Training A 14 Appendix GPI Connection GPI General Purpose Interface is a method by which electronic pulses from one device suc
39. N N O EAA 12 2 Ee E E E E O S cl Ge EEE E ee EAT AEE EAEE AEE EE ETE A E E E A EEN 12 3 Erao A cl I T E E E E T D E E E E EE A A EA A eee 12 3 PG COC TO O Grid D1 a E A E EA E N E T 12 3 Lesson 13 Channel Contisurattoircssesssssssesecccscasecsecssicwasecusesdsxscaneschecidesadubtsesaiuseladtentaduvasadisenedtes 13 1 Sinole Doa Channel peraosan sere c ere 2 caso roe sal Seat Sessa Seats acto RNE 13 1 ho speerhy onele Proca Pusa Preview Output sas icedens a A 13 1 TO Speer Dial Proc tanm C PUE eiscscss case santa caa cee seea AO RAAN AOA A 13 1 Usmo Deko s BUITE Oy E a e TETT cua NENE ENNE EEEE AECE RS 13 2 Rerne and ROVN arenan nana nan aE EINN NA EA ATCO 13 2 FAEG ADDII aE aa a A season E E N 13 3 Lesson 14 FastAction Keyboard iiainstei tosccstatndeced oeecawsonseticnioh ap eesi suntstodastyacciuatnowaenbeanaboandocanses 14 1 Exereise Pastest Way TOA et Randon Graphics tO M1 std ui irora e n AAi a 14 4 Exercise Fastest Way to Get Sequential Graphics to NIK sgt rire ance a naa 14 4 Faable s Disable Panci on Cy 5 nna ANA O 14 4 Enable FAK Numeric Keypad onrioi e OOTAS 14 5 Lesson 15 SPortsWateand POPs csisssdcadacadscatoesnacaiacedewssecacensdows o EE 15 1 PRIDOU POPS irira a OO EONO O EAO O OOO TE 15 1 Te OP eera E A E EEEE O O 15 1 Sl COD aaa araa ra E E E E 15 1 A Se E o E E hl caso E E E EE E E A N E AN E E N N 15 1 E o cer ig Ac cual 10 A EE EE T E E A E EET 152 der Va a Ne a A ac 0 o E E T E E Son ET TaD ETO HTD Sea e ee 15 2
40. O A 20 iow to contact Pinndcle Broadcast SUD POL sriain ia a E N E A22 Broadcast Support Ainiericas And CANALA iescissssse casas astlsdanscii risia E E ETEN A 22 DEOAGCISE SU PO EOP Oana r ea stactta ease tah A A 22 JexKe salen ts sels 0 0101 qin Ob dala lil CRU MeN ene yn att aL Monn eet eee eee mene en vay MEANY ter MeCN Sm gerne a eae A22 Prioadeas toup 0167 qo BE E enon nra E O TOON A22 Pinnacle Systems Corporate Website http www pinnaclesys COoM s sssssssessessessessessessessessessessesse A 22 GLOSSA on E O EE E a S G 1 Deko Training Lesson 1 Verify and Configure Your Deko Verifying Your Deko If you have PostDeko you should have in front of you a keyboard mouse and a VGA monitor The Deko family of character generators have video outputs so you should have a keyboard mouse VGA monitor and video monitor You do not have video output with PostDeko Throughout the rest of this tutorial you will need to look at the Program window of the Deko software whenever a lesson tells you to check your video output Identify Your Keyboard You might have either the standard or the FastAction Keyboard which makes it easier to harness the power of Deko Some shortcut keys change when you have FastAction In this tutorial we will mark shortcuts with SK for Standard keyboard or FAK for FastAction keyboard Shortcuts that apply to both will not be marked thine hen oo ee oe a HGG BEAREKE OR mE SEa i M ggz e Pie ee
41. PICT format supports RGB files with a single alpha channel and indexed color grayscale and bitmap files without alpha channels The PICT format is especially effective at compressing images with large areas of solid color This compression can be dramatic for alpha channels with their large areas of white and black Note Deko will not see alpha channels saved in the pct format png Portable Network Graphics PNG developed as a patent free alternative to GIF the PNG format is used for lossless compression and display of images on the World Wide Web Unlike GIF PNG supports 24 bit images and produces background transparency without jagged edges The PNG format supports grayscale and RGB color modes with a single alpha channel and bitmap and indexed color modes without alpha channels Note Deko will not see alpha channels saved in the png format pcx a graphics file format for programs running on PCs its supported by most scanners and desktop publishing programs The PCX format supports RGB indexed color grayscale and Bitmap color modes and does not support alpha channels Images can be saved with 1 4 8 or 24 bits per pixel bit depth wmf Windows Metafile Format a graphics file format used to store vector and bitmap data in memory and on hard drives for later playback to an output device Though native to Microsoft Windows several non Windows applications support this format as a means exchanging data with
42. Page Down keys will advance or reverse one page of picons at a time within the browser To advance to a particular graphic Deko Training fdeko dko lags dko 4 24 Type and Modify Text type the first letter of the graphic title The browser will advance to the first graphic with that letter Scroll forward to find your graphic Viewing Import Files in the Graphic Browser The Graphic browser defaults to viewing dko files To view non native Deko files 1 Set focus to the Graphic Browser 2 Goto File gt Change Directory The Change Directory dialog box appears 3 Choose the file type you wish to list from the List Files of Type drop down menu 4 Click OK The Browser will view files of the specified type Change Directory File Hame Directories d deko tutorial Ce bgdtb tga helmut tga Drives E d Network Note Do not choose All Files or picons of all file types in the directory will be created including text and other Deko file types which could make a graphic search very difficult Copying Cutting and Pasting Once you have defining the look of a given detail you can copy or cut the parameters of that detail and paste them to text elements The keyboard shortcuts for copy cut and paste are the same as for all Windows programs e Ctrl C Copy e Ctrl X Cut e Ctrl V Paste The keyboard shortcuts are the quickest way to perform this
43. Press Alt V then N to reveal the Motion l w Skyl window without a layout change Press Alt V then S to reveal ill W Curent Style the Style window W Preset Styles W Shader In this text we will note any menu selections as with this example Alt V gt S which translates to the Alt key plus the V key Effect Playback Shift F11 then the S key Sequence F11 Macro Fe Shortcut Keys Motion Also notice in this menu that some selections have a keyboard stills shortcut For example Sequence has F11 noted after it Function Custom Typeface key 11 is a keyboard shortcut for the Sequence Edit layout on a e E Standard keyboard You should begin to memorize the shortcut i Automation keys you use regularly They will save you a tremendous amount Databaze of time Learn to use the mouse as little as possible Aston import The View Menu Chyron import The View menu pictured above provides access to all of the tools eee available to the Deko interface The eight items checked in the Browser Crl L menu comprise the elements of the Style layout view The remaining items are additional dialogs we will explain later Selecting an item will toggle it on or off view Each standard interface layout uses a different combination of these mews Later in this lesson you will learn how to create your own custom layout using the tools of your choice Laver Browser SHift Ctrl B Remember use Alt V gt ID letter to select a vie
44. RONNIE AEE A EEE 4 21 E ER o Cos E E NEA I T I E T E E E EEEE 4 22 PELAR A S A T A a T 4 22 dhe Gn Shader QOpuon annau nee E a ET T ARECA E 4 23 ITE AC DON e aa a ovo tobe fond Sean otek ce yeh ueks oevanstenean tan musnsuee ta tannednaoesaetatabts 4 23 OW oye iabateeey iona wbalesessia Wl PASA raan rer ree AAE tert Re ore ete PCa ater OE Teme OOE 4 24 Cop no C wino anad Pa hela LOOR niione N ony Tye E T Oe aT Ter Teer Cor on TT Ton TTR ay CERT 4 25 Ro Bi EEE ee A cone eer rae Re Ton ere rer error er eer Tne ee ener Teen EAA RTT E r Reet rear Tern re re 4 25 Preset Oiyle WO Werte ecu A E eB E E A E TE 4 26 Pee AM E a A E NEEE OE T oor en een one e 4 28 DOCU Sy E E A E A AAT E E E A E EE T 4 30 Ceneri Desktop COn ONG soninig i ara N EEEE Aaa 4 30 DEON E E O tad del otoeaaet sh asl ua elianaaeeas 4 30 Seleen CARA CLES cad hissed Sa titse 250s vse ets A N west asada daha neane O 4 30 Cutting Copying and Pasting Details Styles Graphic Element 00 ee sseeeseseeesseeeeesseeesseseeasseeeesseneaens 4 30 Deko Training Contents Vv Lesson 5 Working with Layers and Tabende TT T T 5 1 Creatin oe Addiional LAVET srin a a A OONO OE TOO OTEA E OOOO A 5 1 CA a TK TA eiri r E E E E EATE O E EO 5 1 Morne BING INESIAIN OA EN Ay opo enan Snan AANTAS 5 1 TTS a aa e dati ET EEE O N OOA N ehedin dnote stresses 5 3 ORAE air a call E a A T A A E A oe ote E PE E I EE E A E NA E A E E E 5 3 Pxercise Eterna Textand Adjustine Layer AtMiIDUTE S scsi ost rr a
45. Style h the file in a Create Directory Ctrl F1 2 4 Type a file name in the File Name field then click Delete File OK or press Enter Note FX Deko software and hardware has substantially improved in performance and current releases show no difference in performance between normal style files and pre rendered styles Deko Training 4 28 Type and Modify Text Exercise Modify Text 1 Select Font in the Style window 2 Click the Typeface drop down menu and choose a font by name a The Quick q Brown fox jumped Over the lay Dog 4 Ka HE HI aE AE i bs 1 Typeface Drop down Current menu Style Thumbnail window Browser Selected text to change List To Add an Underline to Your Text 1 Select the text you wish to underline 2 Inthe Style window click the Look button 3 Choose Add then underline Style Fahl Graphic Eont Layer Look Details face edge shadow FACE Shader Deko Training Type and Modify Text 4 29 To Change the Color of Your Text 1 Select the text you wish to change 2 Select Look in the Style window choose Face from the Details list and then click the Shader button 3 In the Shader window on the right side of your desktop a Color button indicates the current color of your text ea Underline Sha ial Fa Color Texture Color Keyhole CAP RGE H5
46. We will cover layer based transitions in a later lesson that will show you how to create and save motion files with the Motion editor Bullet points in the body of a slate are typically emphasized with a graphical element such as a dot square sphere or arrow Deko provides you with two different ways to put such an element up on screen graphical layers and custom typefaces In this exercise you will use graphical layers to create the bullet points In the next lesson we will cover creating and using Custom Typefaces Step by Step Create a Text Layer for the Title Line of the Graphic and assign a style 1 Delete the default layer and make a text layer near the top third of the screen within the margins of the safe area 2 Specify Shrink to fit box and click off Word wrap 3 Assign Preset Style 4 from the Preset Style window but don t type in the layer Create a Single Text Layer for Bullet Points Assigning a Style 1 Create a single text layer for the main points you will be bulleting leaving some room to the left of the layer for the graphic bullet on each point Title layer SF KOSS I SOS IES OI OO SOS AS OS SO SE OOO Ee ESA ee asaueseacess Body layer Leave room for graphic bullets to be inserted Deko Training 5 28 Working with Layers and Tabs 2 Again specify Shrink to fit box and leave Word wrap off 3 Select Preset Style 1 and scale down the size of the characters to 30 Do this before typing into t
47. Windows applications WMF supports up to 24 bit images Deko Training Working With File Imports 6 5 File Compression Many image file formats use compression techniques to reduce the storage space required by bitmap image data Compression techniques are distinguished by whether they remove detail and color from the image Lossless techniques compress image data without removing detail lossy techniques compress images by removing detail The following are commonly used compression techniques e Run Length Encoding RLE is a lossless compression technique supported by the Photoshop and TIFF file formats and some common Windows file formats e Lempel Zif Welch LZW is a lossless compression technique supported by TIFF PDF GIF and PostScript language file formats This technique is most useful in compressing images that contain large areas of single color such as screenshots or simple paint images e Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a lossy compression technique supported by JPEG PDF and PostScript language file formats JPEG compression provides the best results with continuous tone images such as photographs e CCITT encoding is a family of lossless compression techniques for black and white images that is supported by the PDF and PostScript language file formats CCITT is an abbreviation for the French spelling of International Telegraph and Telecommunications Consultive Committee e ZIP encoding is a lossless compr
48. You may wish to change the name of a file or folder A file must be closed before you can rename it If it is still opened you will get an Access Denied message 1 Right click on the i UET a folder or file you File Edt View Tools Help want to rename A E C HEE A Xie enile menu will appear All Folders r Contents of C w B My Computer E H 3 Floppy A 2 Click on Rename A i Adobe i C box will appear a we 2 a Backgrounds File OE Chap 2 01 Firmware File around the name and h E Backgrounds Ra Deke Grophies de the name willbe Ji b oa Chap 2 01 Firmware Z FullShotS9 Explore highli hted PO ED Deko Graphics oo Upen ome H 9 FullShot99 o Frid importwatch F l a of l _ODemo 7 EHAdd to Zip 3 Type a new name importwatch een Add to Deko Graphics zip i Kpome ar i s oe ee ee A 1A Lang2559 Mssal Clip and E Mail Deko Graphics zip mary H E Mesql PostDeko Sharing the file extension be sure to G PostDeko J Program Fies type the file extension in Ee ee a Ea Send To the NEW NANE s Windows Renames the selected iter will not recognize the file Copy Paste File extensions are typically a three letter code preceded by a period such as dko for Deko graphic file type 4 Press Enter to complete the naming process Cel Exploring C 4 Create Shortcut Delete Rename yp Properties File Edt View Tools Help Jeg C
49. a Serve Indicator Macro 1 PA Open the sample graphic D Deko Tutorial 225 dko A lower third scoreboard for a tennis match will display See the sample below To the left of the player names locate the yellow ellipse shape layers Continue on to build a macro that will hide or reveal these layers to act as serve indicators E 225 dko Program US OPEN FINALS 20017 AGASSI 0 050 0 0 From Style Edit layout click on the Macro record button in the top right of the Deko interface to enable the Macro recorder The button will turn pink to indicate record If you are asked if you wish to clear the Macro window before recording select yes Go to Layer gt More Layers Un Text me Ea From the More Layers window scroll down and select Layer 14 _ Graphic Font Click OK Layer Look In the Style Edit window click on the Layer button H T e off I off i Click the More button at the bottom of the window then click on Hide Layer 14 will be hidden Merge with previous More l Lock a More het Eo Click on the pink Record button to stop the Macro recorder Ene Deko Training 11 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Using Macros Press the Macro Edit key to open the Macro window to view the recorded commands These commands make up the serve_up macro We will need 2 more macros serve_down and serve none Within the Macro window select and delete all comma
50. a signal during the analog to digital conversion process to evaluate how the signal has changed The process of dividing something continuous into discrete sections The resulting samples of the signal are used to form the digital representation of the signal saturation The intensity of a particular hue scaling Changing the size of something scan converter A digital signal processor that converts the high scan rate output of the computer display card to a high quality broadcast video signal rate Scan converters differ from encoding boards and boxes in that they usually can take a variety of scan rates from many computer systems and they are usually in the higher price range US 8000 to US 12 000 Deko Training Glossary G 17 scan line A complete horizontal row of pixels on the display surface of a CRT screen units The units FXDeko uses for the height of a typeface and for the location of text and shapes in a graphic Screen units are user definable in Options gt Preferences gt Advanced gt Resolution Once you set the number of vertical units the number of horizontal units is automatically set to 4 3 of that amount For convenience the default value for screen units is 486 in NTSC and 576 in PAL which equals the number of visible scan lines in each video standard SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface An intelligent controller standard used to connect peripherals like CD ROM drives and printers
51. across the face of the selected text Deko Training 4 10 Type and Modify Text More Selections To select a word position the cursor over the word and double click To select a row position the cursor anywhere on the line and triple click To select all the text in a Layer do one of the following e Press Ctrl Shift A recommended e From the top left of the text drag the cursor across and down to the lower left quadrant of the text e Press the Insert key to select Overwrite and press the Tab key e Go to Edit gt Select Field Alt E gt D To select multiple Blocks of Text which can be useful if you wish to isolate parts of a field only selecting certain characters or words do one of the following e Hold the Ctrl key down as you drag Release the mouse button and Ctrl key as you position for the next selection Then repeat the process The example right shows three characters selected psec i Au e Go to Edit gt Select More Move the cursor with the arrow keys to position for selection Hold down the shift key and use the arrow keys to make a selection recommended To select all text characters in the Current Style 1 Position the cursor next to a character of the style in question so that the style shows in the Current Style window Basson 4 l l I panan l l l F oe p passi 2 Go to Edit gt Select Style Alt E gt Y or Shift Ctrl S To select all text from all L
52. area in an image to the darkest possible area control point The point at either end of a Bezier curve or a line segment In FXDeko you can move control points to change the curvature or length of a baseline segment convergence Proper alignment of the vertical and horizontal lines to ensure that red blue and green signals are correctly registered to produce a proper color image on video displays Convergence circuits are found on color monitors and projectors crosstalk Interference of one channel of electrical information with another adjacent channel This could be from one stereo channel to another e g left to right right to left or chroma and luma information in a video system cue To ready a source for playback or to locate the starting point of a tape current event The event you are editing or playing back FXDeko indicates the current event by highlighting its event number cutrent style Style based on current Font and Look settings in the Style window FXDeko displays the current style in the Current Style window Any text you type in a graphic appears in the current style When text is selected the current style becomes the style of the first character of selected text When a layer is selected the current style becomes the style of the layer Deko Training G 6 Glossary custom typeface A typeface made in FXDeko for typing graphical ogo characters You create a custom typeface by im
53. because you would have to scale up when changing to video resolution thus reducing image quality Deko Training Working With File Imports 6 7 Bringing Images Into Deko When you wish to import an image into Deko use the File Open dialog box and select the file format from the List Files of Type menu OU 33 tg f 150 tga If you are unsure of the aspect ratio balloons 2 tga i Pebe lga j E Photowork settings click on the options button Billboars tga This reveals the File Open Options Cafe ty tga E Cafe ty te tga dialog box chicagosky 4 The top section of this dialog box 7 provides Image size information Targa taal i represented in Horizontal and Vertical Test TT oo TIFF ti Pixels VIL vil The Bottom How to formar section gives you four choices on how to bring the image into Deko The Choices are e Scale to full screen recommended use this choice if the original image is already scaled to the correct aspect ratio 640 x 480 or 720 x 540 will scale cotrectly at this setting If you followed the recommended practice the image will look correct as well File Open Options e Square pixels preserve height This setting will preserve the vertical dimension setting of the image and stretch or shrink the horizontal dimension to fill the frame e Square pixels preserve width This setting will preserve the horizontal dimension setting and stretch or shrink t
54. click on it This will change the current font setting To change a font size 3 Select the text Ctrl Shift A 4 To change the font size click on the arrows of the size box to increment the size or type a value into the size box and press enter on the keyboard Style Window To change a font or font size using the Style window 5 Click on the font button in the Style window to bring up the font parameter dialog box 6 Use the Typeface list menu in this dialog box or click on the Browse button in the window to reveal the Typeface Browser This browser reveals a window with samples of available typefaces Scroll to a desired typeface and double click on it The window opens as a single column of typeface icons You can resize this window to any size up to screen maximum to show more fonts m Typeface Browser Abadi we mS Agency FB Aa Arial Anal Black Aa Anal Rounded MT Bold Baskerville Old Face Bauhaus 93 Aa Keyboard The FAK has a dedicated key for the Typeface Browser On the SK type Ctrl L to open the browser then select File Browse Typefaces Alt F gt F Deko Training Drop down Type and Modify Text 4 13 Changing a Typeface Typeface Browser jl Style lel E3 Graphic Font Layer Look Typeface oe B rown TOX Size Width ee Ufc over m jS po J i the lazy Dog Bold Small Caps iene Italic Typeface Seen rape A nies
55. click on this word to select it Click in turn on presets 2 to 8 in the Deko Preset Style window or press Style 2 to 8 FAK Click on the record macro button again to turn off the record function Press the Macro Edit key or go to View gt Macro The macro you just recorded will be displayed T Untitled Macro LA m j l m T Li rt j l w T 7 LA a rt ook F text_cursor nearest 156 96 164 35 select word select style preset 2 d 4 Select style preset 5 Fi B select style preset 4 F A Press F5 then F8 or Clear Program FAK to select the graphic window and erase it Click on the green macro play button to perform the macro and you will then see the word Deko appear in Style 8 You may have expected it to appear first in Style 1 then cycle through to Style 8 The reason that it does not appear to do that is that the macro performs all of the actions very quickly To slow down the macro select the macro window as in step 7 Click with your mouse at the end of select word and then press the Enter key to insert a carriage return Deko Training 11 4 b 13 14 Using Macros Type render This is a useful command when you want the machine to wait until it displays a graphic before moving on to the next step m Untitled Macro Mie text_cursor nearest 156 96 164 35 select_style preset Click here step 12 select_style_preset select style preset Enter a carri
56. color TV transmission system in the United States Used to refer to the North American broadcast scanning standard for television of 525 lines per frame at a rate of 30 frames per second Established by the American National Technical System Committee NTSC is used as a general term to describe the color and standards of American broadcasting Other color standards such as PAL and SECAM are used by different countries and are not compatible with NTSC Object oriented graphics A picture or other graphic where each object rather than being made up of separate dots as in a bit mapped graphic is treated as a unit OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer A manufacturer that sells equipment slightly redesigned to several vendors Each vendor then puts its name on that equipment and sells it as its private brand PAL Phase Alternating Line A video standard used in Western Europe Latin America Great Britain South Africa and Australia PAL uses 625 scan lines with a 25 frame 50 field per second rate PAL is not compatible with NTSC patch bay A junction panel of connector jacks patch points that serve as a convenient location for making all system connections It consists of two rows of connector jacks which are wired with various sionals from the rear of external equipment pedestal See black Deko Training G 14 Glossary phase The timing of an electronic signal Two signals that occur simultaneously are zm
57. detail 7 Type Ctrl V to paste the detail Styles Styles are the combination of a font plus a ook As you have just found out setting up a style can be a time consuming operation Deko allows you to save your work as individual styles that can be recalled as desired Styles can also be combined on Preset Style windows that combine eight styles together These are accessible simply by clicking on a style button or pressing the Style buttons one through eight on the FastAction Keyboard Once you have selected and adjusted your font and have defined its look with the Style and Shader windows you can save your completed fonts for future access To Save a Style 1 Make sure the style is visible in the Current Style window 2 Click on the Style window Deko Training 4 26 Type and Modify Text 3 Select Save As from the Edit menu or press F12 SK Save File FAK Enter the name of the style and press Enter Note Recommended practice is to save styles to a preset palette pst file rather than be saved as an individual style Preset Style Windows Preset Style windows allow you to conveniently save up to eight styles at a time and you can save as many Preset Style windows as you like Each is saved with a pst extension E Preset style Arial Anal Arial Arial Anal Arial Arial To Assign a Style to a Preset Style Window 1 Ifthe Preset style window is not in view go to View gt Preset Styles 2 Inthe graph
58. enabled properly First check to see that Num Lock is set on the keyboard If this does not correct the problem do the following 1 Go to Options gt Preferences 2 In the Preferences dialog box select the Common tab 3 To the right you will see settings for the FastAction keyboard Click Enhanced Keypad FastAction Function and FastAction Lights keys to place an X in each box Deko Training Verify and Configure Your Deko 1 9 4 Click on the OK This will activate the keyboard native H Versions before 3 0 If the boxes are grayed out this means the drivers may not be installed If you have the drivers they may not work of you upgraded Windows NT Service Pack 6 To find your software version go to Help gt About Deko To fix this problem re install the FastAction Keyboard drivers Begin as if you were installing the entire Deko program 1 Run Setup exe from your Deko installation disk 2 Keep the destination directory the same as where you installed Deko 3 Choose Custom installation 4 When you reach the window pictured below deselect all components by clicking directly over each check mark except for the FastAction Keyboard Make sure FastAction Keyboard has a check Deko Training Di Verify and Configure Your Deko Frogram Files 3256 E Help Files 2050 K Spell Check Files OF Dongle Driver 106 F K Fasticton Kevboarndsl K4 TY Driver 1022 K Click Next to complete the installatio
59. exit Deko choose File gt Exit Altt F4 or click on the close box on the Deko Interface Deko Training Verify and Configure Your Deko 1 17 Exercise Enter Text Into Bio Page Play to Air With an Effect This sample exercise is designed to familiarize you with various components of a Deko graphic as well as entering saving and recalling text See the sample below a ere be dio Pee HOMETOWN Los Angeles Californi OCCUPATION thjProfessional lenni a I EE HOBBIES Swimming Fishing Typing 1 1 Click in the Program window to set focus and open the sample file D Deko Tutorial training_bio dko 2 On the keyboard toggle the Insert key to enable Overwrite OVR mode Look to the status bar at the bottom of the screen to see that OVR is displayed 3 Press the Tab key to jump from layer to layer in the graphic Enter personal information for the following layers name hometown occupation and hobbies 4 Press the Save File key and enter 99 as the filename message address Save your file to the Tutorial folder 5 Press the Clear Program key to clear out the air channel Do the same for the Preview channel 6 Ona FastAction keyboard FAK Enter 99 from the numpad then select the Read Preview key On a Standard keyboard SK go to View gt Preview Select the Read key F9 and open 99 dko 7 Take notice of the FAK s blinking Play key and the mouse icon indicating unavailable Deko
60. for digital data storage Bernoulli disks use a floppy piece of magnetic material housed in a rigid cassette The disks have a storage capacity of about 20 MB and a data access performance equivalent to hard drives binary A numbering system that uses only two values one and zero It is used extensively by modern electronic equipment that responds to being in a state of either ON or OFF The foundation of information processing in all digital systems bit Short for binary digit the smallest unit of digital information with a value of 0 or 1 A bit is the smallest element of a digital word See binary and word bitmap A set of numerical values specifying the colors of the pixels in a graphic image A representation of images or graphic information made up of individual bis of picture information or pixels picture elements Bitmaps are computer maps of these bits that can be re created pixel for pixel when displayed or printed bitmapped graphics A form of graphics that is made up of individual b s of picture information or pixels picture elements The graphic consists of a computer map of these bits that is re created pixel for pixel when displayed or printed Deko Training Glossary G 3 black Video signal set to a pre determined level 7 5 IRE units so that no picture information appears and the screen is black Also referred to as pedestal or setup the level at which this signal is set determines overall pi
61. for the speed of typing Set the cursor anywhere within a row of content you wish to exchange up Shift ALT up arrow will exchange up the list one row at a time Shift ALT down arrow will exchange down the list one row at a time Deko Training 5 38 Working with Layers and Tabs To Select All Text at a Tab 1 Set the cursor anywhere within the desired Tab column 2 Press Shift Alt T to select all the Tab s text 3 Use this function for changing the font or look of text within a single Tab column Once selected left click on any one of the eight Preset Styles To Locate and Modify Tab Position To locate the Tab Stop in the first left most Tab column press the Home key Look to the status bar for the word Tab To Locate the Tab Stop in any other Tab Column 1 Set the cursor to the right of the last character typed in the previous Tab column Look to the status bar for the word Tab 2 Set the cursor at a Tab Stop 3 Enable the Move Tool Ctrl M Hold the Alt key down and use the right or left arrows to reposition the Tab column Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs Shortcut Keys File Management Open File Save File As Save File Open Graphic Browser Selecting Tools Move tool Scale tool Rotate Skew tool Kearning Leading tool Course Fine movement Layer Controls Bring to Front send to Back Bring Forward one layer send Back one layer Justify layers or text Clear Text f
62. graphics counter alphanumeric display to view the numeric location of a file as it is being typed Press the Read key C to recall the file to the currently selected window The counter will advance to display the next sequential file Press the Prev and Next keys on the numeric keypad to cycle through all files alpha and numeric in the current directory B The Numeric Keypad Press the Num Lock key to enable A yellow light will illuminate This provides fast access to reading files You can quickly call up graphics with numerical file names by typing the filename on the numeric keypad Press the Read key C to open to the currently selected window Deko Training 14 2 FastAction Keyboard Read Type the numeric location or press the Prev or Next keys to display a file in the graphics counter Press the Read key to open that file to the currently selected window Pressing Clear then Read will display the Open dialog box You can navigate then double click on a filename to open into the currently selected window Smart Read keys Read Preview and Read Program automatically opens the entered filename to the either the Preview or Program channel without changing focus of the current window This allows random access to either channel with a single keystroke Playback and Macro Edit keys Playback controls for sequences and single effects include Stop and Play Pause is executed by pressing th
63. holding down the Alt key and pressing the Tab key When you press and hold the keys the following menu appears showing each program running on the task bar Each time you press the tab key you toggle between programs If multiple programs are running hold down the Alt key and press the Tab key until the blue square highlights the program you want Then release both keys and the program will switch Adobe Photoshop Deko Training 3 14 Setting up and Managing File Directories Deko File Types Deko uses a variety of file types to save various kinds of data Each file type is identified by a three letter extension e aut Automation file opened or saved from the Automation or Database window e dko Graphic file opened or saved from the Program or Preview window e efx Effect file opened or saved from the Effects window e fac Custom typeface opened or saved from the Custom Typeface window e mcr Macro file opened or saved from the Macro editor e pst Preset Style file opened or saved from the Preset Style window e mot Motion files opened or saved from the Timeline Motion editor e segq Sequence file opened or saved from the Sequence editor e shd Shader files opened or saved from the Shader window e sty Style files opened or saved from the Style window Setting Directories and Paths in Deko Deko saves and opens different file types from a directory you spe
64. is currently paused awaiting the play of an effect 8 Press the Play key FAK or Alt Enter SK to resume the effect Look at the video monitor to see your work Deko Training 1 18 Verify and Configure Your Deko Shortcuts Keys Close the Deko program Alt F4 Save Settings Now Alt O gt S Save File As F12 Save File Alt F12 Style Edit Layout Alt F11 Deko Training Lesson 2 Navigating the Deko Interface The Deko Interface When you open the Deko program the window will display the starting layout you set to configure on the Common tab of the Preferences dialog box If you configured your system in Lesson 1 the window should open to the Style Edit layout This is the preferred layout for graphic creation In this section we will review some important concepts for quickly navigating the Deko Interface We will also introduce the four main layouts for work within Deko Finally we will show you how to create and save your own custom layout When you are working in Deko the look of the screen will change depending on the layout you are using All layouts share some things in common For example each window will open with a menu bar at the top of the layout These menus provide you with the tools necessary for running the Deko software and are key to mastering the program The menus will change depending on the layout selected and the window activated for each function Options Window Help If you position the mouse pointe
65. keyboard hold down Alt and press the up arrow to increase space and the down arrow to decrease space Use Ctrl Spacebar to toggle between fine and course control To change Leading using a mouse 1 Move the mouse pointer to a handle above or below selected text so the ie pointer becomes a leading tool 2 Drag the handle downward to increase the space between rows or upward to reduce row spacing Deko Training 5 14 Working with Layers and Tabs Note Numerical kerning and leading values can be entered for selected text or to current style setting if no text is selected by entering a value in the Kerning or Leading fields in the Style window Positive values increase the space between characters or rows and negative numbers decrease it To change leading select Kerning Leading tool and a ng position on one of the o a boxes so the leading tool a e a nN i q shows Then drag the NA Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 15 Exercise Creating a Lower Third Template with a Keyed Background Before you start A graphic consists of one or more ayers and a background The use of a background the bottom graphic element over which all layers and their contents appear is introduced in this exercise Deko allows you to import a wide variety of file formats and use any file as a background For keyed backgrounds like the lower third in this exercise Deko can import a variety of file types
66. layer to query a database and display the value of a field within that database A database query differs from Deko s existing query feature which sends inquiries to a newstoom automation system Database queries send inquiries to database files which may be stored on a local system drive or accessed by a LAN or WAN To use the database connection feature you must have the ODBC driver installed to support the database source The ODBC driver is automatically installed during installation and setup of your database software package You must also specify a data source name DSN View ODBC Drivers To view installed ODBC drivers 1 Go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel 2 Double click the ODBC icon to open the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box 3 Click the ODBC Drivers tab Specify a DSN See also the Test Drive section on page 16 4 To specify a DSN 1 Go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel 2 Double click the ODBC icon to open the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box 3 Click one of the following e User DSN To create a data source that is visible only to you and can only be used on the current machine Deko Training 17 2 Other Options e System DSN To create a data source that is visible to all users on the current machine e File DSN To create a data source which allows you to connect to a data provider and which can be shared by multiple users who have the correct driver inst
67. layers background row etc on which to perform the effect Options depend on the specific effect If this is left blank the effect applies to the entire graphic e Rate set this rate as you would set rate in the sequence window described above e Units set the unit of measurement for rate e Hold when check loads the graphic in and waits for a trigger to play the effect 4 If you wish to save the effect as an efx file press Save File or F12 and enter a file name then click OK 5 Press the play key or Alt Enter to play the effect 6 Making sure the Sequence window is active save the sequence using Save File on the FAK or F12 on the SK Deko Training Creating Sequences and Effects 9 17 Embed Effects To embed an effect into a graphic 1 Open a graphic in the Preview window 2 Select Style from the View menu F6 3 Click the Graphic button on the Style window 4 Click the Select button and navigate to the effect efx file 5 Save the graphic 6 To play the graphic simply open it in the Preview window Deko automatically plays the associated effect If read in the Program window the graphic will cut to air without an effect Select effect file 100 efx Be dA gt Deko Note This will not occur unless your Preferences E gt Tutorial are set correctly Open Options gt Preferences and click on the common tab Check Automatically play associated effects If the Effect Playback window is
68. open when you open the graphic Deko automatically focuses on the Effect Playback window after the effect plays Note Press Ctrl Play to play Prei the effect again references gt Enhanced Keypad Check this box if you wish to have embedded Do Restiction Function hers effects to playback on graphics Deko Training 9 18 Creating Sequences and Effects Shortcuts Sequence Layout SK F11 FAK Seg Edit Effects Layout Shift F11 Play Effect Sequence SK Alt Enter FAK Play Save window contents SK Alt F12 FAK Alt Save File Save as window contents SK F12 FAK Save File Enable Horizontal Scrolling Alt T gt H Enable Vertical Scrolling Alt T gt V Deko Training 10 1 Lesson 10 Understanding Timeline Motions In this lesson we will introduce the components of the Timeline window and you will create a basic Motion using FXDeko s Timeline Motion editor We will also define the important concept of Content Independence Before You Start The Timeline Motion editor shown below is an option for FXDeko v2 0 or higher Using the Timeline Motion editor you can create text animations called Motions which are not based on specific graphics The Motion window contains a series of one or more Actions that is saved in a Motion mot file You can then specify that Motion file within a sequence just as you would any other effect f Untitled Motion oi co Effect Screenmove
69. operation As an alternate you can use the Edit menu selections for Cut Copy and Paste or use the Tool Buttons Edit Undo detail set Ctrl Heda Et AT w Enable Undoer Cut Detail Ctrl Copy Detail Ctrl C Paste Detall Ctrl Undo typing Cr Beda EET W Enable Undoer Cut Ctrl Copy Selected Ctr C Paste Look Ctrl Style Font Clear ll AlteFS sal Clear Background Ctrl Fa R F Tab Clear Layers Fo lia Clear Selected Text Delete Deko Training Type and Modify Text 4 25 Copying Cutting and Pasting Looks When a Style window is active Cut Copy and Paste acts on Details Use this when you want to Copy and Paste details from one Style to another To Copy and Paste a Look 1 Select text whose look you wish to copy 2 Go to Edit gt Copy gt Look 3 Select the Text or position the cursor where you will apply the new look 4 Go to Edit gt Paste Look or type Ctrl V To Cut or Copy and Paste a Detail 1 Select the text element that contains the s y e you wish to copy 2 Activate the Style window 3 Choose Look at the top of the window and select the defai you wish to copy from the Details list 4 Type Ctrl C copy or Ctrl X cut to copy or cut Cut removes the detail Copy leaves the detail intact but copies it to the clipboard so it can be pasted to another element 5 Select the ext element you wish to paste details to 6 Click on the detail in the Details list where you wish to insert the copied
70. pam z font enetianaey BI Sizest2 58 width 12 2 kerning 14 51 i su CL ee SPACEY Face pipea SHCOLOR hsv 8 9 l SSHABOW shadow SRCOLOR 11 4 Press Enter to display all the commands that Grom font untorstgRonn BT size 62 58 ulgto u 3 kerning 0s SFOHTS Font Futura Condensedlight sizes 07 width make up your settings in the Macro Edit window Lone wo ront Didagstans Mediun size s169 92 width 174 7h 4 kerning 1 87 small cap SHCOLOHS rgb 0 0 EFACE face KCOLORS pae look EFAce FONTS font Futura CondensedLight size 24 1 width 127 393 4 5 Click on the pink record button to turn the ele hsv B B 1 9 HCOLORS hsv B 31 8 recorder off SRAMP1 ramp SKCOLORS KCOLORS KCOLORS RCOLOR hilight direction s8 hdlight_thichness 46 hilight_color KCOLORS FACES face SRAHFA LOOKS lork SPACES SFOMT amp Font Folio Bd n BT sizess kerning 4 e e SHCOLORG hsv 43 6 20 1 5 8 6 Set focus to the Macro Edit window and press Graces Face SHCOLORG enoeng LOO look Ctrl End to place the cursor at the very end of FONT T font Brashseript BT size 190 78 keraing 1 05 SHCOLORE uae a a 78 the Macro men rany EA SKCOLORS SKCOLORR SKCOLORY hilight_enabled 4 hilight_direction a1 hdlight_thichnesse4 hilight_color 3KCOLOR SSHADOWa shadow KCOLORAG 3 7 To display a confirmation of the Macro s success komien ts sa a type the followi
71. phase if they occur at different times they are out of phase Phase Alternating Line PAL The broadcast television standard in Europe as well as other locations calling for 625 lines per frame transmitted at 25 frames per second North American standards call for 525 lines per frame transmitted at 30 frames per second picons Picture Icons On screen visual objects that represent media elements PICT A standard format for encoding computer graphics and images term is an abbreviation of picture PICT 2 or PICT II An update of the PICT adding color support and formatting instructions carried as comments in the image file pin location A character s pin ocation determines how it will be placed relative to the baseline of the current row The Y value indicates the baseline of the character and the X value indicates the left edge of the character pixel picture element 1 The smallest unit of picture information on imagers scanners printers displays images or graphic files 2 The basic picture element of a computer screen or graphics sensing array such as a CCD the smallest dot a computer can create 3 The individual picture elements on a picture tube or display device preset shader A shader that has been stored in one of the 18 shader presets at the bottom of the Shader window All 18 preset shaders may be saved in a shader presets file Preset Shaders Leftclickto NB Right click ta
72. primarily by specialized electronic character generators and graphics systems and used in videotape applications Personal computers equipped with special video output cards are capable of producing graphics for video production gray scale An even range of gray tones between black and white GUI Graphic User Interface A computer operating system that relies on menus icons and a pointing device mouse for user interaction The foundation for the Macintosh personal computer and IBM PCs operating with Microsoft Windows 3 0 High Definition Television HDTV A high quality television system that has a wider aspect ratio 16 9 and increased number of scanning lines 1080 providing video images of a cinematic quality Deko Training G 10 Glossary history A drop down list of commands that have been executed since the last ttme FXDeko was rebooted horizontal resolution In a television scanning system the specification of resolution in the horizontal direction meaning the ability of the system to reproduce closely spaced alternating black and white vertical lines of detail across the screen The number of alternating black and white lines is divided by the aspect ratio usually 4 3 to make comparison between horizontal and vertical resolution easier This number is usually expressed as TV lines per picture height hue The shade of a color See Wavelength interface An electronic device that al
73. right arrow key It is important to distinguish the difference between a box cursor around a character and a character that has been selected shown in the third example below Deko Training Type and Modify Text 4 9 Setting the Text Cursor l Beam cursor Box cursor Correct selection no characters no characters of character selected selected To set the cursor go to Options gt Preferences and in the dialog box select the Cursor tab Choose your preference For the remainder of this document we will use the I beam Text cursor style cursor If you are more comfortable with the box cursor choose it Moving the Cursor You can reposition the cursor by positioning the mouse and clicking at the place where you want it This will place the cursor at current mouse position Use the keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor a character or row at a time e Left or right arrow keys move the cursor a space at a time e Up or down arrow keys move the cursor a row at a time e Ctrl Left Right arrow moves the cursor a word at a time Selecting Characters You can select characters with either the mouse or the keyboard To perform character selection e Press the Shift key and move the arrow keys e Drag the mouse This operation places a bounding box around the selection If the bounding box contains characters or words not selected the characters selected will be noted with a row of dotted lines otherwise known as measles
74. shows COM1 If another COM port was selected in that box before it was disabled that COM port number will appear in the second column of checkboxes Deko Training A 18 Appendix FXDeko Configuration 1 Goto Options gt Configure Clip Servers 2 Enter a unique number in the Server ID box 3 If there are no clip servers already configured the first number to be entered is 0 If there is already a clipserver 0 for example if you have ClipDeko you should already have a clip server 0 you may enter 1 here Note The remainder of this procedure will assume the Clip Server ID number is 0 If you entered a different number here use this number instead of 0 Clip Server 6 Thunder O Thund Protocol gt gt gt SSS Name Protocol Thund Protocol insert Delete 4 Enter a name in the Name box This name is arbitrary However to avoid confusion we recommend the name Thunder The input box allows you to indicate which FXDeko input is connected to the server if desired 5 Inthe Protocol box choose Thund Protocol Press the Insert button the clipserver will appear in the list and the properties button should become active 6 Press the Properties button The server ID is the number given in the Configure Clip Servers window in the Server ID box 7 Select the appropriate Video Type NTSC or PAL 8 Make sure the Network Com checkbox is checked 9 Set the Codec box to show which Thun
75. the th oo m A hidh size and width indicators in the Font tab Style window change m i Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 7 Moving Text with the Keyboard You can also move selected text with the keyboard press Alt Arrow keys to move in four potential directions Cir Spacebar toggles between Fine 1 pixel line and Course 10 pixels lines movement This works when moving layers and objects as well Note Moving text within a layer is not the recommended practice Moving one word within a layer of many may be confusing We suggest that you make the word it s own layer so as not to affect the position of other words To do this select the word and type Alt T gt F Scale Rotate Skew Kern and Justify Controls Deko provides tools to enable easy scaling rotating and skewing text With the Justify controls text positioning on the screen is easily adjusted As with the Move tool there are keyboard equivalents for all of these adjustments These actions take on slightly different characteristics when applied to an entire layer vs to selected text within the layer Let s examine each of these attributes Scaling Text and Layers To change the size and position of selected text within the layer use the Scale tool To select the Scale tool do one of the following e Click on the Scale Tool in the Tool window e Press Ctrl W SK or Scale button FAK When text is selected within th
76. the capability of a videodisc to access specific frames regardless of location on the disc raster The pattern of the moving electron scanning beam in a CRT usually moving left to right and repeating over the image from top to bottom as a series of horizontal scan lines In an NTSC system the raster scan of one TV frame consists of 525 individual scanned lines made up of two interlaced fields of 262 5 lines each The scanning pattern creates a new frame every 30th of a second real estate The space available on a videodisc or tape real time The actual time in which a program or event takes place reference black level pedestal Part of the video signal that provides a reference level for total picture brightness render To draw an image as it actually appears in schematic or blueprint form resolution FXDeko specifies resolution in screen units which are user definable in Options Preferences Advanced Resolution The default value for screen units is 486 in NTSC and 576 in PAL resolution The maximum definition a particular system is capable of reproducing Resolution is measured in the number of discrete observable lines that can be reproduced on a system The higher the resolution a system is capable of producing the sharper the picture will appear In TV resolution is measured in vertical and horizontal lines or the total number of observable black to white line transitions observable in the pictur
77. to microcomputers sequence A list of events that controls the playback of a series of FXDeko graphic files serial communications Multi pin digital communication lines allowing several communications to occur sequentially along each conductor enabling the connected devices to talk and to receive at the same time set width A character s set width determines how much horizontal space the character occupies when typed A character s set width plus its pin location equals the pin location of the character to its right setup See black shader Controls the color solid texture ramp or keyhole of a detail or a background sprite graphics A small graphic picture that can be moved around the screen independently to produce animation status bar The line of information at the bottom of the screen which shows FXDeko s current status message line currently playing macro cursor location inserttypeover numlock currenttime For Help press F1 mymacro Layeriof Ln112 Dot65 Coarse INS CAP NUM 3632K 9 03 AM selected layer coarse fine caplock memory usage string A set of characters such as a word or sentence A string that includes spaces or non alphanumeric characters must be defined within quotation marks such as Hello there Deko Training G 18 Glossary style A style consists of a font and a ook A font is a typeface of specified size shape and orientation A look contro
78. together in a diagonal movement The cursor will change to a diagonal arrow pointer 2 Click and drag to resize the layer Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 3 Layers vs Fields The Deko interface often uses the term Layers Some users refer to a layer as the physical boundaries of an object in the graphic Others refer to a fzeld as the content inside of a layer Actually the terms are synonymous and interchangeable To Enter Text To enter text simply begin to type When you begin to type an I beam or box cursor appears at the beginning of the layer and moves as you type your text Note If there are multiple layers in the graphic press the Tab key to select the layer to which you wish to enter text Each time you press the Tab key you will advance to the next layer in text context To select a text layer for moving or resizing press Page Up or Page Down to toggle through the layers for selection Note Pressing Page Up or Page Down will toggle through all of the layers in a graphic including shape layers Pressing the Tab key or Shift Tab will toggle only through text layers Using the Tab key can save time selecting a layer if there are several shape layers in a graphic When a layer contains Tabs the Tab key will not jump to a new layer it will jump to the next tab in the layer To select another layer you must press Page Up or Page Down Deko Training 5 4 Working with Layers and Tabs Exercise
79. update the value of the variable See the topic To use a variable Field Value later in this section e Display Field The field whose value to display in the layer e Create Query Associates this database query with the current layer e Read Query Reads query associated with the current layer into the Database window Select a layer that has been previously set up for database query then use this button to display options already specified for that layer in the Database window To Set a Global Field Value 1 From the Command bar type global FieldValue 2 Play command To Use a Global Field Value 1 Set layers Field Value to FieldValue 2 From the Command bar type FieldValue pcle 3 Play the command All values should update Note the FieldValue pcle refers to the value for Pinnacle Systems Inc found in the Tutorial demo Stocks database Deko Training 17 4 Other Options Test Drive Before you begin you must have Microsoft Access installed in your Deko PC It might also be a good idea to open the sample database Sample mdb in Access and look at the two tables Elections and QVC to get a general idea of their contents and structure This exercise requires the use of these Deko Sample Files Race dko Race2 dko Sample mdb this file must be copied to your hard drive To register the Database 1 Click Start at the bottom of your desktop choose Settings then double click Control P
80. whether the FAK driver is loaded go to Options gt Preferences and pick the Common tab Deko Training A 4 Appendix If the FAK driver is not loaded the choices in the Keyboard section will be grayed out as shown rave x E anmaneced Revie b sekn hrr Ei ee ee E as p PS SE LAT a E A al eda ety aa A e E On the other hand if you switch to the 101 keyboard with the FAK driver loaded the numeric keypad and function keys will behave like a FAK If you don t want this behavior you can turn off those features To do this go to Options gt Preferences Under the Common tab un check the boxes labeled Enhanced Keypad and FastAction Function Keys Deko Training Appendix A 5 File Associations for Sports Production Deko offers many tools to speed and simplify graphic creation One tool in particular that can reduce pre build efforts in Sports and Event production is Fre Association File Association is defined as any file containing a reference to any other file For example A Graphic file dko can embed an Effect file efx or the background of a Graphic file dko can reference another Graphic file dko Benefit of a File Association By referencing a single graphic across many other graphics what is typically a lengthy process to edit the appearance of a large volume of graphics is reduced to one step edit the single referenced graphic Two Components of a File Association 1 An ar graphic will typic
81. wide variety of formats and save them as native psd or convert them into other formats Deko can accept many graphic formats If you need to carry an Alpha channel with the graphic you must save your graphic as a tga Targa or t if TIFF file format Targa Files tga The TGA Targa format is designed for systems using the Truevision video board and is commonly supported by MS DOS color applications The Targa format supports 32 bit RGB files with a single alpha channel and indexed color grayscale and 16 bit and 24 bit RGB files without alpha channels When saving an RGB image in this format you can choose a pixel depth TIFF Files tif Tag Image File Format TIFF is the most versatile scheme for storing photo realistic bit mapped data and the most reliable for ensuring that image and tonal values are faithfully imported by the importing application TIFF files are supported across Macintosh Windows and other imaging platforms TIFF is a flexible bitmap image format supported by virtually all paint image editing and page layout applications Also virtually all desktop scanners can produce TIFF images In addition to other formats for print applications the TIFF format supports RGB and grayscale files with alpha channels and Bitmap files without alpha channels TIFF also supports LZW lossless compression Other File Formats Deko can read other formats besides TIFF and Targa files Not all formats can carry alph
82. will hold that Action A GPI or manual trigger will resume the Motion Position the Scrub Bar toward the end of the Timeline Set focus to the Preview window and select the words Tonight on Overwrite the text with Tonight s Lineup on Your text will automatically word wrap and shrink to fit full because we have applied these parameters to the text layer make sure Word wrap and Shrink to fit are selected in the Layer section of the Style dialog box Notice in the output that your Motion maintains its flight path regardless of the content Motion paths are specified in Objects Whether an Object contains one letter one word or one layer of several words the path is never tied strictly to the content We call this Content Independence Deko Training 10 12 Understanding Timeline Motions Content Independence The objective of Deko s Motion editor is to provide a mechanism by which to fly objects around the screen In doing so we recognize that a CG has specific needs just as any word processor where relationships are formed between letters words sentences and paragraphs This concept is also built into Deko having created a motion environment that allows these relationships to be maintained Deko allows an object to be defined equally as The letter T The word Tonight The tow Tonight on Channel 22 Either way we have created a system whereby is does not matter Based on what you specify in the Motion editor Deko autom
83. window This creates what we refer to as a sticky texture so the user may define any size and position in the ar graphic For example A single full screen headshot is the associated graphic This can be used in any random air graphic such as a lower third banner full screen page or over the shoulder bio JE team_MNogold dko Graphic 3 lolx Jal team_NYblue dko Graphic 2 Of x JE team_SFred dko Graphic 5 JE team_GBgreen dko Graphic 6 wii x ARIA poerron team_GBgreen dko teamMNgold dko teamNYblue dko teamSFred dko e Team elements used in associated graphics should never s i sus Laye vary in size or screen position from team to team Properties Edit baseline e Graphics intended to be an associated graphic should not aren est rie make teferences to other files Avoid these deep file A associations by collapsing layered graphics into E kerounds From the Layer menu select Layer ee a a g ou A From the Layer menu select Layers to ee See ackeround i 8 Bring to Front Alt Send to Back Alt e Team elements should be arranged into as few graphics for Bring Forward One Laver Cl file association as possible Storing all team elements in a eer Eee Ones cue a oe Re order Layers single graphic is ideal Show Background Layers to Background el team_N Yblue dko Graphic 2 Piel ES Aon Foe BLOE PACU peer Ase PURE IGEA
84. 0 AM 4 9 NTSC Samples agl File Folder 1711701 4 42 Abl m Program Files Temp File Folder 25 01 10 16 AM E Recycler Thunder File Folder 25 01 10 10 AM LQ Secuii dmin ThunderScreens File Folder 9714 00 7 18 AM File Folder 10 18 99 3 53 PM Cil Caldr JIE Id AAA Aka Windows Update Setup Files Seon of hee F 35 object s 302MB Disk free space 2 SUGB Explorer has two sections The left pane or Network Tree shows the drives and folders available to the system The right pane shows the contents of the highlighted drive or folder In the above picture the C drive is highlighted in the left pane so its content shows in the right pane Deko Training Setting up and Managing File Directories 3 3 Notice the minus gt sign next to the C drive and the plus sign next to some of the folders in the network tree A minus sign indicates that the folders directories residing in that drive or folder are displayed below it and slightly to the right in the network tree A plus sign indicates that that drive ot folder has additional folders which are not in view Clicking on a sign or double clicking on a folder will togele between showing and hiding the directory contents Look at the Icons in the left pane Your system will have the All Folders same Icons Desktop El My Computer ES 3 Floppy A 3 Indicates a local hard drive on your computer Your Deko should have a C and D drive Drive letters begin ce
85. 14 15 Note These values may vary slightly based on the on screen position of the rectangle Next we will add a headshot Choose the Add Rectangle tool and draw M ile name a rectangle over top of and about the same size as the red frame Pick Preset Style 2 Open Browse Replace AutoScale From the Shader window click on Texture then open the file Group Opacity head agassi tif letter if i00 S H Scale Scale po po S H Offset Offset p Ps From the Group list select Letter Set H Scale and V Scale to 50 for both Reset H Offset and V Offset to 0 for both From the Tools window click on the Add Text Layer tool Pick Preset Style 3 and draw 4 layers for the player name position age and hometown Your graphic should resemble Fig D above Save as 0801 dko Be sure you have followed all the File Association Rules listed above Deko Training A 10 Appendix Optional Exercise Update and Recall Team Graphics for Game Day 1 Open the graphic team_NYblue dko and save this as team_home dko 2 Read the ar graphic titled 0801 dko This will display the team look and team title of the current home team Samples for Review Home Visitor Type of Graphic 800 900 Air Graphic Lower Third 801 901 Air Graphic Bio Page team home team_ visitor Associated Graphic Team Elements Graphics team Gbgreen team SFred team NYblue team _MNgold Deko Training Appendix A 11 D
86. 4 21 e Hilite Options Size of the ramp in percentage relative to height of the ramp Angle expressed in degrees 360 to 360 an angle of 0 produces a horizontal line H Offset specifies the horizontal position of the highlight relative to the ramp Negative numbers move it to the left positive values to the right V Offset specifies vertical the position of the highlight relative to the ramp Negative values move it down positive values move it up Texture Shader The Texture shader allows you to apply a graphic file as a detail fill Color Ramp Textures can be dko files as well as a variety of popular graphic files Texture Keyhole including jpg tga bmp and tif files Any graphic can act as a CAP fill M File name B alloons4 dko When the File name box is checked default Deko links the graphic file Open as a texture but does not actually save or render the file to the graphic This allows you to change textures at a later time Replace M AutoScale Group Opacity Texture Shader Options joo H Scale Y Scale e File Name Check Box if this box is unchecked Deko copies too too the bitmap from the original texture file and saves it as part of H Offset Y Offset the graphic The word unnamed appears in the File Name text S box to indicate the texture is being stored with the graphic H Alignment Alignment Note choosing this option will increase the si
87. 6 Release keys to v Status Bar display the symbol s Program P r 4 z e e To insert the symbol with a mouse select PANE View gt International The International v Curent Style character window appears w Preset Styles Shader e Position the cursor after the 45 Effect Playback Shift F11 f I S MS n F11 e With the mouse click on the degree 0123 Macro Fa symbol in the International character 456769 5 lt 5 Motion gt F ARCDEFG Stills window HI JKLMNOP Q RSTUVWAYZ Custom Typeface It abcde International f ghij kil mno Automation porstuyvwxy Database z oOoo0a0 E E m E m E E El a gO D E E E o E E E E go OOOOdodoaoag go i fn GB ee ee Tiai o rre AAAARAAGEE EEL 111 DNOG 6d6xa0000 Ea m ra LLJ 0 r m Pa na C y p Deko Training 7 8 Creating and Using Custom Typefaces If a faster approach is required a custom TrueType font can be created with the degree symbol mapped to a user defined key Special software programs such as Macromedia Fontographer are designed for such tasks When you have added the degree symbol your finished graphic should look like this E Uintitted P ino aim 9 Press Alt Save File FAK or AlttF12 SK to save the graphic Keyboard Shortcuts for Useful Symbols Symbol Keystrokes Alt 0169 Alt 0174 Altt 0176 1 4 Alt 0188 1 2 Alt 0189 Alt 0190 Deko Training Lesson 8 Baseline Editing Typin
88. 6 4 Deko Training Contents ix essomay OMer Opt ons sssisi0cscscccosstosstncstosstonstanstonstonsdanetenstenesessbesagepoassebonssepesesesenaneseoredenieeearecs 17 1 Database Connection rn E an E nae TO Quien ee eden aes 17 1 TS WC DG DCS areas geste ics stadt tested NT EEE TETE inde ead bates Gudiesh od TECO 17 1 Seen E D sata tases ac acs aaa anes chen ea to ana cae vaste A sa yeah ea tode A teseines eat deenboases 17 1 CS A a ssa EE A E E EEEE eset nut se aa eee EETA OAE AE E E E ituc 17 2 B e O AD r a E E E E A T E E OC E A A I T E N 17 3 SSC a A E ated E E TEE T E EEE A O E N 17 4 DE E D r E P A A TE E E TET 17 7 Dem pAn OGO PANE satiety A A O A 17 9 Set Up the Graphic to Update Fields Based on a Global Variables cstusidnsiniteieniecritilaciny 17 10 CAP Shaders Cel Animation Player orenean nen aaa EE E S S ORLE E O AE 17 12 PNP Oa C TANNONT A N E E TEE E OE ENG 17 12 Setting Upthe Animation Fileto Pliesssasnepip inani a E EE E EEATT 17 14 Peep intimate O A EAEN 17 14 CAPP toman Ge e a aa A E eee rer ree em ee eae 17 14 Thes alll Blo cou ODIO N aT meer re terre A A EEEO EAA AOE 17 15 Lehne and UE oaa E yy Cre nmr a nee 17 15 lastall Th ndet Browse Software on Dek0bssccssccsirasatidodinen ini a n a 17 15 Connect to An Pxistine Remote Databases anunion a AO TO E 17 16 Set Upa Database on X out Dekorai r a E A T TA NEO 17 17 Cree and OPTA DADIS E araa a ETONE OOE EE EONO EON 17 18 Set Dere DADI C epn a E a E EO E A E bates 17 19 Bat o
89. A INClips video of videf and key avi DV25 ew e a Key file J Clips key of vided andkey avi DV25 Hl gt p gt 44 gt gt ea Get Brey ALO Scrub Key In Out Scrub and Clip record Link clip to Settings config Trim options Playback load import graphic menu controls Associated Key icon Settings Durfition 00 00 14 12 IV Play In to Out Effect I Synchronize with effect Loaded Clip Deko Training 17 24 Other Options To Turn On ClipDeko e Inthe Channel menu choose ClipDeko To Enable ClipDeko e Inthe Channel menu click Keying and Routing e Inthe Keying and Routing dialog box under the appropriate channel select Deko Clip To Open the Clip Browser 1 Turn on ClipDeko 2 Inthe View menu click Clip Browser To Open the Clip Editor Do one of the following A e Inthe Clip Browser click the Edit Clip tool e Go to View gt Clip Edit Note The Clip Editor also contains a clip browser Recording and Importing Clips The first time you record a clip it is important to verify the compression protocol before recording To Verify the Compression Protocol 1 Open the Clip Editor and click the Settings button 2 Inthe dialog box click the TARGA Settings Capture tab a 3 Verify that the compression protocol is set to DV25 wesson DV 25 4 1 1 i
90. Actions within the screen and as part of a single Motion Consider that your existing Action for the text layer already has two Points keyframes e Start point Bottom e End Point Home We will add another Let s begin by editing our first Point the direction from which our Object appears off screen 1 Select the second Action assigned to Layer 1 2 Click in the box beside X Position to disable that Parameter 3 Click on Y Position to highlight the Parameter but do not disable it A check should remain 4 From the Position Selector box in the Graph select Top to Home This defines the first and last Points By now you should notice that the display in the Timeline Graph will change to reflect the values of the selected Parameter 5 Drag your Scrub Bar to about 2 seconds into the entire Motion It should line up in the center of the second corresponding Timing Bar not the Sub bar Lineup LA Scrub Bar h A gt m Insert Bezier Point 2 Overlap Bezier Handles Home Deko Training 10 14 Understanding Timeline Motions 6 Click once on the Insert point icon in the Timeline Toolbar Your mouse pointer will display a sign v SAS el a AA Move to Line Curve Cusp Smooth Symmetrical Line Tools Continuity Tools 7 Position your mouse in the Graph where the blue Scrub Bar and yellow diagonal Timeline intersect Click once to insert a red Bezier Point with two purple handles
91. Ai z F US President Bill Gates Homer Senpeon 2 Ft A B l Note You can tell when Deko is updating a query even if the Display Field value isn t changing The status line displays a rendering message during each update Deko Training 17 10 Other Options Set Up the Graphic to Update Fields Based on a Global Variable You may have noticed that when you changed the Field Values for Candidatel and Total Votes from 1 to 3 then clicked Create Query none of the data in other layers changed Those layers still displayed information from race 1 Most likely you would want to display all of the results of race 3 all at once Can you do that without changing the Field Value for each layer individually every time Yes if you go through the one time process of entering a global variable as the Field Value for each layer 1 Goto View gt Command Bar 2 Click the command text box and type Where_Col1Val1 3 then click Play 3 For each layer in Race dko fai Database x e Select the layer e Click Read Query at the bottom of the Database window aaa an Name e Now click the Field Value drop down list box and choose SWhere ColVal Table in Database _ e At the bottom of the Database window change the Elections gt Frequency to 10 Data Record in Table e Click the Create Query button Notice that within 10 Field Name js seconds the field display changes to reflect values in race 3 Equals TEICIA JOFF
92. Alt F11 Deko provides eight preset layouts as tools for developing and playing graphics For the first part of the lesson we will be using the Style Edit layout This is the preferred of the preset layouts for graphic creation Later you may choose to create a custom layout to suit your individual work style Most Deko commands have keyboard shortcuts In addition the FastAction Keyboard has special function keys to improve the productivity of your work session Begin to learn the shortcuts and you will dramatically improve your speed and productivity using Deko software Go to Windows gt Select Layout gt Style Edit The shortcut for Style Edit layout on both the SK and the FAK is Altt F11 On the FAK press Ctrl Program to choose your preference for standard layout as set in the Starting layout section of Options gt Preferences gt Common tab This could be the Style Edit layout one of the other layout preferences or your own custom layout Save Preferences Alt O gt S Go to Options gt Save Settings Now This saves Preference menu settings and preset macro settings Any time you re open the Deko program these settings will still exist and the Preset Style window will open with these styles Special Note Using Undo From time to time you may find yourself wishing you hadn t done whatever you just did Yes it could happen to you No need to panic Deko gives you the prerogative to change your mind and your mis
93. Brands and Models BlackBox http www blackbox com catalog O09switches 424 PDE Servswitch Cats KVM Extender Uses Cat5 cable Works fine Up to 1000 feet Dual station version also available Standard dual station caveats apply Cost 765 Cybex http www cybex com PC Extender Plus Uses 25 wire cable which is awkward to run long distances and horribly expensive especially the plenum rated version Works well though SVGA can get a little dim or noisy PC Extender SNAP 1 Uses Cat5 cable and supports runs up to 300 feet Works well Cost 600 LongView400 LV400 An enhanced version of SNAP 1 at the same price Uses Cat5 cable supports runs up to 500 feet and also includes support for COM port audio multi media quality video Works fine Cost 600 Hall Research http www hallresearch com hall model97 htm Model 97 Dual station interface Works fine Can be used as an extender up to 250 feet away When used as dual station the standard caveats apply Deko Training Appendix A 3 FastAction Keyboard Hot Switching Our experience is that you can easily hot swap from one location to another while in the Deko application The experiments were conducted with the LV400 but should work the same for all extenders Simply switch at the transmitter from a cable leading to receiver A to a cable leading to receiver B If using a Cat5 extender a jumper block could be setup such as is used for networking
94. C SQL is added as a choice When the Clock button is clicked an ID box appears Macro to allow you to assign different clocks to different layers or graphics T Hee oe Press the View Clocks button to reveal 2 the Clock List dialog box gt i Clock Type 11 04 Time of day cee Codan Clock List The Clock List shows the current clocks available and provides buttons for creating new clocks as well as modifying or deleting existing clocks Add Delete Config Ealse RESET Add Clock Clock Number 3 Add a Clock Clock Type Format 1 Go to View gt Style Menu FAK Font or Look Time of day HH bihi SS Time Offset Hour Format 2 Set focus to the Style window and click on the ce Min Gee 12 Hou Layer button to select the Layer view al al is r fo 2 gj 24 Hour 3 Select the Clock button from the Auto Update T Append AM PM I Keep leading zeros section Tenths display D ienlay tenths a Wieolay aniy onder Blip JEG Fer 3 Cancel 4 Click on View clocks to show the List Separators Hr Min Min Sec 5 Click the Add button The Configure Clock dialog box will open 6 Enter Data in the appropriate fields and Click OK to add the clock to the clock list Deko Training 12 2 Creating Clocks and Timers Add Clock Data Fields e Clock Type click on pull down arrow and choose from three choices Time of day Countdown or Countup e Format set t
95. DPLEE PE ROE COTTE EOE TEPPER ESOP TE TET LELIE Or a Er Pr OR ee nS een a eer See 9 16 DEE 1 C tica denis Shas has Seas casas A eanpua yeiieee seals a beatae lated adnate Sh eashanthdestantheashansaes 9 17 VG oe ea oa oa ectnecs cc sate ae cesarean A see cats ete totais tale ta esac east aac ea A 9 17 SNO EE dieretaciees cease dnt er aa ig alco steed E tT aes ge Ste tara E ws saat aes 9 18 Lesson 10 Understanding Timeline Motions cccssscsccsssssccccssssccecssscssessscssscsscssessssseenns 10 1 PSL Ole OUs SEA a E EATE A E abi atoten haa ssam edema AAS EE SAET E A 10 1 Step by step Preview a oamp Em aE MO UON aatinaa ea Stairs e a svelutnnebnliesitiaads 10 2 otep Dy ote oe Dulda Tolne Moton esserosinriniro rA A OOR OROAR 10 3 BSCS 1 CO tN Ch st aa ai a aa a E OO IRS 10 5 N t Home POHON saa tics eet ee 2380s as lace lat sbaucuauduayeatocetoesteges cast adatadetn aces sosegsuMerere sere 10 8 Content Independen eee ata mu bets be Se Secg tetas ates tate eS uee hie 10 12 Mp NCO py Ama Paste Ponchon a E TO OOE 10 16 TVG lO AAI T ENT E ES NAAA IAIA T tees EAA IT E EA 10 19 Why Does My Program Output Disappear When I Scrub a Motion ssssesssesssesseseserresesesesrrseseseerrreseseses 10 19 I played My Motion From the Timeline Toolbar Where is My Preview Graphic eee eeseeseneeeesees 10 19 FXO tise Builda olite INO OU ras Sore css bac aoe ioe AAEE betes erst ectdnetw OA a e 10 20 FUR RECE 3 PIOA O uM reerrre err eee ree CeO TER ATTA TTA
96. Deko go to View gt Automation The dialog box will open at the bottom of the screen fee Automation Type Default Dor Status Clear MHD in Unicode M Automation Enabled Fort ione dl Tag eee Preview E PO 2 Inthe Port text field type in the Communications port that Deko will be using most often COM1 or COM2 3 Under Type Select II I for Intelligent Interface 4 Under ID if you have only one Deko put 1 5 Inthe Default Doc field select either Program or Preview to decide which screen receives your data 6 Lastly check Automation Enabled A successful connection will show a message such as Server created through COM1 fee Automation Type Default Doc Status Clear CMD in Unicode vV Automation Enabled ha E E ac Preview Server created through i 41COM1 Port COM 7 Close the Automation dialog box Deko Training Automation 16 3 Creating a Template File This section describes the process of creating a template file which will later be filled in by the automation interface as sketched out in the next section 1 Within Deko design the look of your dko file selecting the fonts and colors You may design using just one layer and putting example text on the screen 2 After you have designed and created your look you are ready to select the text fields Each text block that needs to be updated through automation must be put into its ow
97. Dila unk n Deko Training 6 10 Working With File Imports Group 8 Click OK 9 On the Face Shader window set Group to page i ee 10 Notice the sample in the texture window that shows a small visual of your imported graphic The graphic has been pre sized to fit within the OTS window Your background should now look like this Define a Text Layer and Add a Caption 1 Select the Text Layer tool 2 Draw a text layer under the graphic rectangle 3 Select a preset style from the Preset Style palette or define a new style 4 Select Layer from the Text window and check Shrink to fit box in the Auto scaling section fy a taeealina C Hone C Scale to fit box hn Fin J Deko Training Working With File Imports 6 11 Type the title Budget Talks into the text layer Fi a hae p Save Graphic as a Targa File for Export 1 Press Save File FAK or F12 SK The Save Graphic As dialog box opens 2 Check to make sure Targa tga is selected in List Files of Type 3 Type budgettalks for a title and click OK The graphic will be saved as a Targa file that can be exported to still stores and other devices Save Graphic As File Marne Directories IB udgetT alks tga d deko tutorial badfb tga ols tga Tithe tga tithe toa List Files of Type Bree Targa tiga Ed Network Comment Options Fil 0215701 O24 75PM 1 399 698 Deko Training
98. E 12 000 100 Read Query e Louis GARVIN o Deko Training Other Options 17 11 4 On the Command Bar change the command to SWhere_ColVal 4 and click Play Within 10 seconds you should see all the field values change again 2 VIICHAEL JACKSON _ 5 o 98 Deko Training 17 12 Other Options CAP Shaders Cel Animation Player A CAP cel animation player shader produces a detail with an animation You can use a CAP shader to apply a cel animation to a detail just as you can use other types of shaders to apply ramps colors or textures A CAP shader differs from other types of shaders in that you cannot apply a cel animation to a background A typical way to use the CAP shader is to create a rectangle and choose CAP for the rectangle s face shader Make the rectangle large enough or it will clip the edges of the animation It is also important to make the rectangle small enough without clipping so you maintain the maximum efficiency By specifying a CAP shader Deko will recall a series of image frames On the Deko2000 the series of frames will automatically loop producing the animation On the FXDeko the series of frames are loaded and the first one displays as a static graphic on the detail FXDeko only plays the cel animation in the context of a motion See Playing a Cel Animation You can have more than one CAP shader in a graphic Performance may degrade as Deko encounters large animations or a lot of de
99. Event 2 and specify go to In the Time field directly to the right specify the number 1 This will direct the sequence back up to Event 1 11 Play the crawl Note You can use the and keys on the Num Pad to change speed during playback of a roll or crawl Embed Speed Changes in Your Crawl 1 Open your graphic in the Style Edit layout 2 Scroll the graphic to the position you would like to see the speed change to occur and position the cursor Preset Style Set 3 From the text menu select Insert Eee Speed Insert Speed Edit Speed 4 Select Pause or a speed from the drop 2 pg sec Spell Check down menu You can specify speed 3 pg sec changes in 1 10 page increments up to 4 po sec 1 page per second Deko inserts a marker to show where the embedded change is Note You can apply speed changes and pauses to both roll and crawl graphics Embedded speed changes only work if you Speed specify Pages per Second as your unit of rate to your crawl or roll Marker effect Do not use the and keys to change speed during playback of a roll or crawl with embedded changes Embedded Speed Changes To edit your Embedded speed changes toe apes Insert Speed 1 Select the marker you wish to edit Pdi Sneed PIT A pg zec 2 Select Edit Speed from the text menu and Spell Check choose the changed speed from the pull 3 pa sec down menu to the right 4 pg sec Creating a Multi Line Crawl This works much like a
100. Eye Edi Screenmove Object Graphic Pry Lx Rotate Layer number O Y Rotate O Z Rotate y O Skew Preview Program C Kem Preview Opacity Program Motion Actions The Timeline Motion editor enables the creation of on screen moves variable flight paths dynamic re sizing X Y Z rotation and more Choose from several 3D DVE effects to apply to any character word row layer background or full screen Scrub through preview the Motion during its creation for real time feedback Deko Training 10 2 Understanding Timeline Motions Step by Step Preview a Sample Timeline Motion What s so great about Timeline Motions Follow the steps below to preview a sample Motion that you will recreate from scratch in the next section Step by Step Build a Timeline Motion Open and Play a Sample Sequence File 1 Select the Sequence Layout SK F11 FAK Sequence 2 Click once in the Sequence window to set focus 3 Press Clear Read FAK or F9 SK to reveal the Open Dialog The path should read D Deko Tutorial Double click on the file named 100 seq to open into the Sequence window 4 Press the play button in your Sequence window or play key on your Fast Action keyboard to run the sample Motion Timeline Motions add a wealth of creativity for post and on air applications Automated elections stock reports and live news are just a few of many areas in which Deko can improve the quality and efficiency of p
101. F9 SK to open access the File Open dialog without using the mouse Saving Files When you wish to save an opened file the preferred method is to choose File gt Save As Deko automatically increments a number on the file name to create a new file with a new name This allows you to retrieve the original should you wish to go back The keyboard shortcut is F12 on the SK Standard Keyboard or the Save File button on the FAK FastAction Keyboard To overwrite the original file go to File gt Save or press AlttF12 Alt Save File on FAK Verify System Output 1 Go to Style Edit layout ALT F11 2 Click in the Program window to set focus and type some characters 3 Look to the video monitor to verify system output If no text is displayed do one of the following e Check for power and proper channel selection on the video monitor e Check the connection from Deko chassis to the video monitor for improper video cabling Refer to your Deko Quick Install Guide for information on connections e Check for a video reference source Deko requires this for output Go to Options gt Hardware Settings gt Analog IO adjustments Under Reference Status look for Line Locked or Color Locked to verify a reference soutce Note Use the Hardware Settings menu for technical troubleshooting Do not change any setting without consulting the appropriate technical personnel within your facility Exiting Deko To
102. File button Navigate to D Deko Tutorial macros and select the macro file named serve down mcr Scroll up to the C location and then press the Select File button Navigate to D Deko Tutorial macros and select the macro file named serve none mcr Go to the Options menu and select Save Settings Now to maintain the Preset assignments after re launch of the Deko program Press Preset Macro then the appropriate character to run the macros Run Macro on SK To run this Macro on a Standard keyboard 1 Press the Cmd key F4 to enter your cursor in the command line Type serve_up then press the Enter key The macro will play Type serve down then press the Enter key The macro will play Deko Training 11 12 Using Macros 4 Type serve_none then press the Enter key The macro will play 5 You will not need to re type any of the macros above Press F4 then the up or down arrow to gain access to recently played macros Exercise Review and Run a Directory Select Macro The directory macro dir_select is already created and stored in the D Deko Tutorial folder This macro enables the user to change through several directory paths quickly and efficiently This exercise works in conjunction with a previous exercise found on page 15 of Lesson Three Setting up and Managing File Directories If you have not completed that exercise go back and refer to those pages before continuing on 1 Press the Macro Edit key FAK t
103. Frequency 6 te 8 In the Database window click the Read Query button Change the Field Value from 1 to 3 Click the Create Query button The display now tells us Teicia has 12 000 total votes 12 000 65 Art CHADWICK 37 110 15 Deko Training Other Options 17 9 Set Up Automatic Query Updates By default update frequency is set to zero and the automation interface issues a query only once Let s set up Race dko to automatically update Teicia s total vote count every ten seconds so that we will have an accurate total as the votes keep rolling in 1 Make sure layer 8 is still selected the one that is Database mfe Es displays Teicia s total votes Database Name 2 Inthe Database window change Frequency to 10 M Connect 3 Now keep Deko running while you open the eei iatebesc Sample mdb database in Access and go to the Elections Elections table p Data Record in Table _ Field Name 4 Change the value of Total Votes1 in row 3 to Equals held Value 12 003 Save the change to disk by closing the 3 a table Within ten seconds you will see the Deko display change to reflect the new total Display Field ees Frequency Read Query Eizabeth bl pi Wiii Gangara An Chedeac k A B Stale Senate Tavy Hughes Bob WWippn J3 of 45 D 110 Coclest CO Opsti Tica Joffe Liu Garin 1S of 0 T L 12 oop Stale Reprosentaine Wic hagl Janjan Wichs Jackpoa 1 E F
104. In this lesson we will build a crawl and a roll effect within a sequence You will also have some time to play altpush d clear climb command crawl Cut dissolve Folds motion d ese Page Turn on push t Ripple t Fage Turn off reveal Shards Fr Page Turn both roll Tiles d wipe t Page Scroll slide t Cylinder d slidectt Magic Carpet repeat thru Accordion d DVE effect 3D Ripple d Deko Training 9 4 Creating Sequences and Effects Two points worth noting DYE Effect Editor Type Fipple Farameter Edit pza 0 20 0 00 0 20 e The menu item motion provides access to motions in your current directory to sequence playback We will cover timeline motions in Lesson 10 Ripple 1 Wert Position Ripple 2 Horiz Position Ripple 2 Wert Position e Choosing an effect from the DVE effects selection an option on more advanced Dekos will activate the options button on the Sequence window If you click Options the DVE Effect Editor dialog box appears Uses Cancel This dialog box allows you great control over m see x the playback of your effect Rate Field Enter a value here to determine the rate at which the effect is performed This rate is determined by the values specified in the Units field Height of waves Units Field Click on the pull down menu to determine the rate unit When you click on an effect the most common unit of measurement is chosen as a default with a nomi
105. RT NC 8 3 ANC EO sai aac E E A T E A E E eae 8 3 Perce Be IMC EdT i E TO T iaeo Gath sare ats taainasated 8 4 Etno a Baseli norena A N T T A 8 6 Deko Training Contents vii Lesson 9 Creatine Sequences and Piles v 02 vai eea 9 1 The Sequence ayout S ee F Ae SEG Ed irer sacs cau sake ark cara cat Rana Raat nda neattad ea cea Tats E 9 1 The segacnce Wy 1A OW eroriren T vim aap delaware teal ened bee Reed AONAR 9 2 ToC teare A SEQUEICS i cncintivein nan nie ete anda ncaa num amnwasdasinaienumanemwamne 9 2 D cl La gente ee ne TI eee eae ee veT ae eS On oI ET TT aE Ee 9 3 ana e Ta E Mee MOURA IR E E me ae TEU S ORME A tre no Aare armen err 9 4 Pxercise Create and RUM a DE EO eria Aaa E eat TATAE E snd dees 9 5 Exerce Create atic Runa Credit Oceana is aera ee anda Saas T ee 9 7 HY eh Os eB OU Wa 2 1 Ge RR rw re I PE RES CP NTE EO ETE TE Pa EP EE IR N 9 7 Step by Step Createcand R n a Credit Rolnpsctenonpninionai ie o a T 9 7 M pora Text DOue s a A ER 9 10 Exercise reie dand Run AWM ecesna re ETETEN E TEENE E EE EEG 9 11 Berorren E aa E E E EA EEI 9 11 Step by Step Created RUN Cra oaudasyocs oaoa den A aabaesiataaabhictesbonetatilateseiasatoaesl 9 11 Embed Speed Chances tm YOUU CANI raa E E oelieuestastalacet viet spac 9 13 Cat a Mati Line Cail sess n te Duta celine E NEEE RE E O dtadstn ute 9 13 TED EE ETO a Ter Mea reer Terre err Penn Mrmr ee AO eet ODE nary Te ee 9 15 oee LV 3 1 6a sent een enters a ent ED EEN PROP PB TE
106. Rate 2 seconds e Units seconds E Untitled Sequence Event Control Time Effect ontarieaey Layers Name Browse Rate Units In Time Out Time EEE 1 2 AL o o Ooo 2j fo o er al a Santen s Je a a e S O lel Es Pe ee eee ee CC Citi e ae TY O e CdS m A 8 Play the roll Use Play on the FAK or Alt Enter on the SK Note You can use the and keys on the Num Pad to change speed during playback of a roll or crawl Deko Training Creating Sequences and Effects 9 9 Setup for Page for Smooth Rolling 1 Select the Sequence window Go to Sequence gt Smooth Roll Playback Adjustments gt Only Full Vertical Resolution Rates Clear Sequence Insert Event Alt lnsert Delete Event Alt Delete Play Sequence Alt Enter Save Effect Frames As Files Play Sequence From Nearest Timecode Eause SequEnbe Paliee stop seguente Flaybact Erreak lta aee Preload Sequence into Memory Urncad Sequence tom Eman Browse for Files Ctrl L s Auto Advance Fram Browser s Smooth Motion Playback Enable Keper for Motion Playback w Smooth Roll Playback Adjustments None Playback Aate i Full and Half Vertical Resolution Rates GPI Settings w Only Full Vertical Aesolution Rates PA From the Options window choose Save Settings Now to preserve this one time setting Alt O gt S 3 Change the rate of time in the Sequencer from 2 seconds to 5 seconds and then pr
107. Record Macro Ctrl F2 On the text bar the button lights up red to indicate that the macro recorder is on 2 Use the keyboard and or mouse to perform the sequence of actions that will constitute the macro 3 To turn the recorder off do one of the following e Click off the record button on the text bar e Go to Macro gt Record Macro Ctrl F2 e Press F2 to turn the recorder off and activate the Macro window To view the macro you just recorded do one of the following e Go to Window gt Select Layout gt Macro Edit e Go to View gt Macro F2 Playing a Macro To play the active macro do one of the following e Click the play button near the right end of the text bar gt e Choose Play Macro Alt F2 from the Macro menu On the text bar the play button lights up green to indicate that a macro is playing Note the name of the macro that is currently playing appears on the status bar If no Macro window or Sequence window is active FXDeko plays the macro in the most recently activated Macro window Deko Training Using Macros 11 3 Exercise Recording a Macro To see how this works please perform the following steps 1 10 11 Click the macro record button and notice that it highlights in pink Click on Preset 1 in the Preset Style window with your mouse or press Style 1 FAK Press F5 or Program FAK on your keyboard to select the graphic window and then type the word Deko Double
108. The original database number is the database number assigned to the clip when it was first created If the clip was moved from one database to another it may have been renumbered Somebody else may have also renumbered the clip It is in cases like these that the Media ID number will be dissimilar from the clip s database number The Clip Command and Its Syntax Controlling a clip server from FXDeko is done with the Command bar Thunder understands three clip commands e Clip load lt Clip Server ID gt lt Media ID gt e Clip play lt Clip Server ID gt e Clip stop lt Clip Server ID gt Clip load lt Clip Server ID gt lt Media ID gt The Clip Server ID is the ID number assigned to Thunder in FXDeko s Clip Server Configuration window The Media ID number is the Media ID number for the desired clip to play from Thunder s default database This is not the still number In most cases the Media ID number will be 0 and underscore and the clip number Example Thunder s clip server ID number in the FXDeko Clip Server Configuration window is 0 and the correct Media ID number for the clip1 is 0_1 Type the command clip load 0 0 1 Deko Training A 16 Appendix Clip play lt Clip Server ID gt The Clip Server ID is the ID number assigned to Thunder in FXDeko s Clip Server Configuration window For this command to work there must be a cued clip the picon appears just under the mini monitor on the desired channel in the
109. This allows any GUI to be used with any chassis For temporary setups such as a sporting event the GUI of one of the on air operators can be switched to the spare machine by changing the wire over from one transmitter to another Vital Details After switching to a new GUI you must wake up the new FastAction Keyboard FAK The best way to do this is disconnect the keyboard cable from the rear of the FAK wait a couple of seconds and then reconnect it If this is not done the keyboard will not function In addition to get accurate display lights on the caps lock and num lock keys you must press each one twice Otherwise the lights stay off even if they should be on On one system we found it necessary to disconnect and reconnect the mouse from the receiver after hot swapping Until this was done the mouse cursor was locked in position Our guess is that the hot swap procedure puts noise on the mouse line Keyboard Mixing You can also hot swap between a FAK and a standard 101 keyboard There are some details to watch out for The driver for the FAK is loaded at Windows NT boot time Therefore our recommendation is that you have the FAK connected through the extender at boot time Otherwise you will not be able to use all the FAK features until NT is re booted If you boot up NT with a 101 keyboard and then switch to a FAK all the FAK functions will work except for the function keys and numeric keypad To check
110. Thunder application This is done using the clip load command Example Thunder s Clip Server ID number in the FXDeko Clip Server Configuration window is 0 and the clip load command was executed successfully In the FXDeko Command bar type the command clip play 0 Clip stop lt Clip Server ID gt The Clip Server ID is the ID number assigned to Thunder in FXDeko s Clip Server Configuration window This command stops the clip currently being played out of the selected Thunder channel Example Thunder s Clip Server ID number in the FXDeko Clip Server Configuration window is 0 and the clip load and play commands were executed successfully In the FXDeko Command bar type the command clip stop 0 Thunder Configuration 1 Thunder must have a default database Right ngm ASTHUNDER_DEMO_F click on the desired database and choose Set m AMBSLAB_ TAUN seXE ri Default Database from the context menu F Delete ltem aa Create New Sequence 2 Configure the desired channel for automation E Go to File gt Preferences gt Protocol Setup i 3 In the Protocol dialog box select lg DNA ThunderNet The Channel box determines which channel you wish to control ThunderNet protocol is an Ethernet protocol so the Port box will be disabled It should show Protocol Setup El Ei Protocol Channel Fort ThunderNET fi com Restart NONE E com Restart NONE 3 com Restart NONE E com
111. Tutorial ce credits txt File name oz nave as type Text Documents Cancel we Highlight the text in the window and type Terry Matthews F 021 txt Notepad File Edt Search Help Go to File gt Save As and save the file as 051 Terry Matthews Repeat this process and save the following names as these files Brady Anderson 009 txt Deko Training 15 6 SportsWare Pops Creating a Style Pop 1 In Deko clear the Program window 2 Click on the Preset Style window and open training pops pst 3 Select the Layer in the program window and then Select Preset Style 2 4 Type the following five names with numbers E Unhited Preview RAI Teerv M T E F J Ap a I C 5 Select the first row within the layer but DO NOT select the end of row marker 6 Press Save File FAK or F12 SK File Hame Direchories A fern n ok 7 When the Save Graphic As dialog Cancel appears enter 521 in File name and Aday Forecast dko 10 dko 11 dko 2U dko 21 dko 27 dko 29 dko gt 29 dko ba click on Save Selection This will save B Tutorial Save Selection the selection as a Style Pop List Files of Type Drives Deke Graphics dko E d Metwork Comment A Options Deko Training SportsWare Pops 15 7 8 Select the next row remember not to select the end of row marker 9 Press the Save File key and enter 551 in File
112. Window 1 Insert the Chyron disk into the appropriate drive and close the drive door 2 Activate a Program or Preview window fal Chyron Import D MOODY MESSAGE 0011 Directory Font Directory pag Moony E 0001 0002 can Double Click to 0050 esa open a file 0052 Clock Message Convert Details 00 08 0001 Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TM 38 00 11 0001 Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TM 00 3 Goto View gt Chyron import To Import a Chyron Message File 1 Open the Chyron Import window 2 Navigate to the drive and directory that contain the message file 3 Double click the file name to open the file in the active Program window Note Once you have imported a Chyron message file you can save it as a Deko dko file The sample file Chyron2 dko is a Chyron message file with logo fonts that was saved as a dko file Deko Training Working With File Imports 6 15 To Map a Chyron Bitmap Font onto a TrueType Font 1 Open the Chyron Import window 2 Navigate to the drive and directory that contain the message file 3 Click the file name to open its Font Mapping list in the window Chyron mport D MOODY MESSAGE 0002 E MESSAGE noon ina mooo oon 10002 ono ont 0060 0061 0052 Full Page Message Swiss 721 Bold Condensed 1M Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TM Swiss 721 Bold Condensed Th Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TH Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TH Swiss 721 B
113. a Budget tga BudgetT alks tga Title tga tithe tga List Files of Type Targa tga Fila mta Directories dq vdeko tutorial __ Cancel Cancel i dA gt Deko Ea Tutorial Drives E d Network Deko Training Working With File Imports 6 9 Insert Graphic 1 Delete the default text layer 2 Select Preset Style 8 3 Select the Move tool and then select the Rectangle Shape td l 4 Draw a rectangle to outline the E ote cher Program shape of the black rectangle 5 On the Style window click the Look button and make sure the Look is defined by a face detail only Layer Look Details Add Delete 6 On the Face Shader window click Texture 7 Click Open When the Select texture file dialog box appears select budget tga from the list and click Open JelFace Shader Color Hamp Note You should be in the Deko Tutorial directory with Texture Keyhole Targa tga chosen in List Files of Type CAP i File name Open aene Select texture file Fa Group Opacity ome H Scale Y Scale File Hame Directories Budget tga d dekostutorial badfb tga gt d o gt Deka Budget tga Title tga B Tutorial joo poo title tga H Offset Y Offset e S o a F r E H Poente I mide IB List Files of Type Drives s center_ r midale a Targa tga d Network
114. a A 3 FSA Mr TIO a actus tae seseac esa Pacn chet csatasdeuurct edi sunukceracsebclavkaas dive sdescicatstcdowestucussteddsaesacacotacestausacteaauaeuatutetads A 3 FileGASSOCIAHONS FOr SPOTS FOCUCH ON eona eE a EEN ERENER OEE A 5 Denet l Arie ASSOCIA UO ee a EE EE E EEE EAEE TEE A 5 To Components Ol L FIESSO Naes a A A 5 Boldin ine APE e n a E E a G A 5 Iles FOR Makino le 7 SSOC AO Soest uta ce O RA tty cemeia did toate A 6 Optional Exercise Make Bio Graphic with a File Association testis erie as Goa A 7 Optional Exercise Make Bio Graphic with a File Association sessssesssesesesessersesesesesererrrresereseresenesesesrersreress A 8 Optional Exercise Update and Recall Team Graphics for Game Day ssessseessrsereresesrrrerirrsrrrerrsrereresess A 10 Peko L oship r Gare INOANIUOI niae nea A E ETE NAVAA OOA A 11 CEPT CC i Ct ar E E EEE EE AE E ENEE A 14 Controlling 4 Thunder Server roni EX DekOnssevesierirn i aA EERE A 14 Controlling a Thunder Server TOn F XADekOardperioini onin a T O A 15 DOS ENE A E A T N a E E A Aa TA O IE T TE A A 15 Poreianellivoreah hullavelicn ov hatcla compere rere ern etre er PRCA emer ye ort er es errr tr or ene mre Terre A 15 Wi avon bho Grey nata een avs ere ove i Accu 4al eb emer enya eRe Rere T AA A 15 MCS CoA OUUL AON ts ates Seda N ads si E datatad eset eeu eae A 16 ERED eko COU Ura Oh cies a cident athe AATA nasa ea te A 18 Troubles Hooh iT psarna errr rrr a ert core eee oer ee Oe ere ole rere m ny evar ron N
115. a a ei Us ji Leading Kern list o o S o Rotation Skew ail ail gt gt Current Selected text PRSS Style to change proportional window Keyboard English Uniti Onentation left to right P Presendered stole herm Bs es i ca Adding Details Deko allows you to control the 0 of your font by adding details Details define the overall look of the font such as face edge and shadow attributes Deko allows you to determine how many of these details you wish to add to a font and gives you great flexibility in assigning priority and attributes to these details jl Style lel ES Graphic Eont Layer Look Details To add a detail to your text 1 Select the text you wish to modify 2 Inthe Style window click the Look button Choose Add and then select the detail from the reveal window Deko Training 4 14 Modifying Look Details Each detail has a list of attributes that can be altered To change a detail attribute click on the detail in the Look view of the Style window The attributes for that detail are displayed at the bottom of the window In addition clicking on a detail will select that detail element in the Shader window Modifying a detail involves setting attributes in both the S and the Shader windows Detail Attributes Type and Modify Text Details underline frame All details have Hide Shader and Blur attributes Edge Shadow Underline and Fram
116. a aa FOV 25 4 1 1 Deko Training Other Options 17 25 To Record a New Clip from Input Video 1 Connect a live video source to the system s SDI Video input 2 Inthe Clip Editor click the Record button 3 In the Create Clip dialog box type a clip name and select a folder where the clip will be stored 4 Specify clip length up to 10 minutes 5 Click the Record button to start recording input video 6 Once the recording is complete click Play to play back the new clip As it plays verify that it appears properly on the system video output To Import a Clip to the Browser Database 1 Open the Clip Editor then click the Import button Import chp El planes S BS el Ey Ring Black_D avi t Pingis DV avi e Sig GF DY Aing BlackText_OV evi a lingrGold_DV ow wa Sign ABOV aj Ring Ceste Alpha OV 34 AingsPurple_OW awi 1 Sig AP DW i Ring Cresta Di avi d a A E paging Sie D ai ta Siy AG D avi a AingsAlpha D ai ta Sig GE D avi BSS E 2 In the Import Clip dialog box navigate to the directory that contains the clip avi file you wish to import cama om OOOO 3 Select the file name then click the Open button Files of pe Video cip avil d cma Ed Create a new cip Using Clips with Key Gipname Ring Red_ Dv EE C Use at key in curently loaded cip Using clips with key requires that you have two separate clips one for the fill and one for the key The fi
117. a bs GTi Out 1 0s Dur 1 03 el 10 Click on the New Acton tool to insert a new Action in the Action list ScCreenmoyve Graphic Pari emia 11 By default the Object will specify a Background Change this to Layer SCheeNMoy e Background P l l l 12 We will use this Action for the layer named Title Click on the down arrow under Layer Screenmove Bee cid P name or number A drop down list of layer names will display Select T7 e Note Benefits of Layer Naming Specifying a layer name avoids a dependence on layer priority and saves time for the operator For example If an Action specifies layer number and a new layer such as a logo is added to the intended graphic the layer priority will be changed and the Action will now affect a different layer This will require the Operator to open the intended graphic and re order the layers Object Layer Layer name or number Title Col 2e Layer naming is the most efficient way to build a Motion and naming layers smartly will allow you to group multiple layers 1 Enable the parameters X Position and X Rotate 2 With the parameter X Rozate highlighted click and hold on the red point next to 360 Drag in a downward direction and release at 180 Deko Training Position Position L i Position C Scale Js Scale Jv Scale Rotate KEE r Rotate 10 22 Understanding Timeline Motions 3 Inthe Timing section
118. a channels Deko cannot read the alpha channels of other file formats except Pinnacle g files If have a file saved in an other format and need to use an existing alpha channel or create a new one bring the image into a paint program and save the file with the alpha channel as a TIFF or Targa file Below are some other popular file formats bmp BitMaP is the standard Windows image format on DOS and Windows compatible computers Bitmapped graphics are large in comparison to gifs or jpegs due to the fact that they contain a map of every pixel on the screen and they are not compressed The BMP format supports RGB indexed color grayscale and Bitmap color modes but not support alpha channels gif Graphics Interchange Format GIF is the file format commonly used to display indexed color graphics and images in documents over the World Wide Web and other online services GIF is an LZW comptessed see compression below format designed to minimize file size and electronic transfer time The maximum compression available with a GIF depends on image content Graphic images with limited flat colors will compress well sometimes even down to one tenth of the original file size while a complex non repetitive image will fare worse perhaps only saving 20 or so GIF files are limited to a palette of 256 colors or less The GIF format does not support alpha channels Note Deko cannot read gif files Translate them first to a compatible f
119. ab verifies the current setting of the system Check to see that the settings match the I Os you are using in your system Note if the Output settings are incorrect your video monitor will display the output of your eraphics incorrectly Click on the corresponding tabs to make any needed adjustments Setup Analog ideo I0 Pinnacle Systems Inc c 1997 Deko Training 1 8 Verify and Configure Your Deko Input Output Adjustment Tabs The Input and Output adjustment tabs provide for both selection of video format and adjustment of the signal The Formats are Composite YUV Component and RGB Choose the format that matches your video standard Setup Analog Yideo I0 Pinnacle Systems Inc c 1997 IO Status Analog Inputs nalog Outputs Digital Video Key Format vuv Gain Adjustments Y Gain al Y Pedestal m g Coarse at E B r Gain al B r Pedestal a E R Gain 136 RY Pedestal aj EI al Kep Timing Coarse Es Key Gain fi 24 Key Pedestal E 6 CUB 6 6 ss Syne Gain H Press Esc to cancel current change Center Values Note Do not move the Video adjustment sliders unless you are technically qualified to do so FastAction Keyboard Isn t Working Properly If you cannot clear the LED display on the FastAction keyboard or perform typical keystrokes such as using the Read key to open a document your keyboard may not be
120. addition a check box with a fifth color box is added to create a highlight detail across the gradient Color selection for each of these boxes works the same as with the Color Shader Choose colors for gradient buttons by selecting ee ne colors in Color Texture aren Picker and right CAP clicking on each Colors Sample button Ramp gradient Sample The default color for the Hilite is white right click Color Picker selection to change value Once colors are applied to the gradient click on Options to select the way yout gradient is applied to text The following options are available AGB HS Options e Group determines how the ramp will be applied Group Opacity letter letter applies the ramp to each letter Ramp word applies the ramp to each word H Scale row applies the ramp to each row of text Y Scale E oo r page applies the ramp to the entire page of text Hilite e Opacity controls the overall transparency of the ramp on top or of any transparency controls applied to individual colors in the ramp angie e Ramp Options H Offset H Scale the width of the ramp relative to the group For Offset setting less than 100 percent only part of the ramp is applied e V Scale the height of the ramp relative to the group For setting less than 100 percent only part of the ramp is applied Deko Training Type and Modify Text
121. adow from the shadowed detail s UNDERLINE Shader Shape like edge controls the shape of the underline edges either square or round l Hide man Height controls the height of the underline The default value is Blur Shape 100 js Width provides an option to make the underline wider than the Height Width actual text A value of zero matches the width of the text poo p _ V offset specifies a vertical offset from the underline s normal position Negative values move the underline down and positive values move it up Spaces when checked underlines the spaces between words M Epace Shape produces a rectangle with either square or rounded corners FRAME Hore Shader Height specifies the height of the frame l Hide Width specifies the width of the frame Elur Shape H offset offsets the frame horizontally relative to the detail being h square cia oS V off A E EE nao AN offset offsets the frame vertically relative to the detail being p E framed 2o H offset offset Descenders when checked lowers the bottom of the frame to r r accommodate lower case descender characters like g j and y M Descenders Spaces when checked underlines the spaces between words MW Spaces Deko Training Priority Controls Type and Modify Text Each Detail has a priority attribute control to determine how it will be laid
122. age return and type the Select style preset word render Click at the end of select style preset 2 and then press the Enter key to insert a carriage return type render Repeat for other rows as shown below f Untitled Macro Select style preset 1 view show graphic letter D letter e letter k letter o text _cursor nearest 156 96 164 35 select word render Select style preset 2 render ee Click at end of select_style_preset 2 select style preset 4 and enter a carriage return render select style preset 5 Type Render render Select style preset 6 Repeat this for the other rows render Select _ style preset render Select style preset amp 4 F FA Click on the green macro play button and watch as the display now changes from style 1 through 8 with a short delay Deko Training Using Macros 11 5 Replacing Commands The command render is not the only command that you can use to force the machine to wait until it updates You can also use the wait command and specify how long you wish the machine to wait The syntax to use is wait 1 for 1 second or wait 0 12 fora 12 frame delay There is a very easy way to replace commands in macros and this is to use the replace function To see how this works please perform the following steps 1 Press Macro Edit to view your macro 2 Place the cursor at the top line 3 Go to Edit gt Replace 4 Type render in the Find what window and wait 1 in the Rep
123. ality pictures The RGB system is used by some broadcast video equipment and computers RGB encoder Device for converting composite video to RGB video right click Operation that involves pressing the right mouse button The right click operation reveals hidden menus or dialogs in an NT interface ROM Read Only Memory The information on a CD ROM disc cannot be altered or new information added by the user routing Directing a signal through various audio and or video components routing switchers Hard wired automated patch bays that allow system connections to be made simply by pushing a button safe title area The area of the screen considered safe for graphics Anything outside this area may be clipped by an over scanning monitor The safe title area is only a reference it does not prevent typing outside its boundaries You can specify the top bottom right and left boundaries of the safe title area Values represent a percentage of the distance from the specified edge of the screen to the opposite edge With Deko the default text layer is set to the dimensions of the safe title area safe area The central display on a video screen A loss of 10 15 of the edges of the image is to be expected because of over scanning on video monitors Designers should plan to stay in the safe area when creating graphics for video Also known as Safe Title Area sampling The act of frequently looking at
124. alled 4 Click the Add button select the driver for which you want to set up a data source then click Finish 5 Type in a Data Source Name 6 Click the Select button navigate to the database file and then click OK Click OK two more times to close the dialog box Query Database To set up a layer to query a database 1 Select the layer 2 Go to View gt Database to open the Database window 3 Inthe window choose a Database Name then check the Connect box 4 Choose a Table In Database 5 Specify a record within that table by selecting a Field Name and entering a Field Value for that field 6 In Display Field choose the field whose data to display in the layer 7 Enter a value in the Frequency box to specify how many seconds to wait between requests to the data source for updates If Frequency is set to zero the automation interface will issue the request only once 8 Click Create Query Deko Training Other Options 17 3 Database Window Options e Database Name A database name defined in the ODBC Data Source Administrator e Connect Connects Deko to the specified database e Table In Database A table within the database e Field Name The field used to identify a data record within the database e Field Value A value of the specified Field Name field This can be hard coded as a specific value or you can enter the variable SWhere_ColVal then use the Command Bar to
125. ally contain one or more Deko objects refer to an associated graphic The object can be the background or several shape layers in a Deko graphic who s Shader is specified as a Texture 2 An associated graphic is not typically called to air but rather contains all the team specific elements such as banners logos frames and team names used in various team graphics J 900 dko Graphic 3 Jel team_GBgreen dko Graphic 6 tel Ea po POBEPRT CANDE CENTER LINEBACKER Air Graphic Associated Graphic saved as 900 dko saved as team _GbGreen dko Building the Graphics Ideally the seasonal pre build for a sporting event will produce a single associated graphic for each team The air graphics will make a reference to two associated graphics team_home dko and team_visitor dko On game day it all comes together when the playing teams for example team GB and team NY are saved as team home dko and team visitor dko Deko Training A 6 Appendix Every ait graphic will automatically update with the current team look without user intervention To insure the success of this process there are several Open Browse rules to comply with Replace AutoScale Group Opacity i joo g Rules for Making File Associations ae e When using shaper layers as the Deko object for file association the Y Offset Texture Group should be letter based in the Group list of the Shader 2s 26 S H Alignment Alignment
126. anel 2 Double click the ODBC icon to open the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box You should be looking at User DSN options If not click the User DSN tab at the top of the dialog box ODBC Data Source Admirustrator 3 Click the Add button Deko Training Other Options 17 5 4 Select Microsoft Access Driver then click the Finish button Fa A lictose Ie 250 360200 Mi TA Microsoft dBase Driver dbf 3 50 360200 5 Microsoft Excel Driver ls 3 50 360200 Microsoft FoxPro Driwer dbf 350 360200 Mictosolt Text Driver txt cev 350 360200 5 In the Data Source Name text box type Sample Usually you can use any name you want but for this test drive you must use Sample Select Daltabast feo dS Deka Tutorial p Database 6 Deko Training 17 6 Other Options Notice that the pathname for Sample mdb appears in the Setup dialog box 7 Click OK again and notice that Sample appears in the User DSN list TODBC Data Source Administrator Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsoft Access Drives mdb Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsoft Excel Diver xls Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsoft FoxPro Driver dbf Microsoft Access Driver mdb Sample Microsoft Access Drives mdb Text Files Microsoft Text Driver txt csv 8 Click OK once more to finish the process and close the dialog box That s it You don t have to do this again
127. arity with the Box cursor as used in some other CG applications If so select Box cursor as your preference Configure Clip Servers Enabled Options W Save Settings on Exit e Inthe Options menu deselect Save Settings on Exit Save Settings Now Deko Training 1 12 Verify and Configure Your Deko Preferences Ed Common Prompts Paths Cursor Markers Advanced Test cursor style eee IY Show test cursor f beam Cursor movement Home and End key behavior By pixels C Windows By screen units f Character generator Cancel Reset this page to defaults e Select the Common tab e Click on the Layout window e Click on the Shortcut menu in Starting layout and select Sale Edit e If you are using a FastAction keyboard FAK make sure the Enhanced Keypad and FastAction Function Keys are selected If both selections are grayed out this may indicate that the drivers need to be installed Preferences Common Prompts Paths Cursor Markers Advanced Starting layout Restrict graphics to Style Edit z native kepboard Color used where Decimal tab graphic is transparent character M Enhanced keppad D pacion Function Rens O E M Automatically play macros when opened T On re boot automatically log on and start Deko Fassword Cancel Reset this page to defaults Deko Training Verify and Configure Your Deko 1 13 o Check Autom
128. arrow button down the font size numbers will automatically advance You must release the arrow to see the character in the new size ail eg EFL w B e GHO e Lel 2 Untitled Program Size field Use up arrow to increase 10 Double click the word lazy to select it Triple click to select the entire row Try it 11 Click on Style 6 from the Preset Style window If you have a FAK use the Preset Style buttons to select the style Type Deko e x File Edit View Text Layer NetDeko Channel Macro Options Window Help Aa OU d MA FA ESL ae Soo t BEng style Op x JE Untitled Program H I QS Selected ms word in new style Preset Style window Click once TE Preset style Style 6 gt ae to select aoda o maca i Bm ON look a OE Macro or command name z Prompt _Llose Style 6 selected Layer 1 of 1 Ln 350 Dot382 Coarse INS NUM 13016K 2 04 PM Deko Training 4 8 Type and Modify Text You should see the selected word change immediately to the look of Preset Style 6 Congratulations You have successfully set up your screen in the proper layout for text creation entered text in the Program window resized text and given text a new style Navigating the Cursor and Selecting Text As we saw in the previous example selected text can be resized and have new styles applied to it Understanding the mechanics of this process is essential to worki
129. aseline from the Layer menu Deko Training Creating and Using Custom Typefaces 8 3 2 Inthe Baseline menu choose Reverse Baseline Change Type of Point To change the type of a point on the baseline 1 Inthe Baseline menu check Edit Curve 2 Click the point to select it 3 In the Baseline menu do one of the following e Check Move To for a point that begins a new section of the baseline e Check Line To for a point connected to the previous point by a straight line e Check Bezier for a point connected to the previous point by a Bezier curve Bezier curves To adjust the continuity between two Bezier curves 1 Inthe Baseline menu check Edit Curve 2 Click the point shared by the two curves 3 In the Baseline menu do one of the following e Check Cusp for no continuity The contro points on either side of the shared point move independently e Check Smooth for C7 continuity e Check Symmetric for C2 continuity Cancel Changes To cancel changes to a baseline do one of the following e To cancel all changes and exit the Baseline Edit window choose Cancel from the Baseline menu e If Undo is enabled you can choose Undo Ctrl Z from the Edit menu for each change you wish to undo Deko Training 8 4 Creating and Using Custom Typefaces Exercise Baseline Editing 1 Click in the Preset Style window to set focus and open the sample file D Deko Tutorial training baseline pst
130. at opposite ends This becomes Point 2 8 The red Bezier point acts as a keyframe for repositioning You can also assign a level of continuity by choosing one of five Continuity Tools in the Timeline Toolbar see above Deko defines continuity as a degree of smoothness from Point to Point To assign continuity to Point 2 the Point must be selected indicated in red 9 Click on the Cusp Tool in the Timeline Toolbar This sets the level of continuity for Point 2 to be Abrupt instead of Smooth 10 Click on the bottom purple Bezier handle of Point 2 and drag upward so it creates an arch 11 Click on the top purple Bezier handle and drag upward and to the right so it creates a V with both handles so RE re E I Purple Bezier handles control the amount of continuity expressed Point to Point during movement of an Object Home eee eee rene eee Sewn ree Re Deko Training Understanding Timeline Motions 10 15 12 The motion we are creating is an abrupt bounce of our Object during its flight path To make this more effective select Point 2 fo Se Su either manually with your mouse or for more accurate selection click on the Next Point Icon in the Timeline Toolbar Previous Point 13 Click hold and drag Point 2 downward and below the Home position line The Home line will lift upward to display a greater area below it 14 Release Point 2 when about 1 4 of the Graph displays beyond the Home li
131. ate a Character Based Motion 1 In Effect click on the arrow under Object and change from Layer to Character You ve now changed the way the Motion defines an Object Your Parameters and Effect will now apply to the characters of Layer 1 individually but at the same time Scrub to preview and notice that each character has the same Start position off screen You should also notice the addition of a Sub Bar below the Timing Bar This appears anytime an Object is defined as either Character Word or Row Deko Training Understanding Timeline Motions 10 11 10 11 12 13 14 Pause Button A Timing Sub Bar Overlap Simultaneous Sync Sequential Tab Button Tab The Sub Bar provides finer timing control of your Object s movement and is tied directly to the Timing Bar above it Offset Control Click hold and drag the round Offset control just a pinch to the right This will increase to the right or decrease to the left the delay between each character Scrub to preview When the Offset Control is positioned on the left directly over the Simultaneous Tab there is no delay in placement between each Object As the Offset Control is moved to its right more delay will appear in between the placement of each Object The Sequential Tab places each Object one directly after the other The Sync Button synchronizes timing on multiple actions that look to the same object layer The Pause Button
132. atically play macros when opened e Check Automatically play associated effects e Click OK Color Used Where Graphic is Transparent The Common tab provides you with a setting to change the background of the Preview and Program window when you are working with transparent backgrounds The normal default for this setting is dark gray With this setting it is often difficult to determine whether you are looking at a keyed transparent background or a black background Choosing a dark color such as dark green for your setting helps you to determine what is transparent in the background To change this setting 1 Click on the button under Color used where graphic is transparent A color Paicneedanee picker is revealed graphic is transparent 2 Click on one of the basic colors or use the color picker panel for a custom color The color chosen will display in the Color Solid box 3 When you have selected a satisfactory color click OK The color will be Basic colors deposited on the button El Emi under Color used where Bi CHT ERM graphic is transparent ET HEHE En raed _ ees used as inn bbb is the background color of ETEEN the Preview and Program ee ee EES E Custom colors lick h a uo m Hue fioo Red 53 sat jes Green jis be displayed on your ao A aie y Cancel Add to Custom Colors Lx Color Deko Training 1 14 Verify and Configure Your Deko Choose Style Edit Layout
133. atically works out the definition of an Object without user intervention saving both production time and cost This is also ideal when interfaced to an automation system or external databases where content is not known at the time Motions are built Play the Motion 1 So far you ve been scrubbing through your Motion manually using the Scrub Bar To preview your Motion in real time click the Play button on the Timeline Toolbar a GPI Trigger 2 Press the Swap key to take the graphic back to Preview Playback Rate Stop Pause Play When you use the Play button to playback a Motion Deko plays the entire Motion at the playback rate specified on the Timeline Toolbar However this rate is ignored when the Motion file is specified within a sequence The sequencer s rate of time for that event takes priority You have now successfully created a basic Motion Save this file For a more complex approach follow the next steps to enhance the existing Motion Deko Training Understanding Timeline Motions 10 13 Create a Point to Point Motion For the sake of identifying the next steps we will call this key raming Though Reyframing is a term mostly used on a DVE Deko can produce a similar effect whereby different points of position are inserted as part of an Action for your Object Rather than Actions performing off screen to on screen or on screen to off screen Deko allows you to create Point to Point
134. ations or lots of details in one graphic To apply an animation file to a graphic 1 Enter the File Name or click Open to browse to the file location Enter the name of the first file in the sequence 2 Specify Number of Frames the number of cels files to play Deko defaults to a number based on the assumption that the animation ends when it encounters a file name that breaks the sequence of numbers 3 Indicate Play direction by checking forward or backward 4 To play the animation in a continuous loop click Continuous 4 23 CAP Options Forward C Backward Oscillate Continuous Rate Fps 5 To change the direction of the animation each time it plays click Oscillate 6 Enter the frame rate at which you wish the animation to play back Note Playing an animation file involves using the Motion editor CAP Shaders will be covered in Lesson 17 The Graphic Browser The Graphic Browser like the Typeface Browser provides a window with sample picons of available graphics in a given directory The window opens il Graphic Bro ME tdeko_o dko as a single column of graphic Picons you can resize this window to any size y up to screen maximum to show more graphics The graphic browser can be accessed the following ways e Press Ctrl L SK or Browse Graphics FAK e Goto View gt Browser e Click on the Browse button in any Shader when Texture is selected Pressing Page Up or
135. ayback to begin a 4 Repeat step 2 to set the display on the desired Out point frame then click the Out button 3 Click the In button Note You also can specify In and Out points as well as Duration of playback by entering numerical values next to these buttons Deko Training 17 28 Other Options To Play a Clip from the In Point to the Out Point e Check Play In to Out Note When Play In to Out is not checked Deko will play the clip from beginning to end ignoring the In and Out points Once you specify an In point and or an Out point and check Play In to Out Deko begins at the In point and ends at the Out point whenever you scrub through the clip When no In or Out point is specified you can scrub through the whole clip To Find the Nearest Point In Out Beginning or End in the Clip 1 Inthe Clip Edit box do one of the following 2 Use the double left arrows to jump to the nearest point backward in the clip Out In or beginning gi 3 Use the double right arrows to jump to the nearest point forward in the clip Out In or end Ga To Play a Clip Do one of the following e From the Clip menu select Play e Inthe Clip Editor click the Play button under the thumbwheel b To Synchronize Clip Playback with Effect Playback 1 Open the Clip 2 Inthe Clip Editor click Synchronize with Effect Note When you associate the clip with a graphic ClipDeko will begin clip playback simultaneously w
136. ayed in rapid sequence producing the illusion of motion anti aliasing Aliasing causes jagged edges in images displayed on a computer screen in low resolution Anti aliasing software smoothes the stair step effect by anticipating and displaying the interim pixels In analog CCD systems anti aliasing is accomplished by the removal of unwanted high frequency components through the means of a high frequency cut optical filter placed before the imager artifacts Unpleasant visual problems within the signal such as noise chroma displacement etc ASCII An abbreviation for American Standard Code for Information Interchange An ASCII file is a text file that is in a standard computer readable format understandable to any PC platform aspect ratio The ratio of height over width of an image A standard video monitor has an aspect ratio of four units of width horizontal to three units of height vertical This is expressed as a 4 3 aspect ratio Images will become distorted if forced into a different aspect ratio during enlargement reductions or transfers The aspect ratio for HDTV is 16 9 Deko Training G 2 Glossary axis A line that is fixed along which distances are measured or to which positions are referenced background The backmost part of a graphic It is a full screen rectangle located behind the last layer furthest from the viewer The background can be turned on and off When off it is transparent liv
137. ayers in a Graphic do one of the following e Choose Select All from Edit menu e Press Ctrl A To De select text do one of the following e Click anywhere in the text field e Press any arrow key Deko Training Type and Modify Text 4 11 Selected Text versus Current Style It is important to understand the difference between se ected characters and the Current Style If you select some characters and then change the size value Deko will scale the selected text If you change size when no characters are selected this changes the Current Style So be aware that you must select characters before making changes to their text properties Otherwise you are setting the properties of the next character to be typed Note Changing selected text may not permanently change the text field attributes unless the new line position is selected indicated by a triangle marker When you desire to change the text in a field use Ctrl Shift A to guarantee all of the text is selected Modifying Selections Text is selected so it can be modified Modifications can include resizing or repositioning text changing the font or changing the look of a font When we change the look of a selection we are changing its style A szy is defined as a font plus the font s ok Styles The font is specified by its name size and kerning characteristics Its s e is defined as the elements that give the font shape and color Style elements are descri
138. ayout EricdGraphicCreate _ Seve Cancel 3 The layout is now available as a selection in the Windows gt Select Layout menu Select Layout Pw 1 EricsGraphicCreate Note Not all versions of Deko allow you to save custom layout views Deko Training 3 1 Lesson 3 Setting up and Managing File Directories Opening Windows NT Explorer Windows provides a number of ways to manage files One of the more useful tools is Windows Explorer Explorer works basically the same on Windows 95 98 or Windows NT so no mater what version of Deko you are using you will find Explorer an essential tool to manage your files Opening Windows Explorer 1 Click on the Start button 2 Move the mouse pointer up to Programs to highlight it A second menu will appear 3 Click on Windows NT Explorer Desktop Many long term users do not know about this shortcut to open Explorer 4 Right click on the My Computer Icon on the Desktop 5 Click on Explore from the popup menu Explore Find Map Network Drive Disconnect Network Drive Create Shortcut Rename Properties A ACCESSONEs FA Logitech Mouseware A Startup H is Command Frompt 2 Interet Explorer Ai Microsoft Word Viewer ie Outlook Express BY Windows NT Explorer fs Administrative Tools Common E Microsoft SQL Server 7 0 d E PostDeko Startup d m Thunder 3 LE winzip ig TA Symantec pc nywhere tatio
139. ayout Graphic Compose Cbrl F11 w Style Edit Alt F11 Ter fe Graphic Eont 2 Select the Program window by pressing the Program key FAK Layer Look ot F5 SK Deko highlights the title bar of the Program window to Justification show you that the window is active Horizontal Vertical 3 Click on the Layer button in the Style window and verify that Word Spread wrap is checked 5 lea Aulo scaling i None Scale to fit box Shrink to fit box 4 Click on the Title bar of the Preset Style window to set focus 5 With focus set on the Preset Style window press the Clear Read keys FAK or F9 SK to bring up the Open File dialog Select the file tutorial pst and click Open 6 From the Options menu select Save Settings Now You will be using this setting for exercises in the next two lessons 7 Select Preset Style 1 in the Preset Style window 8 Set focus to the Program window and type your text Type The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog If your system has video output verify that you see the same output on the video monitor The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog Deko Training Type and Modify Text 9 Select the g in dog by placing your I beam to the left of the g and pressing Shift right arrow e Locate the up down arrows next to the size field on the Text bar e Click either arrow to change the size of the selected character If you hold an
140. bed as details Each detail has a ook that is defined by the Sader settings Detail elements include e Face the fill elements of a font e Edge outline of any other detail e Shadow drop or deep shadow of a detail e Underline of a given detail including frame e Frame of the detail Styles can be saved individually from the Style window or they can be added to a Preset Style window and saved in groups of eight The current style determined by style selection or cursor position is visible in the Current Style window Steps in Creating a Style 1 Select a font 2 Set Font parameters including Size Leading Kerning Rotation and Skew from the Text bar or in the Font dialog of the Style window 3 Add Details from the Look dialog in the Style window or by clicking the appropriate detail on the Text bar 4 Adjust Detail settings in the Shader window Deko Training 4 12 Type and Modify Text Selecting or Changing Typefaces File Edit View Stile Layer Channel To change a font typeface Gill Sans HT Franklin Gothic Medi Freestyle Script French Script MT Garamond Georgia Gigi Gill Sans MT Gill Sans MT Conden Gil Sans MT Ext Com Gill Sans Ultra Bold Gill Sans Ultra Bold C Gloucester MT Extra Goudy Old Style Goudy Stout Haettenschweiler Harlow Solid Italic 1 Select the text Ctrl Shift A 2 On the Text bar click on the arrow and scroll to the desired font and
141. bine to make one video frame with a scanning cycle of 1 30 of a second at a scanning rate of 1 30 of a second in NTSC field 2 Computer term The basic categories of information stored in the records in a file for example a file of bibliographic information might have Author Title and Date fields Field is also used to describe portions of a sector that contain particular information such as a sync field field frequency The number of fields per second NTSC field frequency is 60 per second PAL frequency is 50 per second field rate The number of fields per second frame One complete TV picture consisting of two interlaced scanned fields The American and Japanese standard for TV NTSC scans a new TV frame consisting of 525 raster lines 30 times per second One TV frame is a 1 30 second synchronized to the U S AC power frequency of 60 Hz frame buffer An area of computer memory that produces an output picture which can be viewed on a monitor A frame buffer consists of an array of pixels short for pzcture elements Each pixel is assigned separate amounts of red green blue and transparency from 0 to 255 The number of rows and columns of pixels determines the resolution of the frame buffer In NTSC FXDeko s frame buffer has 720 pixels in each of 486 rows In PAL it has 720 pixels in each of 576 rows frame grabber Similar to digitizers but this term generally refers to those that can capture a frame in
142. buttons Use to minimize maximize restore or close a window We will discuss this in the next section below e Scroll Bars Drag these with the mouse click and hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse to reveal contents of the window that are not visible If the scroll bars disappear the full content of the window is displayed e Resize Triangle Position the mouse pointer over this small triangle in the lower right corner of the window and drag to resize it Deko Training Setting up and Managing File Directories 3 13 Changing the Size of a Window 1 Click on the Maximize I button to make a window fill your screen Notice that after the window is maximized the Restore button a appears in place of the Maximize button 2 Click on the Restore button to restore the window to its previous size 3 Click on the Minimize button The window will disappear into the taskbar at the bottom of your screen It is now running in the background which means the program is still open and will immediately reappear when you click its button on the taskbar Mstat A E G Erploring c El Adobe Photoshop FostDeko Switching Between Open Programs or Windows If you move the mouse to the bottom of the Desktop the Taskbar will reveal Click on the program you desire and the Desktop will switch to the program selected Alt Tab Key You can quickly gain access to each program without revealing the Taskbar by
143. by clicking on it 2 Click on either View button at the top of the browser window eye open or closed to change the status Locking Layers Below the zew status indicator on each layer is a Lock status indicator When a layer is locked it cannot be moved or altered To lock or unlock a layer 1 Click on the layer to select it 2 Click on either the Lock or Unlock button at the top of the browser Normal Zoom Layers In the normal view layers appear in proportion to their actual size in the graphic For small layers this makes it difficult to distinguish one layer from another in the layer browser The zoom button magnifies the layer element in the browser making it easier to identify the layer in the browser Selecting Multiple Layers It is often necessary to select more than one layer to work with Individual layers can be selected by pressing the Page Up or Page Down keys when the Program window is active or by clicking on the layers in the Layer Browser Deko Training 5 24 Working with Layers and Tabs To select more than one layer at a time do one of the following FE OO e Inthe Layer Browser hold the Ctrl key down and click on Bede ee desired layer thumbnails Each will be highlighted p eed ae Cirle e Select Edit gt Select More menu and click on each desired layer Cut Ctrl in the graphic use Page Up Page Down to select the layers Copy Ctrl C consecutively Pasie Cale Clear All Alt Fe e Within the graph
144. ce A pulse or contact switch closure signal sent from an editor to trigger audio tape recorders digital video effects devices and graphics generators to activate for an edit or effect Some external devices do not have the ability to be directly controlled by the editor In this case GPI signal is used as a means of telling these devices when to execute a command The choice of command itself however must be set up on the external device and cannot be controlled by the editor graphic One video page of text and or background art created and displayed using FXDeko A graphic is created in either the Program or Preview window A graphic can be saved on disk as a graphic file Graphic Browser window Also referred to as the Browser shows thumbnails of all the graphics in the current directory Depending on how it is invoked this window shows graphics that will be read into Preview or Program put into a sequence or used as texture shaders You can size and position the browser anywhere to see as many thumbnails as you like Type the first one or two letters of a graphic s name to jump to the thumbnail of that graphic Double click the thumbnail to use the graphic graphics 1 Computer term Text or pictorial artwork created on the computer with software and stored on a hard disk for use in computer based presentations desktop publishing or video applications graphics 2 Video term Text and Graphics created
145. cify in the Preferences menu This simplifies file management during operation We recommend you set up your directory structure for saving files before you begin a project The next exercise will show you how to do this You can always change the directory you wish to save a file to or open a file from The paths tab Options gt Preferences allows you to assign preferred directories to save various files used by the system The directories are assigned a path from a root directory or drive with the paths noted on the Paths tab of Preferences You can set these paths to x preferred directories for the Deko to use upon program startup You Common Prompts Paths Cursor Markers Advanced can change these preferred CURRENT DIRECTORY SEARCH PATH directories at any time while Graphics Sequences Effects Automation operating the system either by D deko tutorial navigating to a new directory from Styles Preset Styles Shaders the File gt Open menu or from the D deko tutorial File gt Change Directory menu if a ok Macros you are currently viewing an active a o deko tutoria browser window You can also Motions change paths by typing new ones directly in the appropriate fields D deko tutorial Custom Typefaces D deko tutorial Cancel Reset this page to defaults Deko Training Setting up and Managing File Directories 3 15 Exercise Create New Folders and Subfol
146. ck hold and drag the round control slightly to the right Scrub the Motion to see the delay Then click on the center gray square in the sub bar to place the round control 7 Scrub to preview a sequential placement of each bullet in the Col 1 group 8 Since the Action for Column 2 will be almost identical to Column 1 we can copy and paste this Action for the text in Column 2 Click on the fourth Action Press Screenmove Ctrl C then Ctrl V Layer Pry A duplicate action is created and a fifth Action and Timing bar will display S ETE Layer Pry Overlap a ARA S Overlap A 9 Under Layer name or number replace the 1 Layer name or number micii LE g 6699 z Position witha 2 Co z iE aig 10 Enable the Opacity parameter and then enable both X Scale and Y Scale Scrub to preview Rotate _ Rotate r Rotate Z Rotate Skew Opacity Deko Training 10 24 Understanding Timeline Motions 11 As an advanced technique we will add a Post to the Scale parameter timeline Scale to create a dynamic re size of the text Click on the word X Scale to display the Mo Cale graph for that parameter Be careful not to disable it Y acale 12 Just above the Effect selection click on the Insert Point tool 13 Position your mouse in the Graph and click in the very middle of the yellow timeline A red point will display Fig A Click on the red point and drag up to just abo
147. copy of a digital signal is virtually identical to the original The primary disadvantage of digital signals is their large size resulting in high storage requirements Digital compression techniques are helping to overcome this disadvantage disc A generic name for an optically recorded medium as opposed to disk which refers to magnetically recorded material disk A magnetic storage device for computers such as a floppy or a hard disk display A CRT Cathode Ray Tube a device used to view electronic images the process of presenting that image dissolve As one scene is fading out another scene is simultaneously coming in At the middle of the dissolve both scenes are on the screen with the same 50 exposure In single camera taping techniques the dissolves are added in postproduction double click To tap the left mouse button twice in rapid succession without moving the cursor downstream key A term that is applied to the final output of the switcher where a key can be created The downstream key function is used by broadcasters to key their logo over the final program feed and by producers who wish to further modify their signal by taking advantage of the downstream keyer drag Holding the left mouse button down and moving the mouse in the desired direction Operation is used to select elements in a window driver device driver A software program that translates commands between the comput
148. ctangle or Ellipse To use a rectangle or ellipse as a baseline 1 Select the layer whose baseline you wish to modify 2 Activate the Baseline Edit window 3 Click the rectangle or ellipse button in the Tools window and then drag the cursor in the Baseline Edit window to define the rectangle or ellipse 4 Release the mouse button then drag points as desired to edit the baseline Note Hold Ctrl as you drag the cursor to maintain a square or round baseline Apply Baseline To apply a baseline 1 Once you have drawn or edited the baseline as desired 2 Do one of the following e To apply the baseline and remain in Baseline Edit mode choose Apply Baseline Enter from the Baseline menu e To apply the baseline and close the Baseline Edit window choose Accept Baseline Alt Enter from the Baseline menu Editing Baselines Delete or Insert a Point To delete or insert a point on a baseline 1 If not already in the Baseline Edit mode choose Edit Baseline from the Layer menu 2 Inthe Baseline menu check Edit Curve 3 Do one of the following e Click the point you wish to delete and then choose Delete Selected Point Delete from the Baseline menu e Choose Insert Point Insert from the Baseline menu and then click on the curve where you wish to insert the point Reverse Direction To reverse the direction of the baseline 1 If not already in the Baseline Edit mode choose Edit B
149. ctory Starting from the Root Drive directory double clicking on each folder in the path will open the final directory in the path where your files are located This path will be placed in your Paths file of preferences The above example would show d deko tutorial e File Selection List menu provides a list of all available files for you to open in a selected directory e List File of Type menu acts as a filter showing only selected file types in the File Selection menu This can be useful when many List Files of Type file types are stored in a directory Deko defaults to the Deko Deko Graphics dko dko file type represented by the active window when File Open hies was selected You can select a different file type if desired In the a a program window other graphic files can be open including bmp All imports tga and jpg files To see these files click on the arrow of the Bitmap bmp dib le List Files of Type box and click on the desired file type Deko Training 1 16 Verify and Configure Your Deko e Drives Selection menu use this to select a different available drive e Network Drive button if your Deko is connected to a network files can be opened from servers or other Deko systems on the network Click on this button to open the dialog to map the network path e Options button provides file information on the selected file Note Use Clear Read keys FAK or
150. cture contrast and quality black level In an NTSC composite signal 7 5 IRE units is the lowest point in the signal that luminance components are permitted Luminance information falling below this point is cut off and lost breakup A momentary image distortion caused by the loss of sync broadcast system A system that allows public access to electronically transmitted information Typically the Federal Communications Commission FCC regulates a commercial television or radio station bus A row of switches on a production switcher for entering or cutting to program material There are several busses or rows on each switcher Each bus contains the same input sources but sends selected signals to a different stage of the switcher The program background bus selects which signal will go out on air the preset or preview bus sets what the next source will be when an auto transition is performed the key bus determines what will serve as the key source and or the key fill byte The number of bits used to represent a character Typically in personal computers 8 bits equals one byte e g 00001111 See Binary CAP shader Cel Animation Player Deko shader used to apply a cel animation to a detail such as a face or an edge You can then play the animation within a motion CD ROM Compact Disc Read Only Memory A 4 75 inch laser encoded optical memory storage medium with the same constant linear velocity CLV spira
151. current detail from the detail above it Deko Training Type and Modify Text 4 17 Shader Controls To apply color to text or graphics Deko uses a Shader Each detail in a look face edge frame shadow or underline has its own shader The shader determines how color is applied to the detail Each detail can be filled with colors from five different shader options e A color shader produces a detail with a single solid color e A ramp shader produces a detail with a four color ramp and an optional highlight e A zxture shader produces a detail with a bitmap texture e A keyhole shader produces a key cutout that can be replaced with video from an external key source e A CAP shader option allows the inclusion of sequential animation files as a fill source Note CAP shader can only be used with a rectangle or circle or as fill of a single letter not as fill of a text field Any detail can have any kind of shader For instance a face can have a color shader an edge a ramp shader and a shadow a texture shader all within a single look Multiple occurrences of the same type of detail within a look do not have to have the same type of shader For example a look with three edges can have a different shader for each edge You can use the same type of shader on multiple details within a graphic In addition each graphic s background has its own shader Using the background shader you can make a solid ramped or textured backgro
152. d 3 and try again Deko Training 3 6 Setting up and Managing File Directories 5 Navigate to the drive on which you wish to paste the copied file s 6 Scroll to the folder into which you want to paste the file s 7 Right click on the folder where you want to paste the file s A menu will appear 8 Clickon keka E Soo Paste a SupportFiles H A TrustLib Corp Identity File Folder 10 16 00 10 27 AM Eric s File Folder 10 13700 3 11 PM i Media Player File Folder 10 16 00 10 27 4M ce Eddiep Network Course File Folder 10 16 00 10 26 AM Er Elarson 38 Recycle Bin 10 13 00 209 PM File Folder 10716700 10 27 AM File Folder 10716700 9 39 4M File Folder 170 07 2 09 PM EEJ Media Player 2 File Folder 11 3 00 3 28 PM H Network Course Gl File Folder 10 12 00 7 58 AM a ET Recycled H E Research H E servicePack amp H E C a 0 H E Corp Identity SD Eric s H E WacomDtivers H E workshops m E a F Note If the files have the same names as the files already in this folder you will see a message appear as to the right Click Yes to allow the copy to continue or no to disallow it If you click Yes to All copying will occur for all files with the same name Be careful when selecting this command You may overwrite a file you did not wish to lose There is no undo for this command Confirm File Replace Deko Training Setting up and Managing File Directories Moving Files Between Drives 3 7 Use the
153. de je la BE 2 aa Hije Te aiee e saran n pmm eT NG Cir Pomen te ee SEES bidi A Das Fre WS M DE A Preset Style Current Style Command Window Bar AAN Status Bar Deko Training Type and Modify Text 4 3 Elements of the Deko Interface Pictured left is the Style Edit layout the preferred layout for graphic creation The elements of the layout are the most common tools you will use in creating graphics Additional tools available to this layout and others will be discussed later Menu Bar The Menu bar appears in all layouts The menu selections will vary slightly depending on which window is active at the time Text Bar The Text bar is also available in all layouts The Text bar allows users to choose and size text as well as access and activate the various shaders You will use them in designing the styles of your text and graphic objects There are also tools for text formatting and text justification The right side tools are used for recording macros This subject will be covered later in more detail Program Window The Program window is the primary graphic creation window Graphics created in the Program window are simultaneously displayed on the video output of the Deko unit The Program window displays with the graphic cursor position safe area carriage returns and tab stops A Preview window is also available for graphic creation The Preview window is identical to the Program window exc
154. der 9711700 8 48 AM EL Adobe J FullShot99 File Folder 12 01 4 59 AM pf Backgrounds G1 ODeme File Folder 15 01 4 22 AM H importwatch File Folder 1711701 4 59 AM E K poms File Folder 6 30 00 6 42 4M E Lan8 559 File Folder 10 18 99 2 12 PM E Mesal File Folder 10 12 00 11 26 AM PostDeko File Folder 12 5 00 9 38 4M Minimize Menu Bar Maximize Restore Close Buttons ea Mssql F Program Files File Folder 1 9 01 1 44 Akl ial Poztekoa 9 Recycler File Folder 9 18 00 2 54 PM H bin E SecurityAdmin File Folder 1 18 01 3 56 AM e Esta E sp2 File Folder 1 11701 4 20 AM Scroll Bars if NTSC Samples sql File Folder 111401 4 42 AM m Program Files J Temp File Folder 2 5 01 10 16 AM Recycler Thunder File Folder 275 01 10 10 AM H E Securittydmin I ThunderScreens File Folder 9714700 7 184 H E spe EI windows Update Setup Files File Folder 10718799 322 FPM i nfo sal a Daten Cil Calda EN raha Bo 4 4 35 objects 302MB Disk free space 2 90GB 2 Resize Triangle e Title Bar gives the Title of the program documents or dialog box When it is bright and highlighted it is active When it is grayed out another window is active Click anywhere in the window to make it active Click and hold the left mouse button on the title bar to drag the window to a new location on the desktop e Menu Bar provides tools to work within the program or dialog box e Minimize Maximize Restore Close
155. der channel you want to control 10 Enter the Thunder system s network name into the Server box Deko Training 11 Appendix A 19 Thunder Network Protocol Setup Parameter Settings Select Video Server ID Video Type Type Interace Type Settings Select Hardware Check Network Network UDF Codec f Channel COM f Network COM server THUNDER s C Local COM m Enter Server Name i Check Initialization Click Test Test Status button Thunder Network initialized OK Device Thunder Cancel About Press the Test button If all is well the message Thunder Network Initialized OK Device Thunder will appear If not refer to the Troubleshooting section below Testing the Configuration 1 First identify an existing clip in the Thunder default database Select a valid clip the picon will show a green filmstrip in the upper right Item Properties cornet General Security Video Clip Record Setup Right click on the picon and select Properties Mediald pt from the context menu Clip Kame PO In OO 00 02 11 Master Clip Master In the Properties dialog choose the Clip tab Es Take note of the media ID number In the FXDeko s Command bar type the following command clip load lt server id gt lt media ID gt For example if Thunder s clip server ID in the FXDeko Clip Server configuration window was 0 and the media Id of the desired clip is 0_1 the command to ty
156. ders In this exercise you will create one new folder on the C drive and four subfolders placed within the folder Use this as an example to consider how you might set up your directories on your own Deko system Create New Folder 1 Click on the C drive in the Directory Tree to highlight it A Desktop oe g May Computer 2 Goto File gt New gt Folder A folder named New Folder will appear at ae EO the bottom of the right pane z Dy ge E File Edt View Go Favorites Jools Help I Hew B Peate Shortcut q Shortcut Deletes ED winzip File Benrame om p st Test Document toperties e Microsott Word Document blu Caommniter tP e 3 Click in the highlighted Name box and type News The news folder will appear in the Directory Tree a8 system 1st a WINDOW S Al News Pant eS My Documents a Mu Music Sy News 4 In the Directory Tree left window pane click on the News folder to highlight it Go to File gt New gt Folder A new folder will appear in the right window pane 5 Click in the Name box and type 5am 6 Repeat step 4 and create the following additional subfolders noon 6pm When you are finished the subdirectories should look as follows Elgg C eo Acrobats lt My Documents mA My Music EI News Deko Training Lesson 4 Type and Modify Text At the end of this lesson you will be able to use your Deko to type text change the size and c
157. dicated layout to view all of these windows at once 2 PIeto Ele ES View Dye Leper Channel Maceo Cle Window Help However Deko smartly allows you vanner E JS on FU cS WL oe Hza Ee SS oo to open each window and create your own layout See the sample below Set he Preview Program A Program B Deko Training 13 2 Channel Configuration The FastAction Keyboard provides dedicated keys for operating in Dual Program mode Pem A and Pom B keys set focus to the desired Program window Channel The Sequence window also provides a selection for playing an effect to either Program A ot Program B In the Sequencer click the down arrow in the Channel field and choose the desired function Using Deko s Built In Keyer With Deko s built in keyer you can key text and graphics over a live input of video And you can frame grab this input Or use Deko s linear key output to key text and graphics downstream through a switcher Keying and Routing 1 Connect an input video signal to Deko and optionally a key signal 2 Inthe Options menu click Hardware settings Click Input selection and select the appropriate input signal 3 From the Channel menu choose Keying and Routing You will see a selection list for both Channel 1 Channel 1 Program Channel 2 Preview i Deko only peko r inputi keps mired C Deko Input 1 Full key Epeka r Inputa kers mired C Deko Input 2 Full
158. dow 3 Position the mouse pointer in the graphic then click and drag the mouse up or down Notice that the baseline rotates around the graphic 4 Press the Enter key This will apply the change to the text position but remain in Baseline Edit mode Try this a few more times 5 Press Alt Enter to accept the baseline and disable Baseline Edit mode 6 Enter the Edit Baseline mode again Alt L gt B 7 Now select the Selection Tool in the Tools window R 8 Position the mouse on the graphic The pointer changes to a hand icon 9 Place the hand icon near one of the points and drag the mouse to reposition the point Notice how the baseline shape changes Deko Training Creating and Using Custom Typefaces 8 7 Note You can move the position of any point on the curve with the selection tool except the starting point of the baseline To move the baseline start point select the move tool and drag the baseline to a new position Then edit the other points 10 11 12 13 Position the hand near one of the handles protruding from a point Click and drag the handle Notice that as you drag the handle the spline of the curve changes You can edit any point to create complex curves Press the Insert key and position the mouse pointer near the curve Notice that the mouse pointer includes a plus sign Click to insert a point When you are finished editing the baseline press Alt Enter to accep
159. draw a circle or ellipse Position the cursor to the left of the first text layer in your bullet list Press and hold the Ctrl key this will give you a perfect circle Drag the cursor down and let go when you reach the desired size Reposition the circle for better placement if necessary With the circle still selected choose a style from the Preset Style window or create your own style preset 3 works well Copy the Bullet to the Second Bullet Point 1 With the circle selected press Ctrl C to copy then Ctrl V to paste You ve created a copy of the first circle but cannot see it because it was placed directly on top of the original The only indication that you ve successfully copied and pasted a second element is that the layer count on the status bar down at the bottom of your desktop updated with the addition of another layer It should now read Layer 2 of 8 Layer 2 of 8 4 Ln 109 Dot rE Coarse INS NUM 19452 11 14AM Again with the circle selected press Ctrl M This is the shortcut for selecting the Move tool Deko Training 5 30 Working with Layers and Tabs 3 Hold down the Alt key and press the arrow down key until the second circle bullet is positioned next to the second point Press Ctrl Spacebar to toggle between Course and Fine movements so you can align the bullet to the point Highly skilled Deko user Quick learner Motivated for challenging tasks Talented and creative Work
160. e 7 oa eae Ei tovh irat A Properties BY Exploring Elarson 934D File Edit iew Tools Help g i EE ab Ese gt Pa All Folders Contents of SElarson 9e40 fi Ba SupportFiles Fl TrustLib a Printers M wf Scheduled Tasks Corp Identity Eric s Media Player H F Eddiep Network Course E Elarson 98 L GF Recycled E F _ Research i HEA Corp Identity SS ie E Eric s Texture Explore H E Media Player Open H E Network Course Eind gy Recycled Add to Zip E Research Add to Texture zip E p a Zip and E Mail Texture zip bs exture H WacomD rivers Send To H E Workshops i 7 E eel F Cut Copy Inserts the items unu hawe conied nr eut inin the select Create Shortcut Deko Training 3 8 Setting up and Managing File Directories Deleting Folders and Files When you want to permanently delete folders or files from your system you use the Delete command The Cut command will not remove files until you move them into another folder The Delete command will normally send items to the Recycle Bin which is the last item in the Network Tree Items placed in the Recycle Bin can be recovered and placed back on your system for use If the recycle bin is emptied items are no longer available for recovery 1 Right click on the folder or PT Exploring 4Elarson 98 D4T exture file s you want to delete A popup menu will appear y K x E 2 Click on Delete One of two
161. e Horizontal resolution is limited by the bandwidth of the television circuit while vertical resolution is limited by the total number of TV scan lines A high resolution video camera or monitor can display 700 horizontal lines of resolution and 486 vertical lines or 700 x 486 resolution Amount of detail in the video image is measured along both the horizontal and vertical axes In digital systems resolution is the number of pixels on a display surface Computer CRT resolutions are usually given as the number of pixels per scan line and the number of scan lines e g 640 x 480 Video resolution is measured in terms of lines of detail per horizontal scan line horizontal resolution and total number of scan lines vertical resolution The clarity or graininess of a video or computer image as measured by lines or pixels the smallest resolvable detail in the image The percetvable detail or the ability of an image reproducing system to reproduce fine detail Deko Training G 16 Glossary restore button Appears on the right side of a windows title bar Clicking restore button this button restores the window to its size before it was minimized or maximized RGB Red Green Blue The primary colors of light which are mixed to produce a video image In video RGB refers to a system in which the three primary colors are kept isolated and delivered from the source to the display device over separate wires This system results in high qu
162. e green yellow cyan and magenta plus gray black and white set to standards established by the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Color Bars are used as a reference at the head end of a videotape recording The playback machine is set up using color bars to ensure accurate color saturation and balance during playback command An instruction optionally modified by parameters to perform a specific function on the Deko command bar Allows direct entry of Deko commands and macros Press F4 to call up the command bar type the name of a command or macro then press Enter or click Play Use the Prompt button on the command bar to open the Command Prompt dialog box where you can specify command parameters A Defaults button in the dialog box resets parameters to their default values Click Close to close the command bar component video A video signal that has not been encoded and retains the original color information as separate elements Component is technically superior to encoded composite video It entails the transfer of three color video signals that describe a color image The most common component systems are RGB and Y R Y B Y Y stands for luminance or brightness the sum of R G and B By subtracting Y from R Y and from Blue B Y two color difference signals are produced which when transmitted with the Y signal can be used to recreate the original RGB color information Deko Training Glossa
163. e Menopo iets NANN 1 4 Cand Pind Deko mihe Proc ains MIS T e el ilies nee ee EE OOS 1 5 Vori Hardware oC S niena Ea O TEA T NN E O 1 5 Verin Hardware ot n aaa e cca OE T OO E OUOU OA OAOA 1 6 Veni videon Andari orraa ETT OTETA euelenasti uation naetiarsicaieeniuesesanmannd 1 6 Check Tipat Outo CAO Sapeken a E aO Raana 1 7 FascAcuon Keyboard Isi t WOrknn Prope gepireeiititieing en rr e n a a 1 8 Deskop EA OU Grisonnnno irar E TT E O a T N 1 10 D ko AE ho E A T A 1 11 Se P ERE A E a A E E R ea eee Aa 1 14 SPECAL NOE E T O A Te nny marr E O E een ni 1 14 Opena TUe Sasar n a A N O ease 1 15 DAVIN Eie RERE E EE E E E A E A E E ET 1 16 Ver Oy rear CCIE UG a EER EET TETO EN CEE E OEE 1 16 PAUE Osgar oran or eaea AE O ONE NE N A OTO ACAO 1 16 Exerce Emer Tes Into Bio Pace Play to cuir Wa ECGs iisip EE E 1 17 So rene E E E A E E EEE aeeesoonniaeets 1 18 Lesson 2 IN AVA Atte ME Deko T iaee eate aca ace ne ee ounce omatoe ose tneoaee 2 1 TEERDE TN OIE a cree enr tee revere roe one er ren rT Cree renee Troe oer ere ey rey mee ye rr rer on rTP ooy rer ere rere or 2 1 INAavicatin tie Morus with tie Key bOAtd eea areal ee asian eau a 2 1 TEEVI ME ae sats E tice oped ERONEN E AAR 2 2 The ndon MONU errs a EE EEEE E E OEE E E O EORR 2 3 Fouc Ima porate LENON eenei Ea E ON 2 3 EE E A A E E E ERE oe AA A AO 2 5 PEA EO Sista Bt E A om attr an devas ced E T A A AA AAE T A A E E E 2 6 Lesson 3 Settings p and Managing File Directories sssssssisseisseiri no
164. e Play key while an effect is in progress Press the Macro Edit key to open the Macro Edit window in any layout A combination of commands can be typed or recorded to this window then saved as a mcr file Macros are designed to automate repetitive tasks and speed production Text Formatting Tools Include Page Up Down keys to select layers Home End keys to insert cursor inside layer and the Insert key to toggle INS and OVR modes of typing text Layers and text can be manipulated on screen with Transform Tools Controls for transforming can be accessed by holding the Alt key down and pressing the directional arrows Preset Macro key You can store macros to a character assignment and execute them by pressing the Preset Macro key and the desired character Tab Set position your cursor and press the Tab set key to insert a Tab stop in the following formats Left Center Right and Decimal Undo Redo keys You may wish to Undo or Redo a particular action Pressing the Undo key will backtrack keystrokes and mouse clicks until you have reached a desired state The Undo function must be enabled in the Edit menu Macro Record amp Cmd key Press the Learn key at this location to turn on Macro Record This will record all keystrokes and mouse clicks to the Macro Edit window Open this window to view the commands Press the Cmd key and type the Macro filename to play a Macro Browse Graphics Typefaces
165. e Shader Clicking the Keyhole Shader button allows you to apply a key cutout to a detail By applying an external fill source from your switcher or other source you can fill a detail element with live video To Apply a Keyhole 1 Select a detail s Shader 2 Click on the Keyhole button When the button is selected the Current Style window will display the detail with a keyhole fill pattern indicating the key The Detail Shader button on the text bar will display it as well The text detail will appear as a dull gray color in the Program window In your output monitor the detail will display Deko s current input soutce If there is none a noisy green will display F y bess Current 3 lel Fa Keyhole indicator on Shader button Text Face Detail set as Keyhole Keyhole indicator in Current Style Deko Training Type and Modify Text The CAP Shader Option The CAP Shader allows you to apply prebuilt animation sequences to a detail Animation sequences are built from a sequence of cels that are made up of individual graphic files often tga files Note For animation sequences each file cel within the animation should be named with successive cel numbers such as globe001 tga globe002 tga globe003 tga Typically the CAP shader is applied to rectangles to allow animations to be incorporated into graphics A Deko graphic can support more than one animation but performance may degrade if there are large anim
166. e as weather fac Be sure to save in the D Deko Tutorial folder Deko Training Creating and Using Custom Typefaces 7 5 Using a Custom Typeface When a Custom Typeface is created and saved using the Custom Typeface is similar to using a standard typeface You can apply the same detail attributes to your logos as you do to your text To simplify this exercise we have already assigned an identical copy of the custom typeface you just created to a Preset Style window This window has the other fonts you will use in the exercise as well 1 Set focus to the Preset Style window Open the Preset Style training weather pst E Preset style Style 1 E Fes gpa Oooo pat BankGothic Md Futura Futura We weather AdLib BT HolidayFi BT AdLib BT AdLib BT BT Condensed Condensed Dekol ne i ie Sra 2 Set focus on the Program window and clear the window of any existing graphics 3 Delete the default text layer 4 From the Tools window select the Add Text Layer tool Draw a layer box in the center of the Program window approximately 2 in x 2 in 5 Select Preset Style 4 6 Set focus back to the Program window and type Shift A If the logo appears to sit high in the layer type Ctrl numpad 2 to bottom justify 7 Save this graphic as 1600 dko Assembling the Weather Graphic Your weather graphic will consist of 3 text layers 1 logo layer and a background The logo layer has already been created in the previous sec
167. e details have other specific attributes Face Attributes Common to All Details e Hide click to hide detail from view This is useful when setting up a look with multiple details to distinguish one from another e Shader shows a sample swatch of the current Shader Setting for face e Blur sets a blur adjustment on the selected detail from 0 no blur to 100 Edge Attributes e Shape defines the shape of the blur edges either round or square e Type there are four types of fill Outer borders the outer edge of the previous detail Inner borders the inner edge of the previous detail Border fills the outer and inner edge of the previous detail Filled fills a solid edge placed behind the previous detail AAAA Outer Inner Border Filled e Size the width of the edge from 0 no edge to 100 Deko Training FACE Shader l Hide oly EDGE Shader rie B Blur Shape oie Type Size filed I e Type and Modify Text 4 15 Shadow Attributes Underline Attributes Frame Attributes SHADOW Shader Angle sets the angle of the shadow in degrees l Hide Type there are two types of shadows Blur Angle Drop creates a single shadow of the detail being shadowed 3 nas a al al Deep creates a thick shadow that appears to be extruded Type Distance A F Drop Deep Distance controls the distance of the sh
168. e eak ey CA els naaraan an sccm sucess east wees tesctmatns este EE E 6 2 Fee TO 0 PORTIONS E EE E E A I ON E EREA EREE PEREA EEE S AA E A cate le E nica ace E EEEE E 6 3 TIS NS OM O A A O EEE NEE AONE OE 6 5 ASPE CR O N GAP OO EE A A A E TTT OL TeATeoPe TT Meera 6 5 Sgae ysr Rece O11 aol PEE aa O ce verre roe orern pene Ret ee 6 5 Recomnraded PCAC HCC saa oe as aa a ae re ate ee aan Naas A 6 6 Princino Trec Iiae DORO sass pias a A N T Gilet Dice oe hata chss asd 6 7 Exercises Crea no an OES GaN Css asap cea setae chai ses totdats deve O A AA 6 8 OPENBARE AEREE EOE E 6 8 Faset GAP iC osososan a ina aA E E E E EEEE OAE 6 9 Deioea ext ayer and Add a CAPO inpia A Oaa 6 10 pave Gtaphic asa Tarea Pile for Exports ator tron n E O E Mauseweuidetaast 6 11 Pxercise Creatine a Lower third with a oticky Textile eisein e a ceta AN ha duiae 6 11 Exercise Cranio a Lower thid witha Sucky TENUTE rina tote OA 6 12 Soh nese bogie E aE AEE E E A A E E A TET E T TT E cree rer ne rere 6 14 To Open the Chron Import WndoWresstio hi o Enna C TN TOS 6 14 Todmpoita Chiron Message Wile ns scsccssctesasssstescsce anon A A N TAT NAA ERA 6 14 To Mapa Chyron Bitmap Font onto True Type Fontianeaenmnitinin on i AA ERARE 6 15 To Save the Current Font Mapping File for Future Deko SessionSs ssesssseesrseesesrersererrerrrrrrrrereresrsesesess 6 16 TO Open a Ont Napp US Tie o a R A N AR 6 17 To Convert a Chyron Loco Font inte a Custom Wy peta ce i oes erse kerene eniin i iS
169. e erae 6 18 Lesson 7 Creating and Using Custom Typefaces sssssessesesecesesccosseecossecceseseoeseeecossescosseeeeseseeeses 7 1 Sais Fo a0 E IEOS A reir ere a mR n era 7 1 Crea Woks Cojen LETI S renee ere ar ere ee errr eere mre Ire mney Mer rerr ec TRE rT Tern Terme rer ere cere tem 7 1 Exercise Bulda Weather Ga pte stan ceded shad hase A TA E beacon Nata OO R 2 exercise DUCT AN cather ra P Ei aaa A A AANA OOTO OO ON ORAU OOOO es lapon WCAC tLe OS iver ssiwtiet irnia a IAO ENO OTOOTO O ONO 7 3 Wisin ax Custo Iy PCAC arri EEEE A E A dashes ddcats lets TEOS 7 5 ASM line tie WW ea DOEA p I C Er A AT T A TOA 7 5 a aA Oksciqullgon sacl ele EAEN eee I evr AE Com NY Ney O NUE nT E ot nr OE 7 7 G ey boardoborrcats Tort cagel ey DO Sag a TRC ere errr er errcr em error for O 7 8 Lesson 8 Baseline Editing Typing ona Curve sciscccctesawssveveseaseshsscsssaisaeesaseveselaiasevesaddeosicnascesens 8 1 Base live Fite Wy Tala DA ssisest a sicces viae ess wace T eae eA at eee 8 1 Dravi Baseline SEO MIC ILS aie ian a T N 8 1 Recan leor EUD Gist Secats A E E A O T uaiumseevancnstauesdes 8 2 APP DAS ra TEE EET T TT ETTET OTOR 8 2 ICT ASCNINGS E A cee sab A A E T yas T asta ates A A E 8 2 Peete Ot A Eo ir A oT e A E A E S E AN E A AE A E E 8 2 Rere e DCO ea E E AAA A E A E A E O 8 2 Gl oes ai croad TPE TON asn anon PMT ACMI OOO EOE EAE E TO O O eT een ee 8 3 Bezet CYO RO A ar D ET aR TD dDty ONS ORD ECSU a PRT ont TERROR RAIS OT Tana RI rd RnR aR AR TE
170. e layer and the Scale tool is selected the mouse works exactly as it does with the Move tool selected e When the cursor is placed next to a bounding outline the crosshair cursor appears Dragging the mouse will move the text Try it e When placing the mouse near one of the selection handles the pointer becomes a scaling tool and dragging the text will scale it Notice that the text size and width attributes change in the Style window om a amp e Hold down the Alt key and press the arrow keys Notice the text does not move but rather changes in size Also notice the scaling attributes change in the Font Style window Type Ctrl Spacebar to change the settings between Course and Fine when making the adjustments Press and hold Ctrl down when you drag to preserve aspect ratio Deko Training 5 8 Working with Layers and Tabs To Scale a Layer 1 Click on the Scale tool in the Tool window or type Ctrl W FAK Scale 2 Select the layer 3 Position the pointer over a handle on any side or corner of the layer so that the pointer becomes a scaling tool a ac Is te Transform H Scale Y Scale 4 Drag to scale the layer Notice that when you scale a layer the size and width indicators for the font do not change within the Style nd Rotation Skew window gt Press and hold Ctrl when you drag a corner to retain the Layer H Origin Origin aspect ratio 5 Click on the Layer window and click the More but
171. e second gtraphic s background is discarded for the first Deko Training 5 26 Working with Layers and Tabs Converting Layers to Background Sometimes it is desirable to lock down all layers permanently to a background To do this go to Choose Layers gt Layers to Background Note Deko copies the layers and combines them with the background The original layers remain until you clear them out with Edit gt Clear Layers or F8 Combining Text Across Many Layers It is also possible to combine the contents of two or more text layers into a single layer To do this 1 Select the text within the layers you wish to combine Hold Ctrl and drag the mouse to select the desired text within each layer 2 Goto Layer gt Text to Field Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 27 Exercise Making a Full Screen Slate In this lesson you will create a s ate a CG page suitable for presenting bullet points to support an interview or an investigative report The background for a slate can be a uniform color a ramped color or a graphic file Typically the bullet points on a slate are brought up one by one either from the Deko or from a still store If the images are brought up from a still store you have no choice but to save them as multiple graphics one for each added bullet point However if the images are brought up from a Deko then you can save a single copy and use a layer based transition to bring it on screen
172. e style you wish to use for the roll You can of course use as o i Exchange Up many different styles as you want though usually rolls are all one Bren anne Goan typeface in several sizes Text to Field Testo Pintle peds 3 Select the Program window and go to Text gt Vertical Scrolling A check eee mark will appear indicating that it is enabled Lower Case Capitalize Horizontal Scrolling A vertical scroll appears on the Program window to allow you to move Vertical Scrolling through the roll file word Wrap Vertical Scroll bar Deko Training 9 8 Creating Sequences and Effects 4 Type in the roll text Put in about ten lines of text separated by blank lines If you can t think of anything else use this example Writer Insert your name here Producer Insert your name here Camera Insert your name 4 or 5 more lines Note If you want your credits to roll off the screen when complete enter several carriage returns after the last line of text This will increase the vertical length of the roll page and provide a blank screen on ait when the credit roll finishes 5 Save the file to the hard drive SK F12 FAK Save File 6 Bring up the Sequence layout SK F11 FAK Seq Edit If there is already an open Sequence window clear it Activate the window then go to Sequence gt Clear Sequence 7 Fallin the fields for event 1 e Effect roll e File Name the file you saved e
173. e type of detail fill from among the five choices e Current Detail Color shows current color of selected detail e Color Space Selector chooses the current color space The choice will affect the view of the color picker palettes The choices are e RGB Red Green Blue color space Deko Training Type and Modify Text 4 19 e HSV Hue Saturation Value color space e Selected Component sets the component to be adjusted in the Selected Components bar e Unselected Component the large color palate display square displays the two remaining unselected components in a horizontal vertical grid In other words if as above Value is the Selected Component the square shows Hue along the vertical axis and Saturation along the horizontal axis If Opacity is the Selected Component Deko displays a gray scale in this square e Current Color shows the current color selected in the color picker The color is indicated in the picker by a crosshair marker at its position e Illegal Color Indicator if a color chosen is out of the legal range of NTSC colors the z egal color indicator will turn red Clicking on the indicator will move the color to the nearest legal color e Eye Dropper Tool allows the selection of a color from anywhere on the desktop To capture a color hold the mouse button down and drag it over the desired color then release it The color will be deposited in the current color selection
174. e video shows through the background when you use a keyer When the background is on the background shader determines its color Like all FXDeko shaders the background can be a solid color a ramp or a texture bandwidth In terms of signal frequency the range between the lowest and the highest frequencies used to transmit a signal from one site to another Bandwidth is a measure of an analog signal and is measured in cycles per second Contemporary units are Hertz one cycle equals one Hertz 1 In video systems bandwidth is specified as the highest frequency value because all video systems must transmit frequencies down to 30 Hz or lower The greater the bandwidth the more information is carried and the higher the potential resolution of images In television bandwidth is usually expressed in MHz 2 With digital codec specifications bandwidth is represented by the number of bits of information that can be transmitted per second or bps High bandwidth codecs can have bandwidths between 768 Kbps thousand bits per second and 45 Mbps million bits per second Low bandwidth codecs range between 56 Kbps and 384 Kbps baud Commonly used unit of transmission speed to describe the rate at which binary data is communicated One baud is approximately equal to one bit per second Common baud rates are 300 1200 and 2400 bps bits per second Bernoulli Devices A medium high capacity disk storage medium used
175. e window next to V Offset to allow the vertical offset numbers to advance Release the keys periodically to see if you can see the graphic begin to appear in the window Advance the numbers to about 34 Adjust to fine tune the position of the background correctly under the text layer Replace AutoScale Group Opacity tester z100 H Scale Y Scale oo 100 H Offset Y Offset DE 10 The background is now a texture in the rectangle layer that can be z positioned like any other object in the graphic Select all of the layers H Alignment Alignment Shift Ctrl L 11 Select the Move tool and reposition the layers in the graphic Alt Up Arrow key The background element will move with the text layers h Deko Training 6 14 Working With File Imports Chyron Import The Chyron Import option gives you the ability to read Chyron Infinit family files and work with them in the Deko environment The members of the Infinite family include Maxine Max Winfinit and Infinit These files come in two flavors Message Message directories contain message and RGBA RGB plus Alpha Channel files that Deko can read into a Program or Preview window These files usually refer to fonts which you can associate with True Type fonts for viewing and editing within Deko Machine Machine directories contain logo font files that Deko can convert into Deko custom typeface fac files To Open the Chyron Import
176. eRe TEEN TPR A mere re I ENE 10 25 How Can I Increase the Decree f Rotation Beyond 500 ichastsaeniieie onan iai 10 25 What Happens When I define an Object as a Word or ROW siiccncntininnnn eid anirhbbnusnsdnes 10 25 Runa Moton thar Deines Home Postion ssrorece c iena AA a TA ees 10 25 SOUCY ses Siesta aa naa A E AARIA ROA ERA AETA O 10 26 Lesson I Usine MACOS eckoucacisakia iiini on nos Van E EEEE EE EEEE EEE AA 11 1 Usine the Nae OEREO eE a E E A NVN NO AEAEE 11 1 IRCCOlC Mora NING Osha eo seen rete unrated E E uuu TI 1 Pe EAER E ANE a E OAOE E EA 11 3 BRO 1 O AVA at 8 waht ta cate data ni enoar I ted adie COTAN a a a o ano tna 11 5 Loops nate Mave havo akc vr MMe rae E E ONCE ONTO CRIT O CTO TEEN MET Tere ern re enero 11 5 prssiouine Macros tO tie Tresc tN ao e ena E O O E ideal dele alias bated calasatnsseaneu cues 11 7 Exerce build a Serve Lndicator Malossin E E E OEE EE 11 9 RE E gt Coss 6 er 8 cyan E A A E E EEEE 11 11 EU IN A OO ON E EEEE EE E E scence EE EE E EREA TAE EEA A EE E A AEN 11 11 Exercise Review and Run a Directory Select MaACiO ssissisesisisi siiani aiarra eoii E A E A 11 12 Erec MSS IACI O iesastts Geasstts cosestes a T AEA E N 11 13 Deko Training viii Contents Lessond2 Creatine Clocks and TIMES ceenie iene lade usvelantoesataatiusadansiosamnestoaaneoocoaaanssess 12 1 CCA OC OCG Fae EE soars I NA A A lowest A E T 12 1 E C ONG a de a E E E OT 12 1 Isera COC A ATA OIC enoporasoonijaanona nononono E EN
177. ecial steps mark the file as scrolling and transition it on with the roll or crawl Unlike rolls crawls always have smooth motion The limitation with rolls is due to the interlaced nature of video which only effects vertical motion Deko crawls can be in any typeface or mixture of typefaces The vertical position of the crawl can be easily adjusted You can even have up to four different crawl lines each going at a different speed Step by Step Create and Run a Crawl 1 Switch the menu layout to Style Edit and click on the Program window to give it focus then clear the program window 2 Goto Text gt Horizontal Scrolling Alt T gt H A horizontal scroll bar appears at the bottom of the Program window This control allows you to move back and forward in the crawl file jay Untitled Program Horizontal Scroll Bar Justify Center Aow Exchange Up Exchange Down errta Rreld Test to Mutme Belde Upper Case Lower Caze Capitalize Horizontal Scrolling Vertical Scrolling Word Wrap 3 Type in your text Enter whatever text you like in whatever style or mixture of styles you like It is important to enter all the text on a single line do not press the Enter key If you need inspiration you can use the following text State lottery officials announced today that today s 20 Million jackpot was won by your name here In an unprecedented announcement officials stated that not only today s jac
178. ed the F1 F12 keys access the functions engraved on the keycaps which mirror Deko text bar functions When the box is unchecked the keys function as on a standard Deko keyboard Enable FAK Numeric Keypad To enable the FastAction numeric keypad 1 Goto Options gt Preferences gt Common 2 Under Keyboard click Enhanced 3 Click OK or press Enter Note Once enabled the numeric keypad provides FastAction access to reading files To quickly recall graphics with numerical filenames type the filename on the keypad and press Read The display shows the filename as it is being typed and advances to the sequential file when you press Read The keyboard will display an alphanumeric filename but only numeric filenames can be entered on the numeric keypad To read in any filename press Clear to clear the display then press Read In the Open dialog box type or double click on the filename Deko Training Lesson 15 SportsWare and Pops The SportsWare option includes two powerful features to enhance fast track character generation Pops and Macro Autoplay Macros were discussed in Lesson 11 In this lesson we will learn how to create and apply Pops About Pops The Pops feature allows you to create and pop a text selection onto an open graphic These text selections are saved as text files or as special graphic files which you can use like any other graphic file You can even specify pop files including text txt files
179. eko Unshaper Card Information Deko s graphics are composited over external video by a linear keyer The compositing can be done internally using Deko s integrated downstream keyer or externally typically through a switcher Deko s internal keyer always composites anti aliased graphics properly smoothly blending the graphic into the background with no disturbing artifacts External keying can also be done cleanly However an improperly configured system can lead to unsatisfactory results including black fringes and saw tooth patterns surrounding the graphic An improperly configured system will also cause the fill to look like it is disappearing too quickly during a dissolve An external switcher requires two signals to properly composite an anti aliased graphic the key sional and the video fill The key signal is also known as the alpha channel In addition to cutting a hole for the graphic it carries the anti aliasing and transparency information The video fill contains the actual RGB content of the graphic The keyer uses the key signal to control the blending between the video fill and the background video Keyers use one of two algorithms for blending the video fill with the background video A shaped keyer also known as a narrow or half blending keyer expects the input video fill to be anti aliased over a black background prior to processing An unshaped keyer uses the linear key signal to control a dissolve between the two video si
180. ength and size The Effect Layout The Effects window allows you to play effects maintaining random access to any graphic in a directory The Effects layout allows you to build and play single effects Use this layout when your playout of graphics is not an orderly sequence You can also use the effects layout to save effects that can be embedded within a graphic file Embedded effects will playback whenever a graphic is opened up in the preview window De Papiri eae Jn Sm Tsa F TLEL ee Phib FO TMELU iene hitma Lins Hones mtn fl ar mt The Effects layout looks similar to the Sequence layout with a Preview window left Program window right and Effect window bottom Deko Training 9 16 Creating Sequences and Effects 2T Untitled Effect OP x Channel Effect Layers Rate Units AmA Options Motion Hold The Effect Window The effect window is also similar in function to the sequence window Rather than have sequential events with data fields the Effect window shows data field for one effect To create a single effect and play to the current graphic 1 Open the Effect layout Shift F11 2 Activate the Effect window 3 Enter the necessary information in the Effect window data fields e Channel the channel for playback output you can leave this blank e Effect the menus are identical to those shown in the sequence window e Layers the graphic element e g
181. ept its output may not made available to air depending on how many channels are in the system Style Window The Style window is used to define the Style attributes of Text and Graphic elements The Style window provides an interface to change Graphic Font Look and Layer attributes Pressing the associated button at the top of the window accesses each attribute control The attributes are e Font provides font formatting attributes such as size width kerning and leading e Look allows the addition of detail elements such as face edge shadow underline and frame e Layer sets layer attributes such as word wrap scaling and layer justification e Graphic allows you to link effects files and clips if you have the ClipDeko option with associated graphics Shader Window The Shader window is used in conjunction with the Style window to modify the look of the various details There are six shaders available for adjusting the look of a font or graphic element They are e Face Shader e Edge Shader e Shadow Shader Deko Training 4 4 Type and Modify Text e Underline Shader e Frame Shader e Background Shader Clicking on the appropriate Shader button on the Text bar can access each Shader Note If the current selection does not have a particular detail clicking on a Text bar Shader button will add one If the current selection already has that detail clicking on the Shader button will delete it The Shader w
182. er operating system and a peripheral device such as a CD ROM drive videodisc player computer printer or other device DVE Digital Video Effects Used to manipulate video images fly in squeeze room rotate spin DVE effects have been exclusively in the high end video production domain until recently when low cost extension boards have become available to accomplish these effects on the Macintosh and other PCs event One element of a sequence or motion In a sequence an event describes the playback of a single graphic file using an effect In a motion an event describes the movement on or off air of some element of a graphic eyedropper A button used to pick colors from anywhere on the desktop It is located in the Shader window on the color picker Deko Training G 8 Glossary fade The gradual increase or decrease in the video level of the picture In other words the picture emerges from black or recedes into black field 1 A video term signifying one half of one television frame In NTSC television broadcast each frame image is made up of 525 lines Two 262 5 horizontal line fields equal one frame Each field represents either the even or the odd lines of a complete frame A scanning system that uses even odd field pairs is defined as interlace scanning A field equals one half of a complete television scanning cycle 1 60 of a second NTSC 1 50 of a second PAL SECAM When interlaced two fields com
183. er select style preset render Select style preset 1 You should see the display as in the figure above 2 Modify the macro to appear as below m Untitled klacro _ oy x num 4 assign 1 to user variable num a select style preset num select preset style 1 view show program select program window letter letter letter letter type Deko om T text cursor nearest 156 96 164 35 position cursor on text select word select the word Deko loop F perform the following steps 7 times Snum 1 add 1 to num render wait for the graphic to render select style preset num select the next preset style end end the loop 4 Fl g In the above example you will see the user defined variable num and the loop command The comments appear after hash symbol to show what each line of the macro does These are not necessary for the program to work but are included for future reference Click on the green macro play button to perform the macro Note num was used to indicate a number in the above example it is good practice to use a name that describes what the variable does For example name if you want to enter a name loc or location for entering a location Deko Training Using Macros 11 7 Assigning Macros to the Preset Macro Key For repetitive tasks you can create a macro and assign it to the Preset Macro key To access functions assigned to this key hold down the Preset Macro ke
184. es in the Animation sequence 11 Choose CAP Options LOGOO00 TGA e Forward Backward specifies which direction the animation will play e Oscillate reverses direction of the animation each time it plays e Continuous plays cel animation through any pause in the motion Automatically puts a pause at the end of the motion so the animation continues when the motion ends e Rate the rate of animation playback in frames per second Deko Training 17 14 Other Options Setting Up the Animation File to Play 1 Open the graphic that includes the CAP shader in the Preview window Motion Layer Channel Clear Motion 2 Activate the Motion window If necessary go to Motion gt Clear Motion insert action Insert to restore default settings to the Motion window Delete action Delete 3 Click the second default motion descriptor to select it from the script list on the left hand side of the Motion window 4 Click the arrow next to the Object dropdown menu and select Layer from the drop down menu 5 Enter the layer number of the layer that contains the CAP shader in the Layer number text box 6 Uncheck opacity from the effects parameter list 7 To view the cel animation play the motion or if you have the Timeline option scrub through the timeline Keep Animation Playing To keep a cel animation playing once a motion ends in the Shader window under CAP shader options select Continuous Deko auto
185. ess Play The Smooth Roll Playback Warning will appear Smooth Roll Playback Adjustment WARNING At the selected duration this roll will exhibit interlace artitacts Deko can adjust the rate of the roll or the space between rows to minimize the problem Or choose Ignore to run at the current rate Roll adjustment Increase duration to 5 838 seconds ncrease all row spacing by 13 0 lines Decrease all row spacing by 9 6 lines Increase blank row spacing by 33 3 lines Decrease blank row spacing by 16 8 lines Ignore Deko Training Creating Sequences and Effects The values you see in the window depend on the number of lines in your roll and the font size and leading Generally you will want to adjust the line spacing rather than the overall time Once you decide whether you d like to adjust duration or line spacing choose OK If you adjusted line spacing a Save As window will appear asking that you save these changes either over the original file or to a new file Insert the File Name into the highlighted field and choose OK If you saved as a new file the updated name will appear in your sequence Go to the Sequencer and change your rate of time to 7 seconds The Smooth Roll Playback Adjustment dialog box appears again Specify your change in either duration or line spacing Choose OK and re save the existing graphic over the original if you chose to change the line spacing Play the sequence
186. ession technique supported by the PDF file format Like LZW ZIP compression is most effective for images that contain large areas of single color Aspect Ratio and Graphic Size Square vs Rectangular Pixels All Windows and Macintosh based computer systems use square pixels to create bitmapped images A common frame sized used in multimedia applications has a screen area of 640 x 480 pixels This 4 x 3 aspect ratio the ratio of screen width to screen height mirrors the aspect ratio of a television system at very close to the same resolution Both PAL and NTSC television systems use rectangular pixels In NTSC the aspect ratio is 4 x 3 as well however this aspect ratio has a pixel dimension of 720 x 486 pixels If you create a graphic sized at 640 x 480 Example 1 on a computer graphics system and display it on a video output The image will not fill the screen correctly and will be geometrically distorted because the square pixels from the computer output will be squeezed into rectangular shapes making objects appear slightly thinner and taller than they actually are This is especially noticeable with symmetrical shapes such as circles and squares Example 1 Deko Training 6 6 Working With File Imports el PPD AE ae Poe If you create an image on a computer program with an image size of 720 x 486 Example 2 and bring display it on a video output the image will fill the screen but will still be geometrically di
187. ey Inserting one image over a background of a second image Allows you to eliminate predetermined objects from one scene and put what is left within a second scene by cutting a hole in a background and filling the hole with an image or text Chroma key uses color rather than luminance to trigger the key chrominance The signals used in image reproduction systems that represent the color components of the image A black and white image has a chrominance value of zero clipboard The Windows NT temporary holding area for text or other data that has been cut or copied from an FXDeko graphic macro style or sequence When you cut or copy a selection it replaces any previous contents of the clipboard When you paste you are pasting the contents of the clipboard You can paste multiple times without re cutting or re copying The contents of the clipboard remain the same until you cut or copy something different Since most Windows NT applications support the clipboard it is possible to cut and copy a selection from one Windows NT application a word processor or a spreadsheet program for example and paste it into another Windows NT application coaxial cable COAX A one conductor one ground cable which can carry a wide range of frequencies up to 1 000 feet with little or no signal loss Coax is primary means of equipment interconnection for video devices color bars An electronically generated signal consisting of red blu
188. g Timeline Motions 8 Do the same for Y Scale but follow the tip below Then Scrub to preview and save the Motion Tip Copy and Paste Function Values of a Point can be copied and pasted for use within the same Parameter Rather than creating details of a point from scratch click on X Scale and Copy Ctrl C then click on Y Scale and Paste Ctrl V This will apply those same values Congratulations on successfully building your Motion Your results should match the sample sequence 100 seq Continue on to explore more advanced techniques Edit a DVE Effect The Timeline interface offers a large list of DVE Effects to apply to an Action From this list you can customize and edit the Parameters of a chosen Effect 1 Click once on the top Background Action In Effect change from Tiles to Page Turn and click on the Edit button to open the DVE Effect Editor shown below DYE Effect Editor Parameter List Type Page Tum Farameter Edit Number of waves Edit Slider Template Lawes Open Save 2 There are many Parameters that can be edited and saved into a Template Select Number of Waves Deko Training 3 4 Understanding Timeline Motions 10 17 Click hold and drag the Edit slider to the right Set the value for 5 waves and click OK Scrub to preview the new Effect Create an Absolute Motion Path In the start of this lesson we mentioned the Timeline s ability to begin and end Motions in a
189. g on a Curve Deko provides many tools for text formatting including moving scaling rotation skewing kerning and leading For precise placement of text to match details of a specific image such as an imported logo the tool best used is called Baseline Edit Baseline Edit Window To activate the Baseline Edit window do one of the following e From the Layer menu choose Edit Baseline to activate the Baseline Edit window e If the Baseline Edit window is open but not active check Baseline Edit in the Window menu Drawing Baseline Segments To draw a curved baseline 1 Select the layer whose baseline you wish to modify 2 Activate the Baseline Edit window 3 Do one of the following e Inthe Baseline menu check Draw Curve e Click the curve drawing tool button in the Tools window e Position the drawing tool where you will begin the curve and drag the mouse to draw the curve To draw a line segment baseline 4 Select the layer whose baseline you wish to modify 5 Activate the Baseline Edit window 6 Do one of the following e Inthe Baseline menu check Draw Curve e Click the drawing tool button in the Tools window 7 Click to begin the line then move the line tool to the desired end point and click again Repeat this step as desired to draw multiple line segments 8 To break the line move the cursor out of the Baseline Edit window Deko Training 8 2 Creating and Using Custom Typefaces Re
190. gnals The following diagram illustrates both the fill and key for one scan line of an antt aliased white letter Unshaped fill Shaped fill Unshaped key Shaped key Note The key signal is the same for both unshaped and shaped video Unshaped fill is always full value when the key is non zero Shaped fill is always less than or equal to the level of the key The shaped fill of a white character is identical to its key signal Deko Training A 12 Appendix Without getting too technical an unshaped keyer does a crossfade between the fill and background sional It applies the mathematical formula to do the keying F K B 1 K where F Fill B Background and K Key A shaped keyer applies the formula F B 1 K The standard Deko produces shaped video Shaped video has many technical advantages less processing is required for multi layered compositing it looks good on a monitor and it avoids nasty filtering problems during D to A conversion and encoding If your keyer does not handle shaped keying the Deko Unshaper module is required The following table shows some of the terms used to refer to the two keying algorithms along with the equipment manufacturers who use them Algorithms Manufacturer Shaped Unshaped Deko Products Tektronix GVG Additive Multiplicative Narrow Wide Half Blended Full Blended Matrox Aston Mode Non Aston Mode BVS Attenuated Fill Non Attenuated Fill One Legged Two Legged Add Linear BTS
191. gram window on the right and the Sequence window at the bottom center of the screen The Sequence Window E Untitled Sequence i Es Event Control Time Effect Options Layers File Name Browse Rate Units In Time Out Time AmA i ___ seconds xf ooo i P es Ee ee t seconds xf Sf id i EmN __ seconds f Sooo Sfat Fit JL Td ef The Sequence window opens with a view of 6 event rows you can resize the window to show more events per view There are 10 data fields in each event for the user to control playback of graphics To Create a Sequence 1 Open the Sequence layout SK F11 FAK Seq Edit 2 Activate the Sequence window 3 If there are events in the Sequence window and you wish to clear them go to Sequence gt Clear Sequence 4 Use the Tab or arrow keys to move to the data fields and enter necessary information for each field Shift Tab will move in a backward direction 5 When you have finished setting up the first event continue entering events until your sequence is complete 6 Making sure the Sequence window is active save the sequence using Save File on the FAK or F12 on the SK Deko Training Creating Sequences and Effects Data Fields Control Field The Control field determines how events will sequence one after another Click on the down arrow in the Control window for an event to reveal a menu then choose the desired control the controls are e blank field no contro
192. gs Macro This Macro will record all software and hardware settings and preferences as defined by the user into the Macro Edit window A Deko operator who begins new work on a fresh Deko system can restore all of their preferred settings by running this Macro as a one time process Save the Settings once and they will restore each time the Deko is powered up We will record 3 commands and save as one Macro file for playback on a new Deko system learn preference Records all settings enabled in the Options Preferences menu such as Starting Layout Prompt options Current Directory Cursor Style and other options learn settings Records all software settings such as Preset Macro assignments Preset Style and Shader options and other options Caution Running the learn hardware command will affect I O settings that may have already been established by technical staff Be sure you have proper permissions before modifying the hardware settings To Create my_settings mcr 1 From Style Edit layout open the Macro Edit window SK F2 FAK Macro Edit 2 Click on the Macro record button to enable the Macro recorder The button will turn pink to indicate record If asked if you wish to clear the Macro window before recording select yes 3 Inthe Command Bar type the following 3 commands separated by a semicolon learn settings learn preference Be sure to include a Space between learn and
193. h a keyer tells the keyer how to combine two video signals FXDeko outputs both a full color video output and a black and white key signal Let s say you re keying FXDeko graphics over live video from a camera You feed the video and key outputs from FXDeko to a keyer which could be FXDeko s own internal keyer and also the camera output Where the key signal is white the keyer inserts FXDeko s output the fill sional Where the key signal is black the keyer inserts the camera output the key signal Where the key signal is gray somewhere between black and white the keyer mixes the FXDeko and camera outputs keyhole shader A shader that cuts through all elements behind a detail to show keyed video on the detail Deko Training Glossary G 11 Kilobyte KB One thousand bytes or characters of digital information consisting of from six to eight bits In reality one kilobyte equals 1024 bytes of information layer A layer is one element of a FXDeko graphic A layer is either a text layer a rectangle layer or an ellipse layer A graphic can have any number of layers Layers are rendered from front to back layer browser Shows a thumbnail image of each layer in the current graphic and displays the layer s name and order Type the first one or two letters of the layer name to jump to that layer s thumbnail You can click a thumbnail to select a layer or reorder layers by dragging and dropping them w
194. h as an edit controller are used to trigger functions on another device such as FXDeko To connect a GPI trigger connect the triggering device to COM port 1 To enable GPI triggering 1 Connect the triggering device then restart FXDeko 2 Activate the Sequence window F11 3 Go to Sequence gt GPI Settings 4 Inthe GPI Trigger Settings dialog box check GPI Enabled enter the COM port name such as COM1 and then choose OK Deko Training Appendix A 15 Controlling a Thunder Server from FXDeko Before you begin Controlling Multiple Channels For each channel you wish to control remotely both the Thunder and FXDeko procedures must be repeated For example if you wish to control two channels of Thunder from the FXDeko you will need to have two entries in Thunder s Protocol Setup Window and two clip servers set up on the FXDeko A Word about Media ID Numbers Controlling Thunder from a remote location requires the operator to know the media ID number for the desired clip This is a separate number from the clip s database number the number appearing below the picon in the Thunder database The Media ID number is formatted as the workspace number an underscore and the clip s original database number In most situations the workspace number will be 0 Workspaces are a function of the Security Administration option and Thunder systems without this option always use the default workspace which is 0
195. hat the text leaves the boundaries of the layer outline To Skew Selected Text 1 Click on the Rotate button or type Ctrl R 2 Position the pointer over the top right corner handle of the selected text so the pointer becomes a skew tool GP Drag to skew the text Again notice in the Style window the change in the skew setting Note You can change Rotate and Skew settings for selected text by Rotation Skew entering numerical values in the Rotation and Skew fields in the Style E B5 window i i Rotate and Skew a Layer If a layer is selected it can be rotated and or skewed using the Rotate Skew tool as with selected text The procedure is the same but the object rotated is a layer with all of its contents As with Scale changing Rotate or Skew parameters to a layer will apply attributes to the layer rather than to the text t g A a ua Deko Training 5 10 Working with Layers and Tabs Justifying Text and Layers Deko provides tools for simplifying the justification of text Three tools on the toolbar provide reveal menus for justifying text Keyboard shortcuts are available as well Text can be justified within ayer boundaries or you can justify a layer relative to safe title marker boundaries indicated by a red dotted line in the graphic window iw 4 a Lett Top el B Center Center fe 2 Righ Bottom ag Full mij Cancel E23 Spread ae Justify Grid a ema
196. he layer Fillin Some Text on Your Layers Before Setting a Background 1 Select the Title layer and type in a short title 2 Select the Body layer and type in several lines of text to illustrate your body Keep the bullet points within one line and enter an extra return in between lines to space the text out Enter five bullet points Highly skilled deko worker Quick learner Motivated for challenging tasks Talented and creative Work well with others Convert Body Text Layer into Multiple Layers A bulleted slate works best if each bullet point is a separate layer It is often easier to type in all the bullets in to one layer and convert them into multiple layers Justify Center Row Exchange Up Exchange Down Test to Field Test to Multiple Fielda 1 Select all of the text in the body text layer Shift Ctrl A 2 Once all the text is selected go to Text gt Text to Multiple Fields This will take the single selected text layer and break it into five Upper Case distinct text layers each a separate layer in the graphic Lower Case Capitalize Note avoid dragging the layers with the mouse to adjust layer spacing This can produce unsatisfactory results ieat ie Vertical Scrolling Word Wrap Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 29 Add the First Bullet Point Work well with others From the Tools window select the ellipse tool Your cursor will change to indicate that it can
197. he saved Pop raj 1591 dkot Pe 2 Repeat this for the other four Style Pops 551 dko 575 dko 524 dko 509 dko Using Place Pops 1 Open the file training stocks dko 2 Read 700 dko Notice that the Place Pop appears in the lower right corner of the graphic MARKET CLOSINGS waas Tiria 239592 11 3 Deko Training 16 1 Lesson 16 Automation What is Automation Automation allows you to control your Deko Character Generator from another computer program Usually that program is running on a different computer and sending commands to the Deko through a serial line or a network connection But since Deko runs on a standard Windows NT platform the controlling program can also be run on the same computer as the Deko Traditionally CG automation interfaces have been used by newsroom automation systems such as Newstar Basys etc For example using these systems journalists and producers type in the names of people who appear in a news story Those names along with the name or ID number of a template are then sent over to the CG for display during that news item The template is a file created by the CG operator which picks the layout and style of the text The newsroom automation program that sends commands to the CG fills in the content With Deko you can move beyond newsroom automation and create simple custom interfaces for data entry and update The benefits are really quite amazing a custom interface run
198. he vertical dimension to fill the frame e No scaling Use this setting if you do not want any resizing of the image If you followed the described recommended practice just discussed this setting will work as well Deko Training 6 8 Exercise Creating an OTS Graphic Working With File Imports Very often the Over The Shoulder OTS graphic both with and without text is stored either in a paint system or in a still store device If these systems are networked to the Deko the graphic file can be loaded up as a background altered and then stored back out to the remote hard drive In this exercise you will open an OTS background with a rectangle left blank for a graphic insertion You will then insert the graphic and add a caption Finally you will save the completed graphic as a Targa file so it can be used with an external still store Open Background 1 Select the Style edit layout Altt F11 2 Activate the Program window If a graphic already exists clear the window 3 Press F9 SK or Clear Read FAK to open the Open File dialog box 4 Select Targa tga from List of File types 5 Select the file ots tga and click open The background image will open in the program window Notice the black rectangle in the upper left corner of the graphic This is where we will put our graphic Notice black rectangle This is where we will insert our graphic Upen File Hame ots tg badfb tg
199. ic hold the Ctrl key down and click on each Clear Background CtrleFS desired layer Clear Layers Fg Clear Selected Text Delete Note When you select multiple layers within the graphic a p us sign Select All Ctrl 4 will appear next to the cursor pointer Also note that while you have Select Field Shifts Ctrlach selected multiple layers the only indication that these layers have been Select Layers Shift Ctrl L selected will appear in the Layer Browser with each selected layer zlee Sle eale Select at Tab Shit Alt T highlighted Select Mare Ctrl F Ctrl click to select multiple layers Each selected is highlighted in blue Naming Layers Often it is advantageous to name layers If related layers are given related names the layers can be easily grouped using the wildcard symbol Example Lower Third low3 top text low3 bottom text low3 top banner low3 bottom banner low3 bug Example Leaderboard layout layer names as follow Column 1a Column 2a Column 3a Column 1b Column 2b Column 3b Column ic Column 2c Column 3c etc The advantage of using such a naming scheme is that it allows us to quickly group related layers when building effects and motions For example we could identify all the layers in Column 1 by notating Column 1 or all the layers in row one by notating Column a In lesson 10 you will learn Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 25 how to apply layer names to the Timeline Motion Comp
200. ic window click on the desired style so it is visible in the Current Style window 3 Right click on a Preset style button You can also pick up multiple styles from a graphic window and assign them all to preset style buttons To do this activate a graphic window Then choose Pick Presets from the Text menu Deko assigns each style in the graphic to a Preset Style To save a Preset Style window 4 Click on the window to activate it and go to File gt Save As or press F12 SK Save File FAK 5 Enter the name of the style and press Enter To open a Preset Style window 6 Click on the preset style window and go to File gt Open SK F9 FAK Clear Read 7 Navigate to the drive or folder holding the pst file you are looking for Click on it and click OK or press enter Deko Training Type and Modify Text 4 27 Saving a Pre Rendered Style Pre rendered styles occupy more disk space than a normal style file Pre rendered styles are indicated at the bottom of the Style Font window by a check next to Pre rendered Style and in the Preset Style window by an r in front of the typeface name To save a style as a pre rendered style File 1 Activate the Style window F6 Oper Read Revert Erei 2 Goto gt Render and Save Style o Hee o Ma Save Style Alt F12 3 When the Render and Save dialog box appears Save Style As S ave File navigate to the drive and directory you wish to store ea l Render and Save
201. ii Enter the name slate into the Name field of the Save As dialog and click OK The file will be saved as sSlate dko Highly skilled Deko worker Quick learner Motivated for challenging tasks Talented and creative Work well with others Your graphic should look something like this when complete Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 35 Setting Tab Stops Deko provides tab stop settings that can be applied to any layer If a layer has tab stops applied the bottom margin of the text layer will show indicators for tab positions As you tab to a tab stop a tab indicator will show in that position Tab indicators will only show if they are set to show in the Preference menu To verify this go to Options gt Preferences and click on the Markers tab Check the Tab stops check box to show them in a layer M Text field box M Tab stops Check Tab Stop on Markers tab of Preferences dialog to show tabs in text I Hard returns fields Set Tabs 1 Position the cursor in the text layer where you wish to insert the tab stop Text Justify 2 Choose Tab Set from the Text menu or Tab Set key on Center Row Exchange Up Exchange Down fertto Held errta Mone Helde FAK and select the type of tab from the drop down menu The choices are e Left Upper Case e Right Lower Case Use the keyboard shortcut Capitalize e Center Alt T then type T for Tab e Decimal Set and the underlined
202. iles txt C Chyron Y adjust en ae T Open as read only Enter a name for the mapping file in the File name field and then click Save The Save As dialog box disappears Click OK in the Chyron Import Details dialog box or press Enter Deko saves the font mapping file as a text txt file Deko Training Working With File Imports To Open a Font Mapping File 1 Inthe Chyron Import window click Details The Chyron Import Details dialog box appears E Chyron Import D MOODY WMESSAGE 0002 E MESSAGE Swiss 21 Bold Condensed TM Svr 21 BdOnQul BT 02 0251 Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TM Swis 21 BdCnOul BT 03 0252 Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TM Swis 21 BdCnOul BT O04 0253 Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TM Svis 21 BdCnOul BT 05 0254 Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TM Svas 21 Banu BT 06 0255 Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TM Swae 2 BdCnOul BT O7 0050 CANADIAN RATING SYSTEM 14 0051 MASTER CONTROL CLOCK 15 0080 CANADIAN RATING SYSTEM 16 0001 Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TM Swis 21 BdCnOul BT 2 In the Chyron Import Details dialog box click Open and then navigate to the mapping file 3 4 Chyron Import Details x Font Maps E Charles Dakley txt oe E Patrick ie Chris Mills txt Ralph Palmeiro txt E Jeff Rebbulet tat Roberto Alomar txt John Statks txt C Chyron Y adjust Filename AssocisteMap txt Len Files of type Map Files txt Cancel
203. iming format for Time of day HH MM SS HH MM or Countdown Countup HH MM SS HH MM MMM SSS SSS e Time Offset will set an offset for the time output from your system clock time useful for time zone shifts e Hour Format 12 Hour or 24 Hour display e Append AM PM Adds an AM or PM to 12 hour output e Keep leading zeros will keep the zero in place for times such as 01 25PM e Separators Choose colons semicolons or commas e Tenths display Countdown Countup timers only Insert a Clock in a Graphic farel aes Tae 1 Create a layer in your graphic for the clock or timer Horizontal Yertical Spread 4 ord OO wap Auto scaling C None C Scale to fit box Shrink to fit box Auto Update C Hone C String 2 Assign a preset style to the layer 3 Goto View gt Style Menu FAK Font or Look 4 Click on the Layer button to select the Layer view 5 Select the Clock button from the Auto Update section 6 Click on View Clocks to show the Clock List 7 Click on the up or down arrows from the ID window to select the x Clock correct clock ID The clock will Clack Type C Macro appear in the data field 9 33 Jee m m 2 1 00 00 Countdown ao a A h p T 2 3 ner 2 d ia Add Delete Config Start Note When choosing Countdown Countup timers you must click the Start button in the Clock List to begin the count Click Reset to reset the timer Note Fo
204. in step 11 16 Enable Z Rotate then Scrub to preview Deko Training Understanding Timeline Motions 10 19 Help Why Does My Program Output Disappear When I Scrub a Motion When you click and drag the Scrub Handle you enable what is called Scrub mode This puts the user into a place where the Program output is ignored for the sake of previewing the creation of a motion effect Scrub Handle Icon In the instance where the user does not have a graphic in the Program window then nothing is affected But in the case where there is a graphic in the Program window but there is no accommodating Program Action then the Program channel is ignored gt lla lal To disable Scrub Mode click once on the Scrub Handle Icon in the Timeline Toolbar Your program graphic will Play button reappear in the output monitor played My Motion From the Timeline Toolbar Where is My Preview Graphic When you play your Motion remember that Preview graphics will now appear in Program Press the Swap key SK F3 FAK Swap to transfer back from Program to Preview The Program graphic if there was one will disappear Deko Training 10 20 Understanding Timeline Motions Exercise Build a Slate Motion The previous steps helped you to build various motion paths In this exercise you will build a more advanced motion for the slate dko graphic right already created Lesson 5 page 34 Every layer has also been named Les
205. indow provides a choice from five fill sources for each Shader element e Color a solid color fill e Ramp a color gradient fill e Texture a graphic file that can be used as a texture fill e Keyhole a key cutout for external fill e CAP an option to allow fill from sequential animation files Tools Window The Tools window provides a palette of tools used in the creation of graphics Tools allow you to create text layers and graphic elements as well as move and alter their shapes Many of the tools have shortcut keys that you should memorize to speed your productivity Current Style Window The Current Style window provides a sample of the current style selection or the style at the current cursor position when Moving cursor sets font and look is selected in Options gt Preferences gt Cursor tab In the default mode the style is presented with an upper and a lower case Aa Preset Style Window The Preset Style window provides a swatch of eight styles that can be quickly used in graphics Users can assign their own preset styles to palettes and save these as pst extension files More than one Preset Style window may be opened on the screen at the same time Status Bar The Status bar provides useful information about the graphic in current view including cursor screen position layer selected layer position insert overwrite mode status and file size Command Bar The Command bar which you can select to vie
206. ion Click and drag the round Offset control to adjust Timing delay Exercise continued Continue the following steps to create a simple Timeline Motion If you ve already run the sample sequence jump to step 3 Open a Sample File into the Preview Window SK F9 FAK Read 1 Click once in the Preview window to set focus 2 Press Clear Read FAK or F9 SK 3 The directory path should read D Deko Tutorial If it does not change the directory path by double clicking the C directory and scroll down to the Deko folder Then double click the Deko folder to find the Tutorial sub folder 4 Click once on the file named 200 dko but do not press OK yet Deko Training 10 6 Understanding Timeline Motions 5 Take a look in the bottom of the Open dialog box You will see an area titled Fr info that displays important details of your graphic This contains a comment logged by the user while saving the file See Further Exploration for these steps File Mame 200 dko 100 dko 700 dko bqd200 dka bgdfbl dko List Files of Type ae Deks Graphics dkol File info OFf21 99 D220 76PM 157 437 Tonight on Che full screen slate Directories d dekostutorial Cancel Fase delecta Et Tutorial Drives Network T Joffe Options ii 6 Press OK to open a sample graphic in the Preview window and notice that the content of the graphic reflects the comment
207. ith any effect played on that graphic To Stop Clip Playback Do one of the following e From the Clip menu select Stop e Inthe Clip Editor click the Pause button under the thumbwheel e Clear the Program graphic T Deko Training Other Options 17 29 To Loop from In to Out 1 Inthe Clip Editor click the loop button under the thumbwheel 2 Specify number of times to loop in the box next to the Loop button A 3 Play the clip Using the Clip Browser Clips are organized alphabetically by clip name in the browser You can type a letter to jump forward ot backward through the browser alphabetically To Associate a Clip with a Graphic 1 Open the graphic 2 Open the Clip Browser and scroll through thumbnail images to find the clip Click the clip to select it 3 Do one of the following 4 Drag and drop the clip from the browser onto the graphic 5 Click the Link tool at the top of the browser then select the graphic file name from the list of available open graphics EA You can use the Undo Link tool at the top of the browser to break a link between a clip and a graphic Note When you associate a clip with a graphic ClipDeko will play the clip whenever you open the graphic in the Program window swap the graphic to the Program window or play and effect on the graphic To Rename a Clip Do one of the following e Inthe browser click the clip name to highlight it then click it again e C
208. ithin the browser layout The arrangement of windows and toolbars on the desktop FXDeko provides several pre configured layouts for composing editing and playing back graphics and macros leading The spacing between rows of text The higher the leading amount the more space there is between tows Leading rhymes with wedding linear A motion video or film sequence designed to be played from beginning to end without stops ot branching Linear usually refers to traditional video or films that are meant to be watched by the viewer passively from beginning to end without zteraction linear key signal A key signal that varies from black to white including intermediate gray shades This is in contrast no pun intended to a hard key signal which has areas of either black or white but no gray A linear key signal is required for keyed graphics to look properly anti aliased over background video Your switcher must be capable of handling linear key linear video Any video program which plays from start to finish with no variation in sequence or pace of information presented live Television that is transmitted as the event occurs look Deko parameters that control everything about the way a text character ooks colors edges shadows etc A look is made up of a list of details looping A video device switcher monitor etc that allows video inputs to pass through outputs to other devices without terminati
209. k on the icon of the found file to open your application Find Files named fxdeko exe_ FeDeko exe CAFD ekosbin 4 396 Application Deko Training 1 6 Verify and Configure Your Deko Verify Hardware Settings All Deko systems except PostDeko provide for video input and output to support live feed of character generator output for video production Depending on your model of Deko these settings may vary On the FX Deko these settings are made in two locations Verify Video Standard The first setting to verify is the video operating standard All versions of Deko can operate in either NTSC or PAL standards e To set the video standard minimize the Deko interface to reveal the Windows NT Desktop Right click on the Desktop and select Properties from the Shortcut menu Display Properties Prooerties e Select the Pinnacle tab from the dialog box Click on the Setup button in Configuration and verify the video Standard In the U S the standard is NTSC In most of Europe Australia Africa the Middle East and Latin America the standard is PAL Deko Training Verify and Configure Your Deko 1 7 Check Input Output Settings The Input Output settings are found under the Options gt Hardware Setting gt Analog I O Adjustments menu This menu reveals a four tab dialog box used to set the video Input Output feeds to the Deko Optio ne Hardware Settings Hel igen stan ana IO Status Tab The IO Status t
210. key C Deko Clip Full key Priority peko Wyver vided Epeka Undenvides and 2 0 pi gate entrance C Deko Input 1 Full key Deko Input 2 Keys mized C Deko Input 2 Full key C Deko Clip Keys mixed Pricrity Deko Over Video C Deko Under Video Channel Usage E ntitled Program Selections from this list will vary based on the current Channel Usage selected at the bottom of this window M Grab with key M Input video is shaped Grab Input 1 Digital Input 2 Digital Video Format Frogram Preview Dual Program To turn off Deko s built in keyer e Choose Deko only To turn on Deko s built in keyer e Choose Deko Input 1 or 2 Deko Training Channel Configuration 13 3 To view a Clip e Choose Deko Clip Keys mixed 4 Choose the type of key e Choose Keys mixed to view key signals for both the selected Video input and the Deko graphic e For example A DDR feeds Input 1 with an animated logo Deko provides a text crawl across the bottom lower third then sends this downstream for keying through the switcher e Choose Full key to avoid viewing an unwanted key signal from the selected video input e For example This would be typically selected when frame grabbing from a camera feed Frame Grabbing Note The internal keyer does not need to be on to perform a Frame Grab Connect an input video signal to Deko and optionally a key signal
211. kground Page Turn and a Layer Screen move However each Action performs at the same time Follow the next steps to set separate In and Out times for each Action Adjust Timing When you inserted a new Action in step 6 you may have noticed the addition of second Timing Bar This appeared because every Action has its own independent Timing control Again think of it as Choreography for a dance and each dancer has separate In and Out times during a performance Deko Training 10 10 Understanding Timeline Motions To adjust Timing Position J X Pasition bottom cs Effect Page Turn a ea Pry Y Position O Scale E3 if Edit O Scale erie Object OY Scale ayer 1 Pry E Layer M O xr a ai ET Tan tn Rattam Look for a light gray highlight to appear behind the Timing Bar and the corresponding Action This indicates correct selection Select the first top Timing Bar Click hold and drag the Out Point to the left By default a playback rate in seconds will display during selection of any In or Out point To change the Playback Rate or Units select the arrow next to either box Timeline Toolbar Playback Units of Rate Playback Seconds Frames Position Out Time for the first top Timing Bar at 1 10 Seconds Click hold and drag the In Point for the second bottom Timing Bar and position IN Time at 1 Second These will overlap slightly Scrub to preview Cre
212. kpot but also future jackpots would all be awarded to name Ticket sales are expected to decline in response to today s news Deko Training 9 12 Creating Sequences and Effects Notice how you can scroll back and forth through the text The appearance of the scroll bar changes to give you an idea the file length eT Untitled P x E EL Untitled Eroma sx Re position of Scroll bar iLY TO DAY SOJACKPOT BUT ALSO FUT a a 4 Save the file 5 Switch menu layout to sequence If necessary choose Clear sequence from the Sequence menu to clear out the current sequence 6 Pick crawl as the transition and either type in or Browse for the file name you just saved E untitled Sequence ie Es Event Control Time Effect Layers File Name Browse Rate Units In Time Dut Time alla i ES 5 5 CCCs _ W DO A E tC CTC CCd A He C W O EE yy me W A dee OTC 7 Set the crawl rate The default rate of 1 second per page is a little fast set it to between one quarter and one half pages per second 8 Select the text layer on the screen and use the Justify controls Ctrl Number pad to set the crawl to a lower third position 9 Press Alt Save File FAK or AlttF12 SK to save the graphic Note you can press Ctrl S to save the file with either keyboard Deko Training Creating Sequences and Effects 9 13 10 Set the crawl to play continuously Go to the Control field in
213. l The event starts playing as soon as the previous event is finished playing e pause waits for a GPI trigger right mouse click or Play Sequence Alt Control Enter or Play key on the FAK to continue playing e hold displays the first frame of the effect then waits for a trigger as described above before continuing e delay pauses the number of fields specified in the Time field before continuing e stop stops the sequence returning control to the user To resume playback press the Play key or pres Alt Enter e tcode starts the event playback based on input and output times using a time code reader If Deko does not detect time code it will trigger time code events based on the system clock e skip skips to the next event Use this if you wish to insert a comment in an event number e loop repeats subsequent event a specified number of times until an end is encountered e end specifies the end of the loop e goto skip to event number in Time field Time C The control variable field used with the delay loop and goto control selections Effect Field Click on the arrow in the field box to choose your desired effect Several effects in the menu have a reveal arrow that shows more choices The example to the right shows the second column reveal menu shows more choices in the third column The best way to learn effects is to begin to play with them to see what happens
214. l format as compact audio discs and some videodiscs CD ROMs can hold about 650 megabytes of data CD ROMs differ from regular prerecorded compact audio discs in the amount of additional error correction information encoded CD ROMS primarily are used for large data and graphic files but can play back standard audio Compact Discs as well CD ROM drive or player A device that retrieves data from a CD ROM disc Differs from a standard compact audio disc player by incorporating additional error correction circuitry Some models lack the necessary D A converter to play music from standard compact discs cel animation A series of graphic files Each file consists of one frame of the animation and may be of any graphic type that Deko can import tga bmp dib rle pcd pcx psd wmf jpg g dko or tif Files should be successively numbered such as globe001 tga globe002 tga globe003 tga etc You can play a cel animation within a Deko motion by applying the animation to a detail using a CAP Cel Animation Player shader character set A set of 256 characters in a TrueType or PostScript font A font may contain more than 256 characters but Windows NT can access only 256 at a time By choosing a character set you ate choosing which 256 characters you wish to use Not all character sets are supported by every font See Using an International Character Set Deko Training G 4 Glossary chroma See chrominance chroma k
215. l time Create a More Complex Motion 1 Inthe Effect section click on the arrow under Effect and select Page Turn 2 Inthe Parameter list click to enable Z Rotate The default degree of Rotation is 360 3 To change Rotation click and hold on the small red Bezier Point in the Graph then drag down to 180 4 For more accurate control double click in the Numerical Setting box on the Timeline Toolbar Enter 180 Scrub the effect to preview eS Crs IC el Jc Deko Training 10 8 10 11 Understanding Timeline Motions In the Effect section click on the arrow under Object and change from Graphic to Background Your Parameters and Effect will now apply to the Background only Scrub to preview and notice that the text in Layer 1 now remains in place All other Objects will stay put until an Effect is applied to a new Action To add a new Action for your text layer right click on the first one and select Insert You can also right click to Delete Actions Insert action Insert Delete action Delete Object The default Effect for the new Action is the same as before Click on Object and select Layer Laver number r z l FXDeko can build an unlimited number of layers Assign Layer 1 in the Layer Number field From the Parameter section enable Y Position Click on the Position Selector in the Timeline Graph and select Bottom to Home Position x Position Boton
216. lace with window see the figure below then click on Replace All 5 Close the replace window 6 Click on the green macro play button The delay will now be 1 second between events Replace El E Find what render Find Next Replace with Jwait 1 Replace Cancel Match case __ Cancel Loops and Variables The above program can be made shorter by using a loop and a variable instead of typing the same information several times For example you can type select style preset and render or wait just once but use them however many times they are required You can find more information on variables in the on line help menu but basically there are 2 types e System defined A system variable is prefixed by the symbol and examples are time and date which are the PC time and date respectively e User defined User defined variables are prefixed with the symbol and can be any name that you require without gaps but the first character after the symbol must NOT be a number To modify the macro that you have just created to use a loop and variables do the following Deko Training 11 6 Using Macros f Untitled Macro select style preset view show graphic letter D letter e letter k letter o text_cursor nearest 156 96 164 35 select word render Select style preset render Select style preset render Select style preset render Select _ style preset render Select style preset rend
217. le Name Directories akena bulletsbgd_dko eS dA sample dko template dko gt Deko title1_dko E Tutorial title dko tithe 3 dko titled dko List Files of Type Deko Graphics dko Drives Network E d Comment pO Options a Deko Training 5 22 The Layer Browser Working with Layers and Tabs The previous exercise produced a graphic with a background and two distinct layers Deko graphics are often composed of many layers Creating separate layers can make it easier to manage and modify the graphic and is also an important element in creating effects as we will see later Managing layers is made easier with the Layer Browser To view the Layer Browser select View Layer Browser on the Menu bar Ctrl Shift B A thumbnail positioned and numbered in order from 1 to last represents each layer gA View Hide Layer iii Fel Lock Unlock Layer View Lock Change buttons View Lock indicators 7 oe I H View Test Layer Channel Macr wf wf wf wf 4 4 4 Normal Zoom Layer Text Bar Command Bar Status Bar Program Preview Alt F5i Style Current Style Preset Styles Shader Effect Playback Shift F11 Sequence F11 Macro F2 Motion Stills Custom Typeface International Automation Database Ashton import Chyron import Tools Browser Chrl L Shift Ctrl B Layer Browser The Layer Browser shows all layers in seque
218. le sare EOI D Lsapeee renee den a E A E A A A 17 19 SDA EE N r e A i ne atti E A O E E EE E E E N 17 20 OU PEE EEE EANA A E EEEE EE A E E A EAEE 17 21 O T a tra A TTE AA E ere eae te 17 21 YN a E E T E E E E E E eens nae aes a 17 23 To dui On DDE O eaaa O uaeldie Diehe mesh oet 17 23 TOTU COTO ce ea overt Crp oP cree pers Peer nr Or or rerr Or rr oer ore rre ter omer ore er enry errr ey 17 24 To Eri Ve clip DERO aca ats es ts Sots estan adeeb OTET OOOO OO OAO 17 24 TO ODUM OCP DI ATE ETE E mista asied E E A A E E N 17 24 TiO DOM TI O E E E E E AE E E A AE AA A T 17 24 Recordo and ryt 0 e CDS sapanon a E EE E N OEA 17 24 To V Ae Oma PRESSIOU Prco ea a A OET E O 17 24 TOROA Nw Cipron Apae Vde aai N T A E 17 25 Tolmporra Cipto the Browser 1 ata base sosissn nian n n A 17 25 Une CIPS VIER eresro ti o T E N E ATO N sto cbinans 17 25 BE A E AE E E T A A E E E 17 25 aL Ors oeo na E E e E E A rag I E E E AA 17 26 To Remove the Key Assienment from the Current Gupinwisnanunanckunenamaniintoddnadinem ain 17 26 Wor neta a ker CiP yt ha CN D anen AEE ETEN E e a ea 17 26 E Mi ea L o ease A S at onsets E E taal O A E A E T a 17 27 Toop te GEO RESOU T E OTTO OE 17 27 IRAE a E D 0 A meron eon erie reer mre Meer Cre nn ernie Terre on Dre errno nnn Tan 17 27 Tosta stare Pointand End Point Tor Playback seurina nine a T a edd dala eae 17 27 To Playa Clip trom the In Point to the Out Point aii a a AS 17 28 To Find the Nearest Point In Out Beginning or End i
219. letter of your choice of tab Left Center Right Decimal Horizontal Scrolling Vertical Scrolling word Wrap Tab Clear Center x Tab Clear All Right Decimal Alt T then C to clear a tab Pick Preset Stile Select b Alt T then A to clear all tabs Deko Training 5 36 Working with Layers and Tabs 3 When you press the Tab key to advance the cursor to a ab stop a tab marker is displayed to the left of the first character at that tab stop Tab Markers Tab Stop indicators at the bottom of the Note character text field position relative to the Tab Stop indicators at the Left Center Right Decimal bottom of the field Note Tab stops are saved as a text layer parameter within the layer When you create a new layer the tab stop settings of the last active layer will be copied to the new layer When you clear the graphic window all tabs will disappear with the contents of that graphic Note Make sure Word wrap is of selected in layers that will contain Tab stops Finding a Tab Stop e Tab stops for a column are located to the right of the last character typed in the previous column e For the first column your tab stop can be located by hitting the home key e To confirm you are positioned on a tab look to the bottom left of the status bar for the word Tab Moving a Tab Stop 1 Position the cursor to the left of the Tab Stop 2 Select the Move tool Ctrl M 3 Hold Alt a
220. lick the clip to select it then right click and select Edit Clip Name e Type a new clip name then press Enter To Delete a Clip from the Browser Database 1 Open the browser and click the clip to select it 2 Open the Clip Editor and click Delete Deko displays a message box asking if you want to delete the avi file too Click Yes or No Deko Training A 1 Appendix Keyboard Extenders Overview Describes a variety of keyboard extenders and covers issues of ot switching among multiple control points This document will refer to the SVGA keyboard and mouse at the operator station as the GUI Technically this is a misuse of the term but it saves typing Extender Choices e All systems extend keyboard mouse and SVGA unless otherwise indicated e All systems consist of a transmitter near the chassis and a receiver at the GUI e The transmitter is generally powered from the keyboard cable while the receiver always has a wall wart power supply This document lumps together extenders and multi point access Our experience is that with the FastAction Keyboard FAK having multiple receivers and switching among them best achieve multi point access The automatic switches tend to result in double characters being sent to the display of the FAK See pages A 3 and A 4 for details on hot switching among receivers In systems without FAK multi point access works fine Deko Training A 2 Appendix
221. lip 0_41 Took 63 4857 Fra 05 52 55 96 gt Cmd 2 3 44 30 5F 34 31 28 nulls 01 3 nulls 84 03 6 nulls 05 52 55 96 gt CueClip 0_41 Called 05 52 58 12 gt Loading O_41 In 00 00 30 00 ae 01 10 05 Auto 1 05 52 58 12 gt LoadClip 0_41 Took 63 2686 F 05 53 41 04 gt Cmd 2 4 44 30 5F 34 31 28 nulls 01 3 nulls 84 03 2 nulls 08 07 05 53 41 04 gt CueClip O_ pA Called 0 41 In 00 00 30 00 Out 00 01 00 00 Auto 1 LoadClipf0 411 Took 63 9444 Frames Clip not found error message Check to make sure you are referring to the correct Media ID See A word about Media ID numbers on page A 9 Right click on the clip you intended to load and select Properties from the context menu In the Properties dialog box select the Clip tab The clip s correct Media ID number appears here J Pause IV Timing MV Detail M LogData Status Chip did not load error message Make sure the automation protocol has permission to control the desired channel of Thunder In the Channel Configuration window go to File gt Preferences gt Channel Configuration the second column is where the protocol appears The heading of this column is a selection box Select IO COM1 Context in this box and make sure the intended channel to control has a checkbox under this column Deko Training A 22 Appendix How to contact Pinnacle Broadcast Support Broadcast Support Americas and Canada Phone Fax Hours Email Web Su
222. ll clips can be imported or recorded as described in an earlier section You can use a copy of the same avi file for both the fill clip and the key clip but you must record or import that file twice To Import a Fill Clip and Its Associated Key 1 Import the fill clip as described above 2 Double click the fill clip thumbnail to load it as the current clip 3 Import the key clip as described above but be sure to choose Use as key in currently loaded clip in the Import Clip dialog box before you click Open Deko Training 17 26 Other Options Fill clip Key clip thumbnail thumbnail 1 Inthe Clip Browser double click the fill clip thumbnail to se load it as the current clip Ball Alpha_DV J BME iy Dl O C 3 Inthe Clip Editor click the Assign Key button Deko i eli displays a key icon in the corner of the fill clip s thumbnail To Assign a Key Clip to a Fill Clip 2 Inthe Clip Browser click the key clip thumbnail to select it image In oo 00 o0 00 Gut Joo 00 11 23 Duration Jaa 00 12 00 Key M Play In to Out To Remove the Key Assignment from the Current Clip e In the Clip Editor click the Delete Key button Delete key To Align a Key Clip with a Fill Clip 1 Inthe Channel menu click Keying and Routing then verify that Deko Under Video is selected 2 Create a solid color background that contrasts with the clip color and black 3 Open a fill clip that ha
223. lly to fit within the layer boundaries e Shrink to fit box shrinks text on the horizontal to fit within the layer boundaries Deko Training 5 6 Working with Layers and Tabs Exercise Continued Adjusting Auto scaling 1 Uncheck Work wrap 2 Click Shrink to fit box in the Auto scaling section Notice that the text shrinks horizontally to fit within the layer boundaries acobson The Move Tool Moving a Layer vs Moving Text In previous examples we used the Move tool to change the size and or position of the layer As we demonstrated in the example changing the size or shape of the layer did not alter the size or shape of the text unless an auto scale selection was chosen The Move tool can also be used to alter text within a layer however within the layer the tool acts somewhat differently Moving Selected Text When text is selected within a layer a selection bounding outline borders the selection with eight small selection handles surrounding the selection 1 Place the cursor near the outline so that the crosshair cursor appears i 2 Click and drag the text to a new position The position of the selected text will change in relation to other text elements within the text layer ur i FO a Fj 3 Place the cursor near one of the eight selection M OVI ng texi l r g i handles so that the cursor becomes a scale tool Notice that the text scaling changes Also notice
224. lows dissimilar components in a system to communicate The connection between two devices such as a computer and a peripheral for example interlace The pattern of two separate field scans when they join to form a complete video frame As the video picture is transmitted the first field picks up even numbered scan lines the second picks up odd numbered ones The two lace together to form a single complete frame See Field and Frame JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group An industry group brought together to establish a standard for digital image compression Also used to denote the draft standard algorithm the group has developed for digital image compression An approved standard has yet to be developed The JPEG draft standard is being used by various software developers and is the basis for Apple s software compression scheme QuickTime kerning The spacing between the characters within a word The higher the kerning amount the more space between characters A negative kerning amount tightens the spacing between characters key A combination of two images where one image covers a portion or cuts a hole in the picture of the other as in a title A key signal has three components a key source a Rey fill and a background image The key source cuts a hole in the background video and the fill signal fills in that hole Titles are usually keyed in key signal A black and white video signal that when used wit
225. ls how FXDeko renders a font character Each look is comprised of a list of details Each detail is a face edge frame shadow or underline and has its own set of attributes that dictate its color size shape etc superimpose To overlap the image from one source over the image from anther source Also Super Sync Synchronize The drive pulses both vertical and horizontal that maintain the vertical and horizontal scanning process of the video picture signal in all video equipment through processing and recording to display sync generator A pulse generator that produces video sync signals A master sync generator would be used to provide sync signals genlock to integrate the functioning of several pieces of video equipment in relation to each other and the video sional text bar The toolbar at the top of the FXDeko desktop under the menu bar which controls many common text functions current typeface background shader edge shader underline shader bold small caps macro controls ee e ee Ce eR a aia Ee F E Sim es Bi 7 Jee EC Le typeface size face shader shadow shader frame shader italics justification text box Text boxes are Windows NT controls in which you type or otherwise enter information This is text in a text box text cursor Shows where in a text field the next typed character will be inserted The text cursor is shaped like an I beam or a rectangle depending how you have your cursor p
226. makes all lines of selected text flush with both the left and right sides of the layer boundaries Justifying Layers When a text or shape layer is selected the layer is justified to the boundaries of the safe title area To justify a layer select it and apply the appropriate justification tool Tool bars and keyboard shortcuts work the same for layers Pressing the down arrow produces a layer set to center lower third Justify a Layer Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 13 Character Spacing Kerning and Row Spacing Leading The Kerning Leading tool allows you to make incremental changes in character or row spacing The same tool is used for both Both actions can be performed from the mouse or the keyboard To activate the Kerning Leading tool type Ctrl K FAK Kern Lead or click on the tool Kerning Text Se To kern from the keyboard 1 Select the text to be kerned 2 Hold down Alt and press either the right arrow to widen space between characters or the left arrow to reduce character spacing Type Ctrl Spacebar to toggle between fine and course control To kern with the mouse 3 Move the pointer handle to either side of selected text so that the pointer becomes a kerning tool zl k 4 Drag the handle either to the right to widen spacing between text or to the left to narrow the space between text Leading Rows To change the row spacing of selected text with the
227. matically puts a pause at the end of the motion so that the animation continues when the motion ends CAP Performance Guidelines A rough limit for the size of an individual frame image for a CAP shader that plays in real time is approximately 1 9 of the screen size in NTSC if this is the only motion being played That means that since NTSC is 720 x 486 350 000 pixels the file size of an individual frame should be no more than about 39 000 pixels x 4 bytes per pixel 156 kilobytes uncompressed Deko Training Other Options 17 15 The StillDeko Option The StillDeko option brings Deko graphic file management to a new level of efficiency and ease of use through Lightning integration This is the most powerful efficient and useful Still Store Character Generator integration available today To see whether StillDeko is enabled go to Options gt Enabled Options A checkmark next to StillDeko indicates that it is enabled If StillDeko is not enabled contact your Pinnacle Systems dealer Lightning and Thunder Lightning is a high performance network based image storage and management system used in on air broadcast and production Thunder works similarly and has the added capability to store and manage clips as well as still images Still Deko uses Thunder Browse software to integrate Thunder and or Lightning with Deko for the most powerful graphics management available Once you install the Thunder Browse software you can o
228. minance or brightness aspect of a video signal Y R Y B Y The three components of a component video signal including the Y luminance sional and the R Y B Y color difference signals chrominance The component output of the D 1 Betacam and MII formats Deko Training
229. n Windows NT Workst A Stark Deko Training 3 2 Setting up and Managing File Directories Showing File Details BY Exploring C File Edt BATE Tools Help When Explorer opens check to see you are in the IC w Toolbar Details View w Status Bar H All Folders Deskto Large Icons To choose the Details view go to View gt Details E My Small loons Adobe ce est Backgrounds Fe eal Chap 2 01 Fi Arange loons FullShot33 ine upleane ODerma H p importwatch Refresh A eee Lan82559 E bus T Browsing Through Drives and Folders BT Exploring C 4 File Edt View Tools Help lac HA eee Sse xe SSeS All Folders Contents of Cw Desktop Modified El My Computer Adobe File Folder 8 30 00 6 42 AM Get 3 Floppy A 2 Backgrounds File Folder 1 10 01 8 24 AM ie IC Chap 2 07 Firmware File Folder 4 11 00 amp 465 AM LD Adobe FullShot39 File Folder 112 01 4 59 AM z h _0Dema File Folder 1 15 01 4 22 AM A aT fi aa dhai importwatch File Folder 111 01 4 59 AM ae F pee Kpoms File Folder 8 30 00 6 42 AM 7 Lan 2559 File Folder 1018 99 2 12 PM Mesql File Folder 1012 00 11 26 4M PostDeka File Folder 12 5 00 9 38 AM H 2 Mesql Program Files File Folder 1 9 01 1 44 AM Bi PostDeko Recycler File Folder 9 18 00 2 54 PM 2 bin Security dmin File Folder 1 18 01 3 56 4M E Estra ope File Folder 1 11 01 4 2
230. n Y Position C Scale CI s Scale ye CY Scale Top to Home O Rotate Center to Home Bottom to Home Top to Bottom Offset Y Rotate Q z Rotate Position O Skew Absolute Selector O kem Baad Absolute to Home Enable X Position and set the position for Right to Home Enable Z Rotate Scrub to preview Note Home Position We have given FXDeko the intelligence to identify the result of a finished graphic and make this equivalent to the end keyframe in a Motion saving both time and effort for the operator The graphic itself becomes an integral part of a Motion We call this the Home position Deko Training Understanding Timeline Motions 10 9 All off screen objects begin their motion path in the same position Notice below that every character is overlapped This motion requires little effort since all you will need to do is plot the direction from which you want your object to appear Off screen Start position Toni Tonight on Channg 22 Home Position If the content is changed for any reason off screen position remains the same and Deko will automatically work out the parameters of the graphic and individual flight paths for every object Home position defines the result of the Motion See the Further Exploration section of this lesson to run a sample Motion that best defines this concept Your 200 mot Motion should now contain two different Actions a Bac
231. n Object Objects can be characters words rows layers all layers together background or the entire graphic Select a Layer number below in which to find the specified Object Your Actions will perform in either Preview or Program Check one to enable them Deko Training Understanding Timeline Motions 10 5 c Parameter As every dancer has its own choreography here you will specify Parameters of movement for every Action dancer This movement can be as basic or complex as you like The more Parameters are specified the more complex the movement To enable a Parameter place a check in the box beside it d Timeline Graph Edit your Parameters by degree of position scale rotation kern skew and opacity Adjust for curved linear cusp smooth and symmetrical movement using the Continuity Tools found in the Timeline Toolbar Click and drag the Scrub Handle across the Timeline Graph to preview the entire Motion The Position Selector displays a list of position choices and is used only with the Position Parameter Position choices and view of the Graph depend upon the Parameter currently selected e Timing For every Action dancer created in section a a corresponding Timing Bar will appear Grab handles at either end to adjust for In or Out Timing of Actions When you define an Object in section b to be a character word or row a Sub Bar will appear just below and is tied to the Timing Bar above it for that Act
232. n a sequence Deko plays the clip simultaneously with the effect associated with the graphic To associate a clip with a Deko graphic 1 In Deko open the graphic in a Program or Preview window The window must be active 2 Drag and drop the clip from the Thunder Browser onto the graphic Store Images To save a Deko graphic in a Lightning database 1 Open the graphic in an active Program or Preview window 2 From the Deko File menu choose Save To Lightning Save to Lightning xX Number joo Title Eleven 0 Clock Date 1109 12 98 Category News User Beckey Memo Logod aee 3 Inthe Save To Lightning dialog box you can edit any of the file details which default to the details of the last saved image Still Deko automatically picks an available empty number for you We recommend against changing the number to avoid overwriting an existing still Deko Training 17 22 A C Beckey mydatabase pff 10712798 10 12 98 10 12 98 10 12 98 10 12 98 0 DEFAULT Eleven 0 Clock Eleven O clock Eleven O clock Eleven O clock Eleven O clock Beckey Beckey Beckey Beckey Beckey Other Options Hockey fight Purple Waves Logos 4 Click OK The image is stored in the Lightning database and will show up in the Browse window if you press Alt Tab to switch to the Thunder Browse application Note You can also drag and drop images from Windows Explorer into the Thunder Browser Deko Trai
233. n layer Repeat the following steps for each text field 3 Highlight the text 4 Goto Text gt Text to Field This puts the highlighted text to its own independent layer 5 Go to Layer gt Layer Properties 6 There are two screens for this window Select More to view page two of this window Under Text Initialization set Usage to Replace This allows the layer to be updated through the Automation Interface 7 We recommend that you select Shrink to Fit and uncheck Word Wrap This is also where you select the centering alignments for your layers In later versions of Deko software you may need to reassign the layer order of the layers that are set to Replace starting with the first layer to be updated as layer one To reassign layers select each layer and then use Ctrl or Ctrl Layer One will receive the first set of data from the Automation Interface layer two will get the second and so on In newer versions of Deko software you can set an ID for interfaced layers query or replace This ID represents a priority order in which layers will be filled with external data To assign an ID select each layer In the Style window click on the ID arrow under Auto Update Auto U pdate C None C Query C String Replace C Clock C sL Macro Df Deko Training 16 4 Automation Using the Template With a successful connection made between the Deko and the external cont
234. n process Restart the computer Click the Start button and choose Shut Down Select Restart the computer in the Shut Down window and click on Yes Shut Down Windows Deko Training Verify and Configure Your Deko 1 11 Desktop Layout The first time the Deko program opens you will see the Graphic Compose Layout screen All creation and playback of Deko graphics are done using the mouse and keyboard to interact with the various controls and windows on the Deko desktop Pe Paailhes SP re re arite oe eee nse HLA ena ha ease ee ene Gea AARSE SAS Aid ooo a z FE i E j E eserse For Hata crest FI PO ae ET aaraa IS NR A OEA The appearance of the desktop depends on the current layout as selected from the Window Menu Deko offers a variety of standard layouts for creating editing and playing back graphics and macros You can also set up and save custom layouts that better accommodate the way you work Set Preferences Go to Options gt Preferences P Options Window Help e Select the Cursor tab and click the Moving cursor sets font and Transform look box Check the Show text cursor box is checked so that your n ae r spell Check d cursor is visible in the Program window Sa Preferences e For Text Cursor Style check I beam Your window should look Hardware Settings like the one below Factory Defaults Note The lessons in this text reference the beam cursor You may have ereater famili
235. n the Clipz cscsessssssesssessssensesessessneneee 17 28 TPA Pn E EEE EREET TOTE IEN OAO NOO OONN 17 28 Lo Synchronize Clip Playback with Eitiect Play backs orineriarien oe a REAA 17 28 To 16 ol Gh opl edie is oy el e osupa aara er rere err orerete EN ere nen Teer nen en ot ren terns iret er Tere retort err reer te 17 28 TOLO a A O cis ean naa eee mo EN ENN EE ta ates nto ann Erne nme ANT Hay DOI WTS TRE a otnr arene 17 29 1B iSSCalegdeton CP DOWNS E rsororuronur trapar PORTA RN rey ete PER RTT eR Tema NRTA Ter eee a ee Teo eer ren Tere 17 29 Deko Training Xx Contents dom ssociate a Clip witli ar Crt Apes aeie ea educate nah cate dushiato ceases sein asbtucsudids used ah seeitssiaseideh intense 17 29 To Tei rN Fase ie ie cise ate lace ete de rece ia cack EEGA OROTAN diem A OA OOTO 17 29 Toeta Cip fromthe Brow ser ata base oneitan enei eR ERT OON ENTAO ANU 17 29 RDP COIN als st sie ENESES EESE EEE EAEE EET A R EA A 1 RE OAE EE a E E E E EEE A AERE own uae O T O A A 1 P ae a A AEE AEE EAN use ted ENE ETO AET ENE EA ETE E AE KAARE A AET EAEE SAA A 1 Extender CDO eS sata dca eta dace dete ddu dete daincteatutenteh A et dephbdt edits dec TT A NC a e OaE A 1 ame NOG Kya 1 016 Mb ol Cc a ee a rete tne nT Re TEENS PROP TY EERE ET PTE RTE eV eanPR PID PT Aon EUS TE ATTEN I rae AT Oe eZ Past CHO IK Cy Poa HORON e MIO ai i atelier eis a et aaa eel aamiautanie A 3 VDE as a acc ats nt ccc eh sate eae cere ep eet santos aaa apenas E encased wanted cnacen
236. nal rate specified for that unit You can change either In Time Out Time You can choose a time code value for effects to trigger If no time code is detected by the system the computer system clock will be read This normally displays time of day Playback Controls The sequence window displays three buttons for Stop Pause and Play of Sequences Recommended practice is to use the buttons provided on the FAK Editing Sequences Insert To insert an Event between other existing Events 1 Place the cursor where you would like the new Event to be placed 2 Go to the Sequence menu 3 Choose Insert event Alt Insert Delete To delete the current event choose Delete Event Alt Delete from the Sequence menu To delete a group of events select the group of events to be deleted Press Delete Deko Training Creating Sequences and Effects 9 5 Exercise Create and Run a Sequence For this lesson you will sequence the five title files created in Lesson 5 or use the sample files lesson a dko through lesson6e dko provided in the Tutorial directory Change Layout to Sequence Playback SK F11 FAK Seq Edit File Edit View Sequence Timecode NetDeko Channel Macro Options Window Help BankGothic maet _ z 35__ gt Ell Sil Lif oe HEI E LI TE Untitled Preview e x a title5 dko Program iol x ye ae e o o d E SC we ae e o o n a ae L E SOO O fW T aO O f Macro o
237. name then press Save Selection 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 and save the next three rows as follows 24 Eric Davis 524 dko 9 Brady Anderson 509 dko Creating a Place Pop 1 Clear the Program window 2 Delete the default text layer and draw a text layer about 1 inch high from the bottom right of the safe area indicators 3 Select Preset Style 4 4 Type Live 5 Center justify the text Ctrl 5 6 Select the layer and press the Save File key 7 Under File Name enter 700 dko and click on the Save Selection button Deko Training 15 8 SportsWare Pops Using Text Pops 1 Open the graphic file 1501 dko The graphic is a background with a lower third template made up of one layer 2 Select the layer which is waiting for a player name 3 Do one of the following e On the number pad enter 021 and press the Read Key FAK e Press F9 Set Last Fils of Type to txt and enter 021 in the File Name box SKS The Pop Jimmy Key will appear in the Text Layer formatted to the style of the layer At dka 7 aay Th See An 22s ieee ee e 4 i 4 Press Read FAK or F9 SIY and enter 051 on the number pad The Name Layer will change to Terry Matthews 5 Repeat this for the other three Text Pops 075 txt 024 txt 009 txt Deko Training SportsWare Pops 15 9 Using Style Pops 1 With the layer still selected read 521 dko Notice that the style has changed within the layer to the style of t
238. nce with the highest priority layer top represented by the first layer in the browser and lower priority layers numbered in sequence below A layer in the browser can be selected simply by clicking on it Note As the layer browser can tax system memory it is recommended practice to keep it closed when playing graphics on air Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 23 Reordering Layers Layer priority determines how a layer is viewed on the screen The top layers will appear in front of layers of lower priority Layer priority can be easily changed e Click on a layer thumbnail in the browser and drag it to a different position e Click on a layer in the graphic or the browser and type e Ctrl to move the layer up one position e Ctrl to move the layer down one position e Alt to move the layer to the top position e Alt to move the layer to the bottom position Reordering Layers Based on Screen Position From the Layer menu select Re order Layers A priority first from left to right then from top to bottom determines the layer order This is designed for fast and easy update of live template pages Viewing Layers Next to each layer is a zew status indicators The indicator will either show an eye open or shut When the eye is open the layer is visible in the Program window when the eye zs shut the layer is not visible To change the view status of a layer 1 Select the layer in Layer Browser
239. nd use the right or left arrow keys to move the tab stop 4 Type Ctrl Spacebar to toggle between Coarse and Fine movement Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 37 Exercise Working with Tabs This sample exercise highlights the benefits of setting Tab stops inside of a text layer For instance Tabs are recommended when names and statistics for many players are displayed in a columnar order If a player advances and moves ahead of his opponents a Leaderboard provides fast and flexible access to change this order Rows of information can be exchanged up or down rapidly And there is no restriction to style formatting Any changes to style and position can also happen quickly See the sample below Yo amg innit dhe Ferg Ruth Ferrare F a m EFIC Larson Ma r wi Pil at ele inn lafi Teicia Ann Joffe ir z y ee Tak Teaia ii cer i in MUU cee to Whoville CT Feeding Hills MA To Exchange Rows of Content 1 Click in the Program window to set focus and open the sample file D Deko Tutorial training leaderboard dko Toggle the Insert key to enable Overwrite OVR mode Look to the status bar at the bottom of the screen for OVR Note Pressing the Insert key toggles between Overwrite OVR and Insert INS modes The OVR mode must be set when updating Tab content Typing in INS mode will re arrange the Tab stops Press the Tab key and overwrite the existing content with new text Get a feel
240. ndow must be active for you to perform tasks in it To open and activate a window choose the window type from the View menu To activate a window that is already open select it from the list at the bottom of the Window menu or click anywhere on the window aliasing Inaccurate rendering of an image due to a low digital sampling rate Aliasing appears as Jaggies or jagged edges on graphics and especially text Aliasing is corrected by special software and techniques anti aliasing that smooth out the jagged edges by anticipating and displaying the interim pixels In analog CCD systems a form of distortion that is associated with the process of sional sampling resulting in stair step edges on diagonal lines within the image analog A signal that is a Reness of or analogous to a physical process and is continuously variable Analog electronic signals the basis for conventional video and audio recording and imaging processes are distinguished from digital signals which represent discrete numerical samples of information the basis for computer imaging processes Analog Digital Converter A D An electronic circuit that changes continuously variable analog sionals into discrete numerical digital signals bits The common abbreviation is A D Analog to Digital Conversion A D The process of converting an analog signal into a digital bit stream Includes the steps of sampling and quantizing animation Single images displ
241. nds except what is displayed in Figure A In an effort to be efficient this macro should also contain commands to show Layer 13 Select and copy Ctrl C the 2 l Untitled Macro command rows layer select layer 1 layer edit show Move the cursor below the last line and paste Ctrl V Figure A Highlight 0 in the second layer edit show 0 and layer_select layer 14 layer edit show change it to 1 layer select layer 13 layer edit show 1 Highlight the 14 in the second layer 14 and change it to 13 Save this macro as serve up mcr Your macro should look like Figure B Figure B E serve_up mer Macro Sle layer edit show 1 Edit this macro show Layer 14 and hide Layer 13 Save this as serve_down mcr Your macro should look like the following E serve_down mer Macro 2 layer select layer 13 layer edit show layer select layer 14 layer edit show 1 Deko Training 17 Using Macros 11 11 Modify this macro to hide Layer 14 and Layer 13 Save this as serve none mcr Your macro should look like the following a serye_none_mcr Macro 3 Miel Run Macro on FAK To run this Macro on a FastAction keyboard 1 Zi i Press the Preset Macro key to open a dialog window Scroll down and select the Z location then press the Select File button Navigate to D Deko Tutorial macros and select the macro file named serve up mcr Scroll up to the X location and then press the Select
242. ne Select the right Bezier handle of Point 2 and drag upward Select the only Bezier handle of Point Gi oo Wee Point 3 3 and drag upward This creates an arch and Handle Bezier provides a taller bounce to your effect Handle 15 Just for fun enable both the X and Y Scale Parameters In the Background Action change Effect from Page Turn to Tiles and play your Motion Then save it Note Though we have just created a Point to Point Motion for Position this is only one of many Parameters For greater creativity you should experiment and apply these steps to other Parameters Create a Transition Action The Motion that we have just created applies to the contents of Preview graphic only and does not consider a graphic that may exist in the Program window Let s now consider Program and create a transition between Preview and Program graphics 1 Select the Program window and open the file 100 dko 2 Right click in the Action List and insert a new Action 3 Inthe Effect panel change the Object to Graphic and select for Program at the bottom 4 Enable Opacity and X and Y Scale Parameters 5 Shorten the timing duration to 1 second 6 Scrub to preview You should see the Program graphic shrink and dissolve center screen 7 Fora better effect select X Scale and position the second point to 2 instead of 0 This will scale that parameter to twice it s size instead of shrinking to zero Deko Training 10 16 Understandin
243. ng message My Settings Complete Deko Training 11 14 8 Using Macros in mii rmy gain 8 in mii _bmy ga out rgb gain 6 in comb filter in _decoder_y gain 8 out key ga Standard video standard ntsc message My Settings Complete 4 Save the Macro as my _settings mcr To Run my_settings mcr 1 a From the Command bar type the following my settings Press Enter and look to the bottom left on the status bar Your message should display in the lower left corner of the Status bar Macro pf command name my_settings My Settings Complete Deko Training Lesson 12 Creating Clocks and Timers Clocks and countdowns are a common element of graphics In earlier versions of Deko building clocks required the use of macros Beginning with version 4 1 of the Deko software building a clock or timer is greatly simplified This lesson will introduce the new clock feature in version 4 1 software Building a clock is a two step process First the clock parameters are formatted Multiple clock styles can be created Next you create a graphic layer and assign the clock you created to the layer Let s review the first step Creating Clocks Auto Update The new clock feature is found in the Style menu In version 4 1 software None C Query the Layer view of the Style menu has changed The Auto Update panel C Sting Replace provides selection buttons to choose your Auto update source and Clock Clock
244. ng By oping the signal through a device one signal can drive several devices luminance Amplitude brightness of the gray scale portion of the television signal The Y signal The range of brightness from black through gray to white in a video picture macro A series of FXDeko commands that can be saved in a macro file and played back on demand You can use the macro recorder to record a macro or you can edit a macro as a text file macro recorder Used to play macros and to record actions to create macros Deko Training G 12 Glossary mapping The ability to take a two dimensional graphics file of texture wood grain chrome etc and project it on an object thus wrapping the object with the chosen texture maximize button Appears on the right side of a windows title bar Clicking this button enlarges the window to its maximum size media Materials or technical means of communication using films art video voice music computer programming etc Megabyte MB A unit of measurement equal to 1024 kilobytes KB or 1 048 576 bytes Data files especially sound graphics and digital video files are measured in MB menu bar Appears near the top of FXDeko s application window under the title bar Clicking on any entry brings up a pull down menu of commands Click on a command to perform it Commands followed by an ellipsis bring up an additional window for more information to be entered
245. ng productively with Deko The system provides easy methods with either the mouse or the keyboard to quickly navigate the cursor and select text Home and End Key Behavior Go to Options gt Preferences and click on the Cursor tab The lower right quadrant of the tab provides an option to determine how your keyboard Home and End key will behave The behavior is as follows C Windows Home and End key behavior i Character generator Character Generator e Home moves the cursor to the beginning of a text field e End moves the cursor to the end of a text field e Ctrl Home moves the cursor to the beginning of a line e Ctrl End moves the cursor to the end of a line Windows e Home moves the cursor to the beginning of a line e End moves the cursor to the end of a line e Ctrl Home moves the cursor to the beginning of a text field e Ctrl End moves the cursor to the end of a text field Choose the one that works better for you If you have no preference choose Character generator Note for the rest of this document we will refer to Home and End key behavior using the Character generator standard If your machine is set to Windows make adjustments accordingly Cursor Selection Deko provides two cursors the I Beam cursor and the Box cursor The I beam is placed to the ft of a character to be selected with the shift right arrow key The Box cursor places a box around the character to be selected with the shift
246. ning Other Options 17 23 ClipDeko The ClipDeko option enables you to record Digital video then playback loop trim and browse these clips Animated backgrounds can now be played all from one box without the need for a separate disk recorder you can also associate any clip to any Deko graphic ClipDeko hardware supports DV25 and MPEG 2 compression formats providing over 3 hours of DV25 storage Clips can also be imported in the form of AVI files from standard applications such as Adobe AfterEffects and 3D Studio Max e The Clip Browser offers thumbnail images Link clip to for fast searching as well as clip association cr graphic control for linking your clips to specific N graphics Open the Clip demo_ntsc_blue Break Link to Editor graphic demo_ntsc_clouds Record a Clip demo_ntsc_copper e The Cup Editor allows you to import alee record preview play and loop your clips as well as assign key clips to fill clips and alion a fill clip with its associated key This menu also contains a thumbnail browser of all clips imported in the database F 3 px Clip Edit Tw q o i Thumbnail Browser Hilti THIPAUY _ A a USA Stars Clip Graphic Scrub ou coors cod Link to cant Bra link Record 00 00 01 19 D Scrub Video and Key Import Key Delete Asfign key Clip SwooshBanfier Format PW
247. ning on the Deko serves as pre packaged access to the power of the machine This allows a relatively untrained person to create quite sophisticated effects The simplified interface also helps prevent errors by restricting the novice operatot s options The experienced operator can always reach behind to the full power and flexibility of the Deko Pinnacle has created several examples of what can be accomplished with automation The Sports Score Update provides fields for the names of two teams and the name of the CG template in which to display the score The user can then hit add buttons to update the scoreboard displayed by the Deko This application is especially well suited for fast scoring sports like basketball How Does Deko Automation Work Push vs Pull Technology Deko layers set to Deko layers set to query replace Doors are Deko sends a request for open awaiting data data X command Replace Deko layer Usage Query Deko layer Usage Push Data Pull Data Sports Integration System IDS Walter Bohlin Systems Newsroom System Newsroom pushes content to Deko templates Deko sends to acknowledge receipt of data Content is sent to Deko template Sports systems sends confirmation to Deko of sent data R command Deko Training 16 2 Automation Enable Automation You only need to perform these steps once After that your machine will come up with Automation enabled 1 Within
248. ns controller Widely acclaimed in the computer industry UNIX is recognized for its powerful multi user and multi tasking capabilities VCR Video Cassette Recorder vertical resolution For television signals the specification of resolution in the vertical direction The ability to reproduce closely spaced horizontal lines The maximum number of alternating white and black horizontal lines that can be counted from the top of the picture to the bottom or the amount of detail that can be perceived in the vertical direction Vertical resolution is only roughly equivalent to the number of horizontal scanning lines in a picture video signal A waveform carrying video information voice over A spoken message delivered off camera This is the opposite of Lip Sync recording which is done live as the actors are being photographed An off screen narration would be considered a voice over VTR Video Tape Recorder wipe An optical effect where the picture appears to have been wiped from the screen i e left to right or top to bottom workstation A high end computer system having many of the characteristics of a personal computer intended for use by engineers or imaging professionals WYSIWYG An acronym for What you see is what you get Refers to computer systems that give you an on screen image of the final printed or recorded product rather than substituting symbols or codes Y signal The lu
249. ny arbitrary position determined by the user 1 Open and play the sample sequence 300 seq This provides a good example of Absolute Motion After you have viewed the sample clear your Program window and open 400 dko in Preview Select the Motion window and open 200 mot Change the Effect from Graphic to Layer and enable X Position The default for X Position is Left to Home Click on the Position Selector in the Graph and select Absolute Notice that the Timeline changes to portray Absolute left center and right coordinates Scrub to preview You should see your text layer fly in from off screen left through the center and off screen right Our objective is to create an on screen flight path SE MENENNENENENENNNNNNNENNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNM SANNANNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEN Note Offscreen Position Off screen start or end position for any Object in flight is exactly one full screen in any direction 10 Position the scrub bar at the very front left of the Timeline 11 Click on the left Point Abs 1f and drag down to just above the Centerline Deko Training 10 18 Understanding Timeline Motions 12 Click on the right Point Abs Rt and drag up to just below the Centerline 13 View your output as a guide for placement Scrub to preview 14 Enable Y Position and select the Absolute path 15 Use the Copy function on the X Position and Paste to the Y Position see the Tip
250. o open the Macro window 2 Open the macro D Deko Tutorial dir select mcr The following Macro will display g dit_select mcr Macro PX choice paths news Sam news noon news Spm news pm parameter path desc change to choice paths A Directory Choices preference graphic_dir C path edit preference macro_dir preference graphic_dir edit preference style_dir preference graphic_dir edit preference motion_dir preference graphic_dir user defined edit preference face_dir preference graphic_dir B Directory Change message All paths changed to preference graphic_dir Through 5 File Type categories C Confirmation of directory change in status bar There are three sections of this Macro separated by a blank row e Inthe first section a choice list of directory paths is provided These choices are user defined and can be accessed rapidly in the form of a drop down list e The second section contains commands that will perform based on the chosen directory The commands will set all directory paths chosen by the user for each of the five Deko File Type categories Graphics Macros Styles Motions and Custom Typefaces e After the directory choice is selected and all directory paths have properly changed a confirmation of the selected directory will appear in the bottom left of the Deko status bar Deko Training Using Macros 11 13 Exercise my_settin
251. old Condensed Th 0050 CANADIAN RATING SYSTEM MASTER CONTROL CLOCK CANADION RATING SYSTEM Swiss 721 Bold Condensed Th 4 5 Select a TrueType font and then click Accept to add the font to the mapping file for the current Deko session Deko Training 6 16 Working With File Imports To Save the Current Font Mapping File for Future Deko Sessions 1 jan In the Chyron Import window click Details The Chyron Import Details dialog box appears fe Chyron Import D MOODT WMESSAGE O002 r Font Dwectory cS e Moor oom oon omo wiss 721 Bold Condensed TH Swas 21 BdCnOul BT O2 O251 Swiss 7271 Bold Condensed TM Swirl BdCnOul BT 03 0252 Swiss 7271 Bold Condensed TM Svas 21 BdCnOul BT 04 0253 Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TM Swas 21 BdCnOul BT 05 0254 Swiss 7271 Bold Condensed TM Swirl BdCnOul BT 06 0255 Swiss 721 Bald Condensed TM Svas 21 BdCnOul BT 07 0050 CANADIAN RATING SYSTEM oo 777 oo 7 10 777 11 2777 12 VN 13 777 14 0051 MASTER CONTROL CLOCK 15 0050 CANADIAN RATING SYSTEM 16 0001 Swiss 721 Bold Condensed TM Svir BdCnOul BT Save in Si Senos z fa pel a mi Mike Bordick txt le Cal Ripken txt Charles Oakley txt 3 Z Patrick Ewing txt J Chris Mills txt A Ralph Palmeiro txt E Jeff Reboulettxt 2 Roberto Alomar txt 2 John Starks txt 12 Larry Johnson txt File name AssociateMap txt Save as type Map F
252. olor of characters and add style details Before You Start The Window menu provides several options for arranging the current layout of windows and tools on your Deko desktop Most of these layouts include a Program window which is where you will type text The Program window shows the current on air graphic The contents of this window match Deko s video output with the addition of a cursor safe title lines and other markers A Preview window shows the same elements cursor safe title lines and markers as a Program window but may not have an associated video output Creating Graphics The main function of Deko is the creation and display of graphic files All graphics are created in a Program or Preview window A Deko graphic can include text and background elements Once created a graphic may be saved on disk in a graphic file A graphic consists of one or more ayers and a background Each layer can be text or a geometric shape a rectangle or an ellipse Each character of text is rendered in a particular sty which specifies its font and ook Each geometric shape is also rendered in a particular look Deko provides a variety of tools for typing justifying positioning sizing and otherwise editing text and shapes Deko Training 4 2 Type and Modify Text The Deko Interface Tools Window Style Program Shader Window Text Bar Window Window Bie fot Yew Tet Lae Charal Meco Option Wire Baa Aria
253. on and Online Help for more details T Thunder mydatabase pff File Edit View Window Help wm eela Ble Olo e o a s e gelma E C SStills Gy C Beckey mydatabase pff 15 x T C Beckey mydatabase pff 0 DEFAULT SEARCH fitemNum Date Title Category User Memo 10 18 99 Template 10 18 99 Template 10 18 99 Template 10 18 99 Template Still Images You can open a still image from the Thunder Browse into the Deko in several different ways e Right click on the still and choose Title from the drop down menu e Left click the still then press function key F9 on the keyboard e Use the numeric keypad to type the number of the still then press F9 Any of these three operations will switch you over to the Deko application with the image you picked loaded into the Preview or Program window whichever was active when you left the application If Deko is already open you can drag and drop an image from Thunder Browse to the Deko Preview or Program window where you can then edit the image like any other Deko graphic Once you edit and save a graphic in Deko Thunder marks the upper right corner of the thumbnail image of the graphic with the Deko logo Deko Training Other Options 17 21 Clips Thunder Browse marks thumbnail images of clips with a small film clip in the upper right corner You can associate a clip from the Thunder Browse with a Deko graphic When you then use the graphic i
254. or the function you wish to perform you can invoke the command explicitly by entering its name on the Command Bar Haco o command name Close For example the command to clear the current graphic is clear graphic Try it Press F4 to select the Command Bar type clear graphic then press Enter Some commands have user defined parameters The Prompt button on the Command Bar opens a Command Prompt dialog box where you can specify parameter values The Defaults button in the resets a command s parameters to their default values Every command recognized by FXDeko is listed and described in detail in the accompanying FXDeko Command Reference A macro is a sequence of FXDeko commands You can name and store a macro by saving it in a file You can invoke a macro in the same way you can invoke a command by typing the macro name on the Command Bar and pressing Enter Once you learn FXDeko s macro language you will be able to write and edit macros directly in the Macro window For now you can follow the simple instructions in this section to quickly begin creating macros using FXDeko s Macro Recorder Using the Macro Recorder Recording a Macro Macro Record ME ES Macro Play On Off Toggle Macro Stop Macro Pause Playback Deko Training 11 2 Using Macros To Record a Macro 1 To turn the macro recorder on do one of the following e Click the record button at the far right end of the text bar e e Go to Macro gt
255. ormat Deko Training 6 4 Working With File Imports g Pinnacle g files are used as the native file format for Lightning still stores and Thunder clip servers The g format is a good choice for import if your facility has integrated Deko with these products g files are already formatted to NTSC or PAL resolution They also carry an alpha channel readable by Deko jpg Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG JPEG is a lossy compression method In other words to save space it just throws away parts of an image Lossy compression methods can generate artifacts unwanted effects such as false color and blockiness if not used carefully JPEG compression provides the best results with continuous tone images such as photographs A JPEG image is automatically decompressed when opened A higher level of compression results in lower image quality and a lower level of compression results in better image quality In most cases the Maximum quality option produces a result indistinguishable from the original The JPEG format supports RGB and grayscale color modes and does not support alpha channels pet PICT format Macintosh Picture supports a mixture of bitmapped and vector oriented data that is encoded in the Mac s native QuickDraw language This is the most generic file format for the Macintosh widely used among graphics and page layout applications as an intermediary file format for transferring files between applications The
256. ose window to easily produce exiting effects on grouped layers To name a layer Refresh view 1 Click on the desired layer in the Layer browser W Show layer s Hide layer s 2 Click in the Number layer below the Layer Picon or right click on the Picon A Shortcut menu appears Lock layer s Unlocked layers 3 Click on Edit Name The name layer for the layer changes to allow you to edit name layer 4 Enter the new name in the layer 5 Click anywhere in the screen to accept the name change 6 Repeat this process for each layer to be named Modifying Layers Cutting and Pasting Layers Layers can be cut copied or pasted within the graphic or to other graphics To perform any of these operations select the desired layer s and use the keyboard shortcuts e Cut Ctrl X e Copy Ctrl C e Paste Ctrl V Appending A Graphic to Another Graphic An entire graphic with all of its layers can be appended to another graphic file combining layers from the first graphic with that of the second To append one graphic with another 1 Open the first graphic file 2 Goto File gt Append Layers Alt F9 3 In the opened dialog box navigate to the drive and directory containing the second graphic file 4 Choose the file from the File Name menu or type it in the File Name field and click OK Note the first file will be appended to the second file with the second files graphic layers behind those of the first Th
257. ossary G 13 mouse pointer The mouse pointer is used for pointing to objects on the desktop and b clicking or dragging them MPEG Motion Picture Experts Group The standards committee meeting to set standards for the compression of motion video images Like JPEG it is both a group and an algorithm The algorithm for compressing moving images is being developed and is not yet available for use navigate A term used to use a mouse or keyboard to control the elements of a Graphic Interface To navigate around a dialog box use Tab and Shift Tab to move between fields or click on the desired field The up and down arrow keys scroll through the items in a list Double click a directory to select it Double click a file name to open the file network An interconnected and coordinated system of geographically dispersed communication devices terminals so that signal transmission to or among any of the devices is practical and reliable noise A change in the characteristics of an electronic signal amplitude frequency or phase that is not directly related to the information being communicated All electronic circuits are subject to noise non composite video signal A video signal containing picture and blanking information but no sync signals Non composite video signals are used as input and output signals for some video equipment NTSC National Television System Committee The group that established the
258. out in relation to other details By clicking the more button you will reveal the priority controls e Priority determines whether the detail appears in front of or behind other details By default Deko assigns a priority to each detail so that they render from front to back in the order they appear in the Details list Use Priority to change the rendering order Priority ranges from 0 closest to viewer to 1000 farthest from viewer Priority also controls the rendering order of overlapping details from different styles e From previous detail specifies which other details in the look provide the shape on which this detail is based Face produces a detail based only on the face detail Priority ai From previous detail To next detail ie Previous produces a detail based on the To next detail setting of the item immediately above the current detail in the list Frame produces a detail based on the first frame above the current detail in the list Underline produces a detail based on the first underline above the current detail in the list e To next detail determines what this detail will send to the detail immediately below it in the list Previous sends whatever was sent to the current detail from the detail above it This sends the current detail Merged sends the combination of the current detail and whatever was sent to the
259. p down box verify Deko dko as File Type Then select OK to save What you have just created and saved is the positioning and the font chosen for that position along with the background image This is commonly referred to as a template Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 19 Exercise Creating Graphics from a Template A template graphic contains text layers ready to be filled The template can also contain a background image The file saved to disk in the previous exercise was a template graphic The only difference between a ready to air graphic and a template graphic is whether or not the text has been filled in There is no difference in how you save the files In this exercise you will create five lower thirds from the template you just created Fill in a Name and Job Title 1 The first lower third needed is Frank Capelli Firefighter Press the Insert key to toggle Insert Overwrite to OVR 2 Select the name layer and then type in the name 3 Tab to the second layer and type in the job title Notice that the current style box changed when you moved to the second layer If this did not happen then you might not have the correct user preference set for Moving cursor sets font and look Use Save As to Store the Lower Third on Disk 1 From the File window go to Save Graphic As SK F12 FAK Save File 2 To preserve the original template file template dko save the file a different file name Use titlel
260. pe into the Command bar is clip load 0 0_1 Note There will be no returned message on the FXDeko Watch the appropriate mini monitor in the Thunder application this command should cue the desired clip and the picon will appear just under the mini monitor Deko Training A 20 Appendix 5 Following the example set in step 2 type the next command to play the clip clip play 0 The cued clip should now play out through the channel There will still be no response apparent on the FXDeko Troubleshooting Pressing the TEST button in the FXDeko Clip Server Configuration Parameters window returned an error 1 Make sure both systems are communicating correctly on the network and are using a common network protocol 2 Sometimes the error may be due to a permissions issue Use the Windows NT Explorer on the FXDeko select Network Neighborhood and pick the Thunder system by its network name If there is a permissions issue Explorer will ask for a Name and password Enter a valid username and password that Thunder would accept on its own login screen Once you can successfully browse the Thunder system using Windows NT Explorer the Test button should now work until the next time FXDeko is rebooted To correct this issue on a permanent basis see your network administrator The Test button returned an OK but when the clip load command is entered nothing happens 3 The Deko will not provide a response when the commands are entered
261. pen and edit a Lightning image in Deko associate a Thunder clip with a Deko graphic and store Deko files in a Lightning database on your Deko s hard drive or a networked Lightning system Install Thunder Browse Software on Deko 1 Connect the Thunder dongle to the parallel port on the back of your Deko If you have any other dongle already connected connect the Thunder dongle onto the back of the dongle already there 2 Insert the Thunder CD in your Deko s CD drive 3 Inthe bottom left corner of desktop go to Start gt Run 4 Click the Browse button and navigate to the Setup exe file on the Thunder CD then click OK 5 Follow the on screen prompts to complete the installation The installer will ask you to choose Thunder or Thunder Browse Choose Thunder Browse 6 Once the installation is complete go to Start gt Shut Down gt Restart 7 Once the computer has restarted go to Start gt Programs gt Thunder Browse 8 Thunder Browse prompts you to enter the Options Enable password Refer to the Important Notice included with your Deko documentation for the password Enter the password which is case sensitive and click OK Deko Training 17 16 Other Options Connect to An Existing Remote Database To access databases on another system in your network you must first connect to that system After you follow this one time connection process the other system will always appear in the Thunder Browser Tree If you
262. place your new folder in In this case click on the C drive 2 Goto File gt New A popup menu will appear 3 Click on Folder A second folder labeled New Folder will appear at the bottom of the list of folders in the right window New Folder will have a box around it and will be highlighted 4 Type a name for the new folder FR Eadumm ces In this example it is Deko File Edit View Tools Graphics Ba Haak All Folders Contents of 0 4 5 Press the Enter key to complete the process El My Computer AS 3 Floppy A Fhe C Notice that your new folder appears GLa Adobe in the correct order in the Network Tree It still appears at the bottom of the right contents pane When you click to another folder and then open it again it will appear in the alphabetical order ao Meagl Ba PostDeko este shortcut Pelete Henane Properties Close Help Backgrounds if 9 Chap 2 01 Firmware S horkout A Briefcase Bitmap Image Thunder Ftp Document Flash File Database Adobe Photoshop Image Microgott Word Document Flash File Sequence Text Document Microsoft Data Link Wave Sound Winzip File cel aleje lt xle Medos sys Ment 28 exe J4 Ntdetect com nithdr a pagetile sys era PS GFORMAT E BAT Z Sql log 36 object s 302MB Disk free space 2 90GE Deko Training Setting up and Managing File Directories Renaming Folders and files
263. plin Rieko 41 Heb 5 J Find fo Administrative Tools Common E FsDeko Read Me j fo Adobe E FDeko Release Notes a Help fo Epson d A Hasp Install z Run E EPSON Printers P Setvids SE Z Deko Training Verify and Configure Your Deko 1 3 How to Create a Shortcut The easiest way to launch Deko is from a shortcut on the desktop A shortcut is a link to the actual file giving ready access to the program file Your desktop should already have a Deko shortcut available If not to create a shortcut Program Shortcut Open A dy C E T Fale Map Network Drive 1 Ifthe Windows Desktop is not visible minimize Disconnect Network Drive all programs Create Shortcut Rename 2 Right click on the My Computer icon and select Explore Properties 3 When the Explore window appears double click on C Drive Double click on the Deko program directory then double click on the Bin directory 5 r Local Disk C3 a bes H ADOBEAPP Phdd hip 119 KB E Corporate Fonts hinstall exe 1 003 KB H DEKO a notes40 wri 16 KB j a Documents and Settings amp Deko exe 3 945 KB 0 Fullshotes amp Deba hip 1 991 KE a AL KPCMS readme Yx 5 KB bee oof J Phobowork Ao FaDeko Y bin nf Extra 3 Right click on application file Drag to desktop 1 Double click 2 Double click Deko folder the Bin subfolder Deko Training 1 4 Verify and Configure Your Deko 4
264. porting graphics and assigning each graphic to a key Custom Typeface characters can be typed positioned scaled and even given looks like normal TrueType characters cut A visual technique where the picture changes instantaneously from one scene to an entirely different one D to A Digital to Analog A conversion process that takes a digital signal and converts it into an analog signal usually by a process of filtering D A Abbreviation for Digital to Analog converter D 1 Component Digital Video employs the component Y R Y B Y recording system in a digital recording process D 2 Composite Digital Video employs the composite full bandwidth direct color recording system in a digital recording process DAC Digital to Analog Converter Also called a D to A converter A device that converts digital sionals to analog signals that traditional analog circuits such as VCRs audio amplifiers video monitors can handle In a digital video system the DAC converts digital video to an analog video sional In a CD drive it converts the digital information to analog audio that can be used by amplifiers and speakers data rate The speed of a data transfer process normally expressed in bits per second or bytes per second The data rate of CD ROM is 150 000 bytes per second while the data rate for a typical Magnetic Hard Disk is 1 5 MB per second definition Synonymous with sharpness detail quality or
265. pport Broadcast Support Europe Phone Fax Hours Email Web Support Broadcast Support South Asia Phone Fax Hours Email Web Support Supports Regions Broadcast Support Beijing Phone Fax Hours Email Web Support Supports Regions Pinnacle Systems Corporate Website Pinnacle Systems Mailing Address Pinnacle Systems Inc Attn Broadcast Support 280 N Bernardo Avenue Mountain View CA 94043 5238 650 930 2990 650 930 1601 6am 6pm M F Pacific Time broadcast support pinnaclesys com www pinnaclesys com support 44 0 1895 442 003 44 0 1895 442 275 9 am 5 pm M F broadcast support uk pinnaclesys com www pinnaclesys com support 65 284 2336 65 285 9486 9 am 6 pm M F actim support pinnaclesys com www pinnaclesys com asia Taiwan India Pakistan Bangladesh Sri Lanka Australia New Zealand 86 10 6641 0053 or 86 10 6641 0063 86 10 6641 0073 9 am 6 pm M F Beijing Time broadcast support pinnaclesys com www pinnaclesys com asia China Hong Kong Korea http www pinnaclesys com Deko Training Glossary A to D Analog to Digital A conversion process that changes an analog signal into a digital signal It is achieved by sampling the signal at intervals and then quantifying each sample to give them values suitable for use in a digital system active window The window with a highlighted usually blue title bar A wi
266. r Deko is not networked check with your network administrator 1 Open Thunder Browse 2 Goto File gt Open 3 In the Look in field at the top of the Open dialog box choose Network Neighborhood E My Computer EJ 3k Floppy A _ 8 Dekog8demos E Dekohii ton Fedekod IF Ping ka Demo for Sal Network Neighborhood Documents k Publi E3 My Briefcase E d Files of type Flash File Database ptt Cancel Open Look ir E LIGHTNING Files of type Flash File Database pif Cancel 4 Double click the remote system name the exported drive usually D the Lightning directory and then the database pff file you wish to open Deko Training Other Options 17 17 Set Up a Database on Your Deko You must first setup file sharing for the drive where the database will reside After that you can create a new database and open it File Sharing To set up file sharing on the hard drive 1 Go to Start gt Programs gt Windows Explorer 2 Right click the drive where you will store Lightning databases probably C or D then choose Sharing The Properties dialog box appears with the Sharing tab selected C Properties EE 3 Under the Sharing tab click the New Share button New Share 4 Type the drive designation letter such as C in the Share Name text box then click OK then click OK again on the Properties dialog box The selected drive is now sha
267. r Meyer T trent rr er rer rt Tere 5 19 Use Save Asto Store the Lower Thirdon Diskiassninsnanesacneniop ninin ia R anne 5 19 Plliathe second Lower Thitdecorbsiro nannaa E A R GE RRE R 5 20 Fea ith Third Wit le Atv SIGs T ROEE ONA 5 20 Pali tie Tirad itl rand o NE na E E EEEE ES 5 21 TELDE D WSC oosa ranar aaao E T N E NA N E AAA 5 22 e eena eA E S e A E E E E A E E E E O eet 5 23 Roma E aA tata tad AAEN E E E O A EAE O 5 24 Modin mo ae Sna T E E T tani 5 25 xctese e Mikae a ull Sere et SAE si ostsi si a A hutuees aa saun aucta T O 5 27 ESI y Ue sa aaa asst dost ara vt eal nai cau A A as asta A cote AS 5 27 DSCNS VA STO 2 T sean Ae A E E I A AA E E NAN A A A AT 5 35 See TID rane A E E E E eee ea A 5 35 E N O R LADS A A aie a shee EAEE A ta heed ses 5 37 ToT xchange ROWS OCON O oo a A ANER E AA 5 37 Too e e TE a aea T a aa E EREE EAE A E N A 5 38 Tokocae an Moduy MAPOS ON ceina A nner ter ern tant ease 5 38 To Locate the Tab Stop 14 ONE T ab C OT wait uit E A OTO 5 38 POE a E E ery ner 5 39 PANTO clan ciel arm A TE A EE N ONR 5 39 SOA ECO a A ATA OAT TE O TE E AAO A 5 39 EELE aE T T E A E E E E E A AE E tes 5 39 Deko Training vi Contents Lesson 6 Working With Pile Tin ports asissssssscsesssesesasesesasesosanes condedesaded csadedes pans po vediscwevescncedscnesesdscees 6 1 TS Gtaphi CS sss states ton A T OT stat tec ck a Sweat tilt lal ea letters senate OOTO 6 1 Computer NCS sass rss todas as toasts toes E A E E OOR 6 1 ApH Chia min
268. r Text Layer formatted to your settings Deko Training 13 1 Lesson 13 Channel Configuration Single Dual Channel Operation All graphics can be created in either the Preview or Program window This makes no difference to the graphic The Program window shows the current on air graphic and matches Deko s video output The Preview window shows a graphic that is not yet on air Preview is most used to demonstrate what is about to become an on air graphic Depending on the configuration of your Deko system you can view up to two Program outputs plus a Preview output Channel To Specify Single Program Plus a Preview Output e In the Channel menu do one of the following Keper Test Show Key Output Color Bars e Click Program Preview l Program Preview e Click Keying and Routing In the dialog box select Te Program Preview ClipDeka Preview to Program Ctril F3 To Specify Dual Program Output ree Ser Your system must be configured with 2 Program output cards In the Channel menu do one of the following w Text Bar e Click Dual Program Command Bar w Statue Bar e Click Keying and Routing In the dialog box select Dual Program w Progam Preview Preview In Dual Program mode you can view a Preview window plus Program A and Program B windows To view Program B go to the View menu and fj S Style Font or Look select Program B Current Style Preset Styles Alt F There is no de
269. r command name Fa E a Prompt close For Help press F1 Laver 1 of 1 Ln 72 Dot 72 Fine OVA NUM 14572K 4 42 PM Preview Sequence Program window window window Specify the First Event 1 Click the down arrow next to the Effect field in Event 1 and choose clear 2 Click the down arrow next to the Control field of Event 2 then choose Pause Pause causes the Sequencer to wait for Play or a GPI trigger before playing the event Deko Training Creating Sequences and Effects Specify the Next Five Lower Third Titles 1 Click on the down arrow next to the Effect field and choose Motion From the window that is revealed choose the motion file lower third mot 2 Inthe Graphics Browser select the first of the five lower third files you created in Lesson 5 3 Double click on the file to insert it into the sequencer Notice that the cursor advances to the next event in the sequence 4 Select the next lower third and insert it Repeat this process to fill in the next three events 5 Save the sequence to the hard drive SK F12 FAK Save File Enter number 200 in the File name field and click OK 6 Make the rate 2 sec for even 2 and after Play the Sequence 1 Press the Home key to position your cursor in Event 1 and make it the current event Deko always plays a sequence beginning with the current event Near the top right you will see controls for Stop Pause and Play You can use these controls to play but
270. r some fonts digits can shift left and right as the clock advances To Spacing avoid this choose monospace or digits rather than proportional spacing This proportional setting is found in the Font section of the Style window a E aa monospace digits Deko Training Creating Clocks and Timers 12 3 Exercise Create a Clock Create a Clock 1 Choose the Style Edit view 2 On the Style window click the Layer button to reveal the Layer view 3 Click the Clock button in the Auto Update panel 4 Click View Clocks The Clock List window appears 5 Click Add Clocks The Add Clocks dialog box appears Add Clock Clock Number 3 Clock Type Format 6 Make the following settings in the data fields Time of day HH biki SS e Set Clock Type to Time of Day Time Ottset Hour Format Min Sec i 12 Hour e Set Format to HH MM p o z 34 Hou Check Append AM PM C Append AMPH C Keep leading vez 7 Click OK The new clock will be added to the Tenths display Clock List menla tenths separators ieolay anp onder Add Clock to Your Graphic Hr Min Min Sec 1 Create a new Text Layer f lin PEN 2 Choose a style from your Preset Style palette Par Cancel 3 Choose the Layer view on the Style window and Click Shrink to Fit box in Auto scaling section 4 Under the Auto Update section click on Clock 5 Set ID to the Clock ID from your Clock List The new clock will appear in you
271. r to a menu selection and click on a Transform Menu item a Shortcut menu will reveal more selections click on a Spell Check selection to open a dialog box or activate a function a Preferences Navigating the Menus with the Keyboard Hardware Settings Factor Defaults As you are learning the software you will need to refer to the menus frequently to learn where commands are located As you learn the Configure Clip Servers interface you will use the keyboard shortcuts and rely less on the mouse l Enabled Options Using the Alt Toggle w Save Settings on Exit Pressing the Alt key will toggle menu selection When you press the Alt save settings Now key the selection over File will depress Press the left arrow key to select the item to the right Press the down arrow to open the Shortcut menu Continue i File Edit Wiew Text pressing the down arrow to select a menu item ee Deko Training 2 2 Navigating the Deko Interface Using Alt Key Select to Open Menus Notice that the first letter for each menu selection is underlined View Text Layer Channel Macre If you hold the Alt key down and press the underlined letter that menu will be revealed For instance press Alt V to reveal the view menu yf W Command Bar W Status Bar 4 Notice that each menu item has an underlined character While Program the window is open if you press this character you will activate Preview Alt FS this menu function
272. raphic elements as characters in a typeface This is an ideal way of handling graphics consisting of frequently used logos or IDs Computer Graphics While Deko graphics in their native state are saved as dko files the Deko application supports a wide variety of widely used graphic formats There are two broad classes of still graphics bitmapped graphics and vector graphics Bitmapped Graphics Bitmapped graphics are made up of individual zs of picture information or pzxe s picture elements The graphic consists of a computer ap of these bits that is re created pixel for pixel when displayed or printed Paint applications such as Photoshop create bitmapped graphics A bitmap is an array of pixels picture elements mapped in an X Y grid The dimensions of a bitmap frame for television are 720 pixels x 486 pixels NTSC or 720 pixels x 586 pixels PAL Each pixel is assigned enough bits of information to represent the RGB color values for that element In digital television each pixel receives 8 bits of information for each color Red Green and Blue for a total of 24 bits per pixel That works out to 8 398 080 bits of information for one video graphic frame Vector Graphics Vector Graphics are made up of geometrical formulas to represent image content rather than an array of bits bitmap Vector graphics are more flexible than bit maps because they can be resized and stretched Vector graphics do not need as many bits to store informa
273. red Deko Training 17 18 Other Options Create and Open a Database To create and open a database 1 Open Thunder Browse 2 Inthe File menu click Advanced then Create New Database 3 Select Lightning as the Database Type Note Thunder and Lightning databases are different Thunder and Thunder Browse can access both Thunder and Lightning databases Lightning can access only Lightning databases If you are creating a database on your Deko system we recommend that you select Lightning as the Database Type This way any Lightning or Thunder machine can open your database Create New Database x D tahasi Ty ne feo Jatabase Name mydatabase Computer Name Ja Path c Beckey Drive Share Name GDEG WUBI Vatavase 1 H NOTES Come me atla prin fey Bae ve ath Unive snare Name c Beckey pic_dir c Beckey bw_pics c Beckey col_pics 4 Enter a Database Name 5 Enter a Database Path unique to the new database that contains the full path name of the directory where the new database will reside 6 Choose 525 for NTSC the default setting or 625 for PAL 7 Thunder automatically enters other field values for you Click the Create button 8 Go to File gt Open and navigate to the new database pff file Then click the Open button Deko Training Other Options 17 19 Set Default Database To set a default database 1 Open the database as described above so that it
274. reference set I beam cursor Box cursor text field One layer of text in a FXDeko graphic A text field is defined by its text field box which controls word wrapping and justification A text field has a default style font and look Characters in a text field may extend beyond the text field box The box is used for alignment not clipping texture shader Used to apply a pattern to a detail The pattern is actually a bitmap that is cut from another graphic file and pasted onto the detail time code A code using time as its measuring and location system Recently standardized by the SMPTE time code utilizes hours minutes seconds and frames It is a binary electronic signal if recotded on the tape and is analogous to the edge numbers in film Deko Training Glossary G 19 title bar The bar at the top of any Windows NT application window including FXDeko s This bar is highlighted whenever an application is active tool tips Those little yellow pop up windows that appear if you hold the selection cursor over a toolbar button for a brief moment They explain what each button does You can turn tool tips on and off from the Help menu turnkey Generally used to refer to a fully integrated system installed and ready for use implies all phases of creating such systems as well as all necessary communication links to use them UNIX An operating system developed by AT amp T and used by the LMS applicatio
275. resolution of a video signal desktop The Windows NT term for everything appearing on your computet s color monitor such as windows icons cursors buttons etc desktop video Video post production using personal computers at the desktop rather than a traditional post production environment Desktop video may include video storyboarding editing and or special effects generation using personal computer equipment rather than dedicated post production hardware detail One element of a Deko look It controls how a font is rendered There are five kinds of details face edge shadow underline and frame digital A method of representing information using a sequence of ones and zeros for storage and interpretation by a computer In digital transmission analog signals which are originally in a continuous form are converted to discrete signals of zeros or ones to be transmitted to a receive site interpreted and used to reconstruct the original analog signal Deko Training Glossary G 7 digitization The process of changing an electronic analog signal into a discrete binary form The process is divided into the steps of sampling the analog signal at set moments in time quantizing each sample assigning it a numerical value and translating the sample into a discrete binary number The advantages of digitization include reliable high speed signal transmission quality duplication and easy manipulation and processing A
276. rl M Deko Training 2 4 Navigating the Deko Interface Style Edit Layout Alt F11 The Style Edit layout is the preferred view for graphic creation and is probably the most important layout for you to learn The Style Edit opens with the Program window in the center Five windows surround the Program window Style window Current Style window Preset Style window Shader window and Tools window The Style Edit layout will be covered in detail in Lesson 4 Type and Modify Text Sequence Edit F11 E i ll a eel ee _ a Eal el en ie eee IE A ee H The Sequence Edit layout is used to create a playback sequence of graphics The Sequence Edit view opens with three windows the Preview window top left Program window top right and Sequence window bottom Deko Training Navigating the Deko Interface Effect Playback Shift F11 ame Of ee a IS B a 7 ea seams i ree Fel A pee Dir Stet te IL pa eed eed a Pd re Ee B tom i ed Pe Fire The Effect Playback window looks similar to the Sequence layout The Effect playback window replaces the Sequence window on the bottom Use this layout to setup and playback single effects as opposed to creating a playback sequence of multiple graphics You can also use this layout to create an embedded effect which can be stored with a graphic and played when the graphic is opened in the preview channel Both of these layouts will be covered detail in Lesson 9
277. roduction PRESIDE ATO NWI EOQIGEorRGE W BUH 7 JA 234 567 AA FAVNE cIle AENA Aad TOO W200 a g f Hy Ay ROSS PEROT Ly MESON gt aeo neTS RER Det Nov Dec Jan roby Mar q Jeanette MSS a gi WD u Deko Training Understanding Timeline Motions 10 3 Step by Step Build a Timeline Motion The following steps will guide you through defining and building a Motion using the Timeline Motion editor found in FXDeko If you get into trouble please look at the Help section that follows Choose Motion Compose Layout Ctrl Shift M 1 Go to Window gt Select Layout gt Motion Compose Shift Ctrl M WwW inigo Freeze Windows Reset Current layout Cascade Auto Cascade Select Layout Graphic Compose Ctrl F 11 Site Ect Alt F 11 Effect Playback Shift F 11 Sequence Playback Seq Edit 7 Motion Compose 2 Your desktop will now reflect the image below You should see a Preview window Program window and Timeline Motion window ME x File Edit View Motion Layer Channel Macro Options Window Help Zurich LexCn BT f 135 58 5 EXE ELIE e Lei JE Untitled Preview Pel ES fiz untitled Prog 1 GEF Effect O Position Screenmove O x Position eye See Screenmove Object Graphic Pry Layer number Preview Program WB Preview E Program Ee Prompt Close Dii Layer 1 of 1 Ln 146 Dot 72 Coarse INS NUM 20848K 3 52 PM Deko Training 10 4 Under
278. rol program you will begin to see data in the Automation Window When a command is sent that the Deko understands it responds with an asterisk For example a Newsroom Automation system sends W 100 900 layer one text layer two text lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Deko responds In this example W Write to layer 100 Name of the file where the transmitted text will be stored 900 Template Layer one text transmitted text for the first layer set to Replace Layer two text text for the second layer set to Replace Command terminator lt OD gt Carriage Return lt OA gt Line Feed In response to this command the Deko will create a file called 100 aut which contains the two lines of text that were sent by this command along with the name of the dko file serves as the template in this case 900 dko When at a later time the file 100 aut is read it will cause the Template file 900 dko to be read and its fields will be filled with the data in 100 aut Deko Training Lesson 17 Other Options Deko provides a number of options which expand the capabilities of your system In this lesson we will examine four options designed to enhance the Deko system e Database Connection e Cap Shaders e Still Deko e Clip Deko Database Connection The Automation option now includes a dynamic feature that enables Deko to read and display information from a database This means you can set up a
279. rom layer Clear Layers Clear All Move text cursor among layers select next previous layer Insert or Overwrite text View Layer Browser F9 FAK Read F12 FAK Save File Alt F12 FAK Alt Save File Ctrl L FAK Browse Graphics Alt Alt Ctrl Alt Ctrl Numeric Keypad Ctrl Shift T Tab Deko Training 5 39 Lesson 6 Working With File Imports Deko Graphics As we learned in Lesson 4 Deko graphics are made up of one or more ayers and a background Layers can consist of text or shapes Backgrounds consist of solid colors ramp shaders or textures With Deko you can create shapes consisting of rectangles or ellipses As you have already learned you can also create complex oks that can be applied to fonts font plus look equal style and shapes If you wish to incorporate photographs or continuous tone graphic elements such as team logos or station IDs you must zmport these elements into Deko from another application Deko allows you to import graphic elements from a wide variety of sources Typically these elements would be created in application such as Adobe Photoshop and saved into a f format that can be read by Deko Deko can use these imported files to supply the background to a graphic or to supply texture fills to any font or shape with a Texture Shader In Lesson 7 you will also learn how to import graphics to create a Custom Typeface which allows you treat g
280. ry G 5 composite sync A signal containing all the timing pulses that are needed to lock the electron beam of the picture monitor in step both horizontally and vertically with the electron beam of the imaging device composite video The most common type of video signal in which the color chrominance and brightness luminance information is combined onto a single signal path Composite signals are used in television broadcast and most video recording applications Some image degradation results from combining the signals compression Techniques used to reduce the size of digital signals so that they are easier to process transmit and store Video and audio compression allows the conversion of analog signals to digital and reduces the number of bytes required to store those digital signals Video in particular can be moved to and manipulated more efficiently when compression techniques are employed There are several methods of compression for both audio and video available but no standard has been set as yet For more information on both still image and motion image compression standards See JPEG and MPEG compression The action taken by a video codec in reducing the data rate required for the transmission of television signals between sites contrast How much brighter the white areas of an image are from the black areas contrast ratio The ratio of the scale between the brightness of the brightest possible
281. s Clear Read FAK or F9 SK to open the file 3 In the dialog box navigate to the drive and directory containing the text pop txt or style pop dko file 4 Choose the file from the File Name list box or type it in the File Name text box then click OK ot press Enter Note Deko pops the text into the current or selected layer of the graphic then automatically selects the next layer behind it It does not create a new layer for the pop To Place Pop Text onto a Graphic 1 Open the graphic file onto which you will pop the text 2 Press Clear Read FAK or F9 SK to open the file 3 In the dialog box navigate to the drive and directory containing the place pop dko file 4 Choose the file from the File Name list box or type it in the File Name text box then click OK ot press Enter Note Deko creates a new layer for the place pop in front of the current or selected layer then automatically activates the layer behind the previously current or selected layer Deko Training SportsWare Pops 15 5 Exercise Creating and Using Pops Creating a Text Pop 1 Go to Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Notepad The application Notepad will open iF Untitled Notepad Type Jimmy Keys in the open window Fie Edt Seaee Bele Go to File gt Save The Save As dialog box will appear Jimny Key Navigate Save in box to D Deko Tutorial Type 021 in the Fz name box and click Save Save As Save ir E
282. s an easy process Once a typeface is created you can access the typeface elements as you would a regular typeface or font Creating Custom Typefaces 1 Goto View gt Custom Typeface The Custom Typeface window appears E Custom T per ac a shade a Display ker CH CBee Cwiah Click on the M character you vish to acd tne gt Hina G B graphic to Tina 2 3 r 5 fi 7 i A B H D E Li ee E E E ne iiLiip 2 Activate the Program window and open the first graphic File you wish to import as a character You can do this quickly Hew Custom Typeface Cirle from the graphic browser by double clicking on the Open Fa selected graphic Ever i Si Close Custom Typeface Ctrl F 4 3 Activate the Custom Typeface Window and click on the Save Custom Typeface Alter 12 Save Custom Typeface 4s F12 character to which you wish to import the graphic titan Import Character Import Character From File 4 Goto File gt Import Character The graphic will appear on the selected character Create Directory Chi F12 Delete File Informationr Deko Training 7 2 Creating and Using Custom Typefaces 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 until all desired graphics are imported 6 Activate the Custom typeface window Press Save File FAK or F12 SK and type in the name of the custom typeface Alternate Method 1 Goto View gt Custom Typeface 2 Click on the character into which you wish to import the graphic
283. s been assigned a key clip 4 In the Clip Editor select Scrub Key 5 Use the thumbwheel or the double arrow keys to align the key clip with the fill clip 6 Click Set Offset Deko Training Other Options 17 27 Playing Clips TARGA Settings The first time you play a clip it is important to specify a the genlock soutce oa Pade To Specify the Genlock Source Pen ny Fee rat pan an Eee Ee ee eee Selecting Scrub Fields wil display 1 Open the Clip Editor and click the Settings button Playback Overtay Usage I Use overlay during playback M Use i 2 Click the Playback tab in the dialog box er ee nana a an ie ee ee eee noes 3 Under Genlock Source choose Reference Input Gerdock Source System Pestoemance Descigtion Video Input 2 Number of RealTime signal present To Preview a Clip Open the browser and select the clip Deko displays the clip in the clip viewer a box in the lower left corner of the editor Note The name of the current clip file and the name of the avi files for the fill and for the key appear below the clip viewer The format DV25 YUV or RGB of the avi file appears next to the file name If no clip is selected the clip viewer is grayed out To Set a Start Point and End Point for Playback 1 Open the browser and select the clip 2 Open the Clip Editor and use the slider thumbwheel or frame by frame buttons to find the frame where you would like pl
284. saieGieces se eect asses elie eee eee 3 15 Lesson 4 Type and Modi Eekeren O N 4 1 Os NO A esata A AE AEA AA AAE inaeteaaiaaceanceantacnceet taccanesascuueceacee 4 1 fi Glee Ba rare TME ICE yn E EEEE EEE E EEE EEEE EEAO E A EEEE 4 2 Elemen ol he Deko Tnte i Cerura anan a ET EEE ENEO EEA ETES 4 2 Elements Or the Deko INe Ce e a aaa e e R tactueettiah hives 4 3 Window Focus io the Deko Interfadeseinotonpnonn eana a ean A a a a aaa 4 5 Peeke DPE aid Alter Bex Eara Aa ETT TE a 4 6 Naveanno dhe Cuor AiG Se eC tity T exirent cnt ela ase E TE A eats er naira 4 8 Homeand Eod key Oe eee ate ae 4 8 C SOS Le EI naa sata ent chasis ae ttseee seas ca tye een cei ap ni oat aaa aa a aa Acta dy aan haath a canna es sees 4 8 Sene the TELC CUSO assess steele rt au ce st dean can Beato AEA A O AOE 4 9 INE OWA ESC SON sass rcs r E ETENEE TT OO TTO OOOO 4 9 pelee rno CAI CLELS sess sran E E EEEE ETE E TEA 4 9 Selected ext versus Cut EON Eaa a AR 4 11 MA E ITS SV a RA EA ce e A toe Ot tg E A N I T A E 4 11 Oe a E E T E E A O bo aead tates 4 11 oele TOE C hanens DIP ICES ana E A OA 4 12 PRED E Nl E E E A E A A E er 4 13 SCS EE EES EE E E ta Sha E EAE A NA E E E A E E hana 4 17 REVA UNEA SINAC rere Ee ccs AA OT TO OOA OONA EONO A AOOO O 4 17 SAS CONO Sanaa ERROA OA A E 4 18 Piece t a 1S eE E E E EEE EE S 4 19 EETA elke OF 16 lai EET E etre E E T E S A E AAA IA AAA IE A E E E Tren eter 4 20 ON CBN cou 1012 o lt SEEN EIE EE E ANE AA N LAANE AAA S AIEA TES POR E ORE EE
285. shows up in your Thunder Network Tree You can select any database as the default database It can be a database on your hard drive or anywhere on the network 2 In the Thunder Network Tree navigate to the database then right click the database name TF Thunder mydatabase pff a ele ge Him a C Stills Ey C Beckey Delete Item Create New Sequence Set Default Database Remove All Locks 3 Inthe drop down menu click Set Default Database Access Stills and Clips To open a still image from Deko 1 In Deko click anywhere on the Program or Preview window 2 From the File menu choose Open From Lightning 3 Inthe Open From Lightning dialog box double click anywhere on the image data line Database Workspace c ightning v 0 X Data lines Dao lt a TIP You can re sort images 9 298 Tonite alphanumerically by StillNum 5 06 23 99 Template Date Title Category User or 06 23 59 Templo M bv clickina th 9 06 23 99 Template emo y C IC ING e iO 06 23 39 Template appropriate sort button 06 23 99 Template 14 dko 12 13 99 15 dko 12 13 99 20 dko 12 13 99 Template gt ema Deko Training 17 20 Other Options To browse for images Hold Alt and press the Tab key to find Thunder then release Alt to open Thunder Browse Thunder Browse has a variety of View menu options to display exactly the information you want Refer to the Thunder documentati
286. single line crawl except carriage returns separate each row of text Don t create separate layers of text 1 Clear out the Program window and set for Horizontal Scrolling The cursor will default to the upper left corner of the window 2 Pick a style and type First Row Deko Training 9 14 Creating Sequences and Effects 3 Press Enter twice 4 Change styles of you like Type Second Row 5 Press Enter twice 6 Again you can change styles Type Third Row 7 Save this file as multicrawl dko in the Tutorial folder multicrawl dko Program Enter carriage returns after each row hird Row Set up the Sequencer with multicrawl dko as the File Name specify crawl as the Effect and change the Rate of time to 2 seconds Since this is a multiple row crawl the Rate of time is applied to the first row only To set timing for the other rows 8 Click in Event 1 9 Select the Options button in the Sequencer to display a Crawl options dialog box 10 Specify 3 seconds for Second Row and 4 seconds for Third Row Crawl Options Rate Rate Units Second Aow 2 seconds Third Aow 4 seconds Fourth Aow i seconds Cancel 11 Ignore the Fourth row l Continuous Deko Training Creating Sequences and Effects 9 15 12 Press OK and play the sequence You should see three rows of text crawl at independent speeds To create a more interesting effect with this feature experiment with row l
287. snu tssir sisis sisses is kisaan 3 1 Openime Windows NT Explore arr a A E 3 1 Penne N TC OG fo Or Castes nett ah titel teat E E TE aaa 3 1 D skOpennrna cash ais vaste So aasaa than sdon easdemh a sos tdeelcansamsennsavssaceseenaneed 3 1 DOO Fie TO Sta Sass st das hada carts a OA tala th EE OA TTE N O tubules 3 1 SO Fle Stalls oninu trn enur Er EE ugar ATE ROEE OOE 3 2 Browsine Thirouch Driyesanda Folde Sns n ERA A N 3 2 A a A Te EE r e AAO E A A E E A A AEA EA 3 4 Nanao me T ee an O aan A N A 3 5 Copr ae Piles Berven Dives GE Polde iS resia iiih ad et nl N N E 3 5 Movino thes Beweer DINE uppror onia E TA OOE 3 7 DBelnne Tolkkrand FieSenssrn nii Sa A a E Tey ser cicero Tre 3 8 Rescuine eD ee Folde or Ple ea AOS 3 9 Deko Training iv Contents Creatin New Holders mm tucs Sate te thet chateau tions ene esas 3 10 Renanine Old ers Ari NCS asics cts ava seas taes uae a A OTO OTO TE OOO 3 11 WY HG OWS COMM OMe 11 CS acetates atediteaptcasars inasarans ons E E EEEE EOE EE 3 12 Chanine te AEO 4 Wy INOW ot aa E ANA ERO O OE 3 13 Switching BenyeemO pen ProstamG Or WINGO Ws riacodace itn ttre saueitcnitroiaueidaubarvain tieesie E EEEE 3 13 Ma cn tt Sata tel at tp attra arti va es Aa ton sedge sella teeta tel igs osc OR 3 13 Dero TIE TYPES proinn into tetas dinette EE alas aaincas se elas oe tat ae cesta tin to tact c ta aeenae eaten 3 14 Seine Directories and Pathe 10 Dek Orie diana ee ee ale ane O A 3 14 Exercise Create New Folders ind StibtOldersiri
288. son 5 page 30 We will incorporate the following techniques that will make the most efficient Motion playback e Layer naming e Wild Card for Grouping e Inserting Points e Copy and Paste e Pausing 1 Zs aes Screenmove Graphic Fgm 3 S Creenimove Graphic Pry 4 oF Effect 6 Edits Ge Object Layer name or number 8 Highly skilled Deko worker Quick learner Motivated for challenging tasks Talented and creative Work well with others Go to Motion layout Shift Ctrl M Set focus to the Preview window and open the file slate dko created in Lesson 5 Click on the Car Motion tool to start with a fresh Motion window Click on the bottom Preview Action In the Effect section specify the Object to be the Background In the Parameter section click in the box to the Left of X Position to enable that parameter Position X Position J Position rA rnal In the Timeline Graph section click on the down arrow in the Posztion Selector and choose Right to Home Lett to Home Center to Home Above the Timeline Graph specify 5 Seconds as the total Rate of Time for this Motion Offset ox Absolute mee Absolute to Home Deko Training Understanding Timeline Motions 10 21 9 Inthe Timing section click and hold on the Out point triangle for the bottom Timing bar Drag left until it displays an Out time of 1 0s 1 second 0 frames il
289. ssages Pinnacle Systems Technical Support by Phone Customer Service U S 650 930 2990 Customer Service Fax U S 650 930 1601 Customer Service Europe 44 1895 442 003 Customer Service Fax Europe 44 1895 442 009 Information and Technical Support on the Internet For the latest information on Deko upgrades visit our website at www pinnaclesys com Our e mail address for technical support is Inthe U S broadcast support pinnaclesys com Inthe U K broadcast support uk pinnaclesys com Deko Training Table of Contents Introduction eese a aa aoa E aE SESA aE a N i How to Use TaS NaN e a a A E rr erm Tur ne orton er 1 HOV to Contact Pinnacle Sy Gteitis saiciveiaicdinin e ialag sheen aoa in etarreE iam ii Wae DOE Derre Golem Gril eaa T wercrnn tren tr Satya seer Creer rere ctr ii Pinnacle Systems Technical Support by P hoN eiiie ni n r ana o AVIALE NEA OA ii Information and Techical Supporton the IMtetnetite sisia n n aE T ii T ADCO C ONTE SE E RAA OA E E EE OE ee A O E iii Lesson 1 Very and Contisure Your Dek Osisssissssshsasssisawssansesnccdavsvensbiiccdenisvendbicceveges A 1 1 Vieerinyine VOU TICK O A A amen E E A E aes 1 1 MSS teh OE TG yO e T EE E Sea alta ect Se neue eos meus EE AOO dead Sagan E E 1 1 Seat oe MOU DC KO SOR aN a vcalesueuc teen acu naw E E cbued steande uetaces dui wenlias eeeut scents 1 2 HOW TOG reata SOLE CUE satel ale ial ed ha oc nin ald ca wl nina pinnate a a OO 1 3 atin nine Dek ronie Stat
290. stDeko NTSC_Samples File Edit Wiew Tools Help All Folders Contents of C PostDeko NTSC_Samples Desktop El My Computer TS6RB DEKO Graphi 5 13798 2 04 PM Security dmin Pin Copies the selected thems to the Clipboard Use Paste to Properties H E 3 Floppy A 1172KB DEKO Graphi 5 15 98 7 15 AM Flee IC 2000 dk 124KB DEKO Graphi 5 18 98 12 59 PM ILO Adobe 2001 dko B5KB DEKO Graphi 5 14 99 10 45 AM m Backgrounds 2002 dko B4KB DEKO Graphi 5 14 98 10 44 AM T REA Firmware i fS 2003 dko B4KB DEKO Graphi 5 14 98 1044 AM Eoo 201 O mer 1KB MACRO File 5 19 98 3 53 AM GE importwatch Ma 49440 o DEKO Graphi 5 4 98 11 31 AM Gam Kpoms S 20201 me Eeee MACRO File 5 19 98 8 53 AM seq Lan82559 2021 dk 57 a RREE ree DEKO Graphi 5 15 98 10 01 AM HEA Mssal 2022 dk P este SP DEKO Graphi 5 15 98 10 02 AM H E PostDeke S 2030 mc Send To MACRO File 5 19 98 8 53 AM b bin 2031 dk DEKO Graphi 5 15 98 10 04 AM H Extra S 2032 dk Eu DEKO Graphi 5 15 98 10 04 AM E NTSC_Samples 285hark FAC File 7 9 98 10 43 AM Program Files 500 dko Create Shortcut DEKO Graphi 4 22 96 7 00 AM Recycler 5000 dk Delete DEKO Graphi 7 9 98 5 28 AM 501 dko Rename DEKO Graphi 4 30 98 6 27 AM Note If Copy is grayed out on the menu your mouse pointer was not on top of one of the highlighted files Repeat steps 2 an
291. standing Timeline Motions To best explain the Timeline Motion editor we will use the analogy of a dance As we step along we will make references that should help you better understand the components of the Timeline interface Untitled Motion Preen s u lo ola m Toolbar Ah Sore d E gt Positi ot OD Graphic Pgm O Y Pos Scrub Handle Scale c Edt a CX Scale z aie Object OY Scale Sen O Rotate aae r Layer number Y Rotate crub Bar O Z Rotate O Skew Preview Program C Kem Preview Opacity C Program l Position Motion aoe In and Out Actions Handles a b c d e Action Effect Parameter Timeline Graph Timing List Object There are 5 sections of this interface that we will define one by one and refer to throughout this lesson using the IDs and descriptions above a Action List This list is a summary of your performance Consider each Action a dancer who s Choreography can be individually specified Right click to add and delete Actions to the list as desired Every Action has an associated Effect defined in section b b Effect Object An Effect is specified for every Action created in section a DVE Effects are selected at the top They include Page Turns Ripples and other editable 3D Effects To edit and optionally save parameters of an Effect click on the Edit button Your chosen Effect will perform based on your definition of a
292. stored in the File Info area Open a Sample Motion file 1 If there is a graphic in the Program window set focus to Program and clear the graphic so you have a blank screen SK F8 twice FAK Clear Program 5 Creenmove Graphic Pry 2 Goto Edit gt Clear All E3 Screenmnove Selle mI mg a to ET Graphic T Layer number Preview Program Preview C Program 3 Set focus to the Motion window and open the file named 200 mot You should see only one Action in the Actions list Deko Training Understanding Timeline Motions 10 7 4 This Action indicates that the Effect is a Screen move the O yect is defined as the entire Graphic and will perform in the Preview channel These are specified in the Effect section where is can be modified Create and Scrub a Basic Motion 1 Inthe Parameter list click once to place a check in the box next to Y Position to enable In the Timeline Graph position your mouse on the Scrub Handle Click hold and drag your mouse to the right across the Graph This is called scrubbing Scrub es Bezier Point Handle Scrub Bar 2 You should take notice of three things e Your graphic will push down from the top off screen e You will see a similar Scrub Bar appear in the Timing section This acts as a guide for setting In and Out points to your Actions e You can scrub forward or backward right or left and your output will reflect your Motion in rea
293. storted because the square pixels from the computer output will be squeezed into rectangular shapes Deko has the ability to resize imported graphics so creating an image of the correct aspect ratio on the computer is most important You can make an image saved at 640 x 480 look right However to gain the best looking output we recommend the following practice Recommended Practice 4 x 3 Images When making 4 x 3 images with Photoshop or other square pixel paint program make your image size 720 x 540 This is a 4 x 3 aspect ratio in square pixels Just before you are ready to export your file to Deko resize the image to 720 x 486 and save the image as a tga file ora tif file Use 486 because our video buffers are exactly 486 lines tall The resized image will appear geometrically distorted on your computer monitor However when you import the image to Deko it will display correctly Example 2 Note Before you resize the image make sure you Resized Box will appear distorted with save a copy of the image at 720 x 540 so you can work in a geometrically correct image if you need to edit the file 16 x 9 Images objects shorter and wider than normal When making 16x9 images work in 864 pixels by 486 lines and then scale down to 720 x 486 before saving the tga file By using the 864 pixel count you have an image that is in the 16 x 9 aspect ratio and you are scaling down before saving Do not use a 720 x 405 image
294. t changes and leave Baseline Edit mode Deko Training Lesson 9 Creating Sequences and Effects This lesson will introduce you to the concept of sequence playback and effect creation We will introduce you to the Sequence layout and show you how to build a sequence with effects We will also introduce the Effects layout and show you the advantage of using embedded effects with your graphics At the end of this lesson you will be able to do the following e Build a sequence with effects e Build a roll page with speed changes and a pause e Build a crawl with speed changes and a pause e Build a multi layer crawl e Create an embedded effect that will automatically play when a graphic is opened in the preview window The Sequence Layout SK F11 FAK Seq Edit A Sequence ties graphics and effects together in the form of a play list Sequences are best used for rundowns weather pages credits or other items that are consistently used repeatedly in the same order If you wish to play effects maintaining random access to any graphic in a directory the Effects layout allows you to build and play single effects That layout will be covered later in this lesson e Da y epee es puei Bee Gee Op ahem e ea ae ie Fim Si ee eee SF a Te SS mzde men al a pa T CE Prema me moo e AA ee A AA Deko Training 9 2 Creating Sequences and Effects The Sequence layout is made up of the Preview window on the left the Pro
295. tails in a graphic Applying a Cel Animation To apply a cel animation to a detail 1 Create a Shape field a rectangle or ellipse E Face Shader SES Color 2 Inthe Style window click on the Look Tab Make sure there is a Texture Keyhole Face detail CAP 3 Open the Face detail s shader File name Open LOGOO00 TGA Frames i 4 At the top of the Shader window choose CAP 5 Click on Open to select a file The Select Cap file dialog box will CAP Options open Forward C Backward File Hame Directories fg Select CAP hile LogoQ00 toa c deko logo Cancel W Continuous Rate Fps Logo l tga LogoUU tga LogoU03 tga Logol 4 tga Logos tga LogoQQ6 toa LogoUl tga List Files of Type Drives A Files E c Network File info 02 19 01 O5 48 50PM 256 724 Options Deko Training Other Options 17 13 6 Navigate to the directory containing the sequential animation file and locate the first file in the sequence 7 To verify file open parameters click on the Options button File Open Options 8 Choose No scaling or Square pixels preserve height from the How to format section Use Square pixels preserve height if the animation has not been resized for Television see Lesson 6 9 Click OK Then Click OK to close Select CAP file dialog box E Face Shader SES 10 Inthe Face Shader Frames field enter the total number of fram
296. takes using Undo To Undo the Previous Action s Go to Edit gt Undo Ctrl Z for each action you wish to undo The Edit menu tells you what will be undone To Redo Undone Actions Go to Edit gt Redo Ctrl Y for each action you wish to redo The Edit menu tells you what will be redone that is putting it back the way it was immediately before you used the Undo function To Enable or Disable Undo In the Edit menu check or un check Undo enabled The default setting is Undo enabled Undo uses several megabytes of space on your hard drive and may slow some Deko operations Disabling Undo frees space on your hard drive and may speed up Deko s performance However you cannot Undo actions performed while Undo is disabled even if you immediately re enable it Deko Training Verify and Configure Your Deko 1 15 Opening Files The Open Files dialog provides the tools for you to open files in the Deko interface The following tools will assist your selection File Selection Open ee list box File Hame Directories fi 2 dko 100 dko 200 dko 225 dko Be are Drive Selection File Type list nas List box men dko 524 dko Directory Path d deko tutorial box for the file selected List Files of Type Deko Graphics ldko m F peMo ORINE button File mfo Options File Option information e Directory Path field provides the path from the root Drive directory to your file dire
297. tcut 2000 dko 124KB DEKO Graphi 5 18 98 12 59 PM Select Al Christ 2001 dko ESKE DEKO Graphi 5 14 98 10 45 AM ea Selection S 2002 dko B4KB DEKO Graphi 5 14 98 10 44 AM E 2003 dko B4KB DEKO Graphi 5 14 98 10 44 AM I Exploring Recycle Bin File Edt View Tools Help gy Recycle Bin l lael x Palle All Folders Contents of Hecycle Bin Recycler Original Location H Securtyadmin CA PastDekosNTSI m Spe e Drag the Network Tree a sql H E Temp Scroll bar to the bottom and H E Thunder right click on Recycle Bin H E ThunderScreens Windows Update Set fel Winn ef Zmodem download ff Thunder 2 3 D Delete 1 Click Open on the menu Properties 2 Select the file s you wish to ep E restore ee FI ce i Elarson 32 G 3 Right click on one of the og amp G A ea highlighted files and click By Printers Restore on the popup menu fl Scheduled Tasks H A Network Neighborhood ga eccle Bin Explore Empty Recycle Bin Deko Training 3 10 Creating New Folders Setting up and Managing File Directories Folders can be nested inside other folders This way you can easily organize your data At the end of this lesson you will complete an exercise creating new folders and sub folders to store your graphics in Creating folders is an important skill you will use to organize your graphic material 1 Click on the Drive or folder you wish to
298. tion 1 Enable the Background Shader and click on the Texture button in the Shader window Deko Training 7 6 Creating and Using Custom Typefaces 2 Click the Open button and navigate to D Deko Tutorial bgd_training_weather dko The background elements for the graphic will appear If you need to position the logo relative to the example below select the move tool and do this now ACCU WEATHER 3 Draw a text layer for Day below ACCU WEATHER and select Preset Style 1 Bank Gothic 4 Center justify text inside the layer Ctrl 5 and type in all CAPS TOMMORROW AL GCU WEATHER 5 Draw a text layer for the Forecast and choose Preset Style 2 Futura Condensed 6 Center justify text inside the layer Ctrl 5 and type Cool Partly Cloudy AD G Ld VV EATER Deko Training Creating and Using Custom Typefaces 7 7 7 In the box below the Forecast layer draw a text layer for Temperature Choose Preset Style 3 Futura Condensed size 140 8 Center justify text inside the layer and type 45 Inserting Useful Symbols Depending on the current typeface character set there may be many symbols available to the user that do not have a quick key The Degree symbol is one of these e To insert the Degree symbol by typing the key code hold down the wf est bar ee nae Alt key and from the number pad type 017
299. tion for graphic creation than a bitmap because shapes are determined by a formula rather than a bit for bit reproduction Deko is a vector graphic application It treats imported bitmaps as geometric objects within the graphic Imported graphics fill the background or fill shapes as applied sextures Deko Training 6 2 Working With File Imports Alpha Channels Key Channels An important aspect of Graphic files used with Deko is the inclusion of an alpha channel also called a key channel In addition carrying the RGB values Graphics can contain additional information carried in an alpha channel This alpha channel carries gray scale information that can be used to mask or hide part of the graphic As we can see below example A shows a graphic image Example B shows the alpha mask channel When the mask is combined with the photo as in example C the muted color area will be cut from the image when it is displayed within Deko as shown in D Example A Example B Example C Example D A Paint application such as Photoshop is required to create an alpha channel Note other terms for alpha channel include hicon picon key and alpha mask Deko Training Working With File Imports 6 3 File Formats There are many file formats used in computer graphic applications today As we said earlier Deko saves graphics as dko files Photoshop saves files as a psd extension in their native form However Photoshop can accept a
300. tion specifies a character word or row a Sub bar will appear just below the Timing bar for that Action This gives you the ability to apply a delay between each Object during its flight path Experiment by selecting each and scrubbing through the Timeline to give you a better feel for the difference between each Run a Motion that Defines Home Position 1 Select Motion Compose Layout 2 Set focus to the Preview window and open 200 dko 3 Set focus to the Timeline Motion Editor and open procedural mot 4 Click and hold on the scrub bar arrow and then drag to the right to preview the effect 5 Edit to the content by adding or deleting text and then scrub the motion again Notice that the effect remains the same regardless of the number of characters input Deko Training 10 26 Understanding Timeline Motions Shortcut Keys Motion Compose layout Shift Ctrl M Clear Program window SK F8 twice FAK Clear Program Swap SK F3 FAK Swap Save File As SK F12 FAK Save File Save File SK ALT F12 FAK ALT Save File Open Macro window SK F2 FAK Macro Edit Deko Training Lesson 11 Using Macros A command is an instruction to FXDeko to perform a specific function The FXDeko user interface menus shortcut keys etc implicitly executes commands Every time b y gt p y ry you press a key or select a menu item you invoke a command that directs FXDeko to perform a function If you know the command name f
301. tit Veko temp banner tif E Tutorial Wwe chanceshowers tit 3 Set focus to the Program window Open Clear f ws_partlpcloudy tf wit snowfall tif si Read the sample graphic iwe_tstorms tif indyrainy tif k wx_partlycloudy tif To do this you will ian d L z J T TIF List Files of Type Drives need to set Last Files of Type to HEE renn A et Network File into 4 Set focus to the Custom Typeface window and 02 06 01 04 01 30PM 1 400 876 click on character A Options Deko Training op Creating and Using Custom Typefaces File Go to File gt Import Character Alt F gt I New Custom Typeface Ctrlthy The logo should display in the A position Open FY Hever Etri FE Close Custom Typetace Ctrl F 4 Save Custom Typeface Alt F 12 Save Custom Typeface As Fl Import Character Import Character From File fy Set focus on the Program window and open the sample graphic wx_chanceshowers tif Set focus to the Custom Typeface window and click on character B B A Open the sample graphic wx_tstorms tif Assign to the C position Go to File gt Import Character Alt F gt I The logo should display in the B position Repeat steps 6 8 assigning three more graphics to the following key positions B Open the sample graphic wx_windyrainy tif Assign to the D position C Open the sample graphic wx_snowfall tif Assign to the E position B 10 Save the Custom Typefac
302. ton 6 Scale the text and observe the transform section in the window Notice the H and V Scale changes and the H and V Origin changes To scale a layer with the keyboard select the layer and then press Alt the arrow keys Note It is important to remember that scaling selected text within the layer will change the font size attributes while changing the scaling of a layer itself will leave font attributes unchanged but will change the Scale attributes of the layer itself This is because Scaling a layer is a post process that is the layer attributes are applied to the layer after text attributes are applied Where this becomes important is when you wish to note attribute changes for additional graphics or restore attributes to their original values Rotate and Skew The Rotate tool allows you to both rotate and skew selected text or layers Rotate and skew apply differently to selected text and selected layers With selected text the adjustment is applied to Text attributes while with selected layers the adjustment is applied to Layer attributes Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 9 To Rotate Selected Text 1 Click on the Rotate tool button or type Ctrl R FAK Rot Skew 2 Position the pointer near the bounding outline of the selected text so the pointer becomes a rotation tool io 3 Drag to rotate the text In the Style window under Font notice the change in the rotation setting Notice also t
303. und for any graphic Shaders are specified in the Shader window FT Any shader can be stored as a preset shader The preset shaders can be saved in an shd file for future use Activating a Shader To activate a shader for the current look s first face edge shadow underline or frame click the appropriate detail shader button on the text bar F E uj t t t t t tace edge shadow underline frame Note If you click the shader button for a detail that is not in the Details list Deko automatically adds the detail You can activate the shader for a detail in the current style also by activating the Style window and clicking on any detail in the Details list box Deko Training 4 18 Type and Modify Text Background Shader To activate the background shader click the background shader button Ctrl F7 on the text bar Shader Controls Shader Type Current Detail Color Shader Detail Color E RGE HSY f ie Csa fo value i00 Copacity 100 Color Space Selector Selected Component Selected Component Bar Eye Dropper Unselected Components Current Color Pick Illegal Color Indicator The Shader window allows you to quickly adjust colors or other parameters for a given detail Pictured above is a Face Shader with the current shader type set to Color The following tools are provided to set a color e Shader Type buttons chooses th
304. until you want to add ODBC access for another database Deko Training Other Options 17 7 Query the Database Set up a layer to query the database We will set up a layer in the Race dko template to display the name of the first candidate in race 3 1 Open the graphic Race dko On WriteDeko this file requires the Unlimited Layers option Instead you can use the file Race2 dko which only has five layers WIARK SANDERS 162 890 85 Co ee EE ee ee ee 37 110 2 Select layer 2 the one that says Mark Sanders 3 From the View menu select Database to open the Database window then fill in window options as Sample as the Database Name me Database P fel F3 e Choose Sample as the Database Name Database Name e Check the Connect box F Connect e Choose Elections as the Table in Database Table in Database e Inthe Field Name box enter ID Data Record in Table Field Name e Enter 3 as the Field Value Equals e Inthe Display Field box choose Candidatel 4 Click the Create Query button Field Value Display Field Frequency e Create Query Read Query Deko Training 17 8 Other Options Voila Candidate 1 in race 3 is Teicia Joffe TEICIA JOFFE 162 890 Art CHADWICK 37 110 5 Select Layer 8 the one that displays Teicia s total votes ies Database M fej EJ Data Record in Table Field Name ID Equals Field Value Total Votes
305. ve the 1 00 line Fig B Figure A Figure B 14 Inthe Parameter section click on the word X Scale Press Ctrl C to copy the values of that parameter Click on the word Y Scale Press Ctrl V to paste the values A red point will display 15 Play the Motion to preview real time playback 6 Finally we will place a pause for the manual reveal of each bullet point Click on the pause icon below the fourth Timing sub bar to enable a pause between the placement of each Object The pause icon will turn blue to indicate that it is active 17 Play the Motion The Play key will trigger after each pause Save the motion as slate mot Deko Training Understanding Timeline Motions 10 25 Further Exploration How Can I Increase the Degree of Rotation Beyond 360 Although the Timeline Graph displays default Rotation values from 360 counter clockwise to 360 clockwise you are not limited to this setting To apply Rotation beyond 360 1 Click and hold on the small red Bezier point in the Graph 2 Drag your mouse in an upward direction Your Graph will display the added values or enter the desired value manually in the Numerical Setting box 3 Use this same approach in the downward direction to apply Rotation counter clockwise ufo oa m Setting P Clockwise Drag Up Counter Clockwise Drag Down What Happens When I define an Object as a Word or Row When an Object in the Effect sec
306. w Style Pop Select Text not Layer Choose a preset style or create a new style for the text Type the text Select the text no the layer nr eal ne ran eoecore ra Navigate to the drive and directory where you will store the file and type a name in the File name text box Click the Save Selection button Activate a Program or Preview window 500 dko 501 dko 502 dk Create a layer for the text or Ti use the default layer 521 dko B24 dko 551 dko Choose a preset style or 575 dko create a new style for the text l ex Deko Graphics dk kd Type the text Select the layer NOT the text Navigate to the drive and directory where you will store the file and type a name in the File name text box Choose Save Selection Place Pop Select Layer not text Deko Training 15 4 SportsWare Pops Note When you use Save Selection to save a graphic the Graphic browser indicates next to the graphic file name that the graphic is a pop file Likewise the File Info section of the File Open dialog box will tell you if a file is a pop file Graphic Browser and File info section of File open dialog indicate pop graphic ztulepop dko pop File mfo 02709701 11 19 38AM 327 500 pop Using Pops To Pop Text Onto a Graphic Using a Text Pop or Style Pop 1 Open the graphic file and position the cursor or select the layer where you will pop in the text 2 Pres
307. w on your screen is used to play macro files This component will be covered in greater detail later Deko Training Type and Modify Text 4 5 Window Focus in the Deko Interface The Deko interface provides multiple layouts for the different tasks you may be performing Each layout consists of a number of windows providing the tools for the task at hand For a window to be active its title bar will be highlighted and in color Inactive windows have title bars that are grayed out m Face Shader me E Color Texture Color BHEE E galie loval elad Inactive Window Active Window Keyhole CAP To activate a window position the mouse to a point anywhere within the window and click You can also change the window focus by pressing Ctrl Tab or Shift Ctrl Tab Certain windows have hot keys to activate them Press F5 to activate the Program window and Alt F5 to activate the Preview window The FAK has dedicated Program and Preview keys as well as keys to activate the other tools on the screen Deko Training 4 6 Type and Modify Text Exercise Type and Alter Text 1 Goto Window gt Select layout gt Style Edit or press AlttF11 This opens all the tools and windows necessary for text creation Note you should begin to use keyboard shortcuts rather than the mouse to perform operations whenever possible Window Freeze Windows Reset Current layout Cascade Auto Cascade Select L
308. w rather than the mouse If an item has a keyboard shortcut learn the shortcut Deko Training Navigating the Deko Interface 2 3 The Window Menu Window Freeze Windows Reset Current layout Cascade W Auto Cascade ayot Graphic Co Mmpose Ctrl F11 w Style Edit Akt F11 Save Layout As aie La LEO Effect Playback Shift F11 uean equence Playback F11 2 e j FE Motion Compose Shift Ctrl h 3 Preset style Style 2 Alt F Macro Edit 4 Face Shader F7 Macro Record 5 Tools l e E Untitled Program F5 Typeface Edit 1 EniceGraphicCreate The Window menu provides access to the machine layouts you will be working with There are seven standard layouts available to work in In addition Fx Deko FXDeko II and some other models allow you to save custom layouts that will appear in this menu To access these layouts with the Alt key press Alt W gt L gt ID letter for Layout For example Typeface edit can be accessed with Alt W gt L gt T Notice that the first five layouts have shortcut keys You should learn these shortcut keys and use them to access the different Layouts You will be switching layouts frequently in the operation of the machine and you need to be able to do this quickly Four Important Layouts The four most important layouts for working within Deko are e Style Edit Alt F11 e Effects Playback Shift F11 e Sequence Playback SK F11 FAK Seq Edit e Motion Compose Shift Ct
309. we recommend pressing the Play Stop and Pause keys on your FAK mEn 2 Press the Play key This first event will play from Preview to Program It will then pause since you have set this as a control in each event You will see the Pause button turn yellow The Play key on the keyboard will blink green 3 Press Play again The sequence will stop when it gets to an empty event or when you press the Stop button Deko Training Creating Sequences and Effects 9 7 Exercise Create and Run a Credit Roll Before You Start Though some shows now cut from page to page of credits the credit roll remains a staple of TV production Deko makes it easy to create and run credits All the text is typed into a single file just as it was when you did a lower third or a slate The only difference is that you must tell the Deko that you want this to be a roll file Running the roll file is equally easy You specify the speed of the roll in a sequence event and run that event Unfortunately moving video text up or down has a technical problem inherent with all character generators because interlace artifacts give the text in rolls a jagged appearance Deko provides you with a built in solution that always gives you the smoothest roll possible Step by Step Create and Run a Credit Roll 1 Enter the Style Edit layout to compose your roll graphic Altt F11 2 Clear the program window SK Alt F8 FAK Clear Program and dustity i select th
310. well with others Name the Layers 1 Open the Layer browser and select the layer for the first bullet point When you have highlighted the layer in the browser selection points will surround the selected bullet points 2 Right click on the Layer browser picon to reveal the Shortcut menu and Refresh view click on Edit layer name W Show layer s 3 Inthe Name layer type Col la Hide layer s Lock laver s W Unlocked layers 4 Click anywhere on the screen to accept the change 5 Select the next and remaining bullet points to change their names as follows Col 1b Col 1c Col 1d Col 1e Deko Training Working with Layers and Tabs 5 31 6 Select the first text layer associated with the first bullet point and change its name layer to Col 2a 7 Select the next text layer and the remaining layers and change their names as follows Col 2b Col 2c Col 2d Col 2e 8 Change the name of the Graphic Title Layer Why I Deserve a Raise to Title Bring up a One Color Background 1 To turn on the background go to the text bar at the top of the desktop and click once on the Background on off button which resembles a TV screen FAK F3 Background on off button ail e de F Em m Bile HO E el Background color button 2 Then click once on the background color button directly to the right This activates the Background Shader window 3 Click on the color button in the Background Shader Pick a color jmi EATE E 2
311. with A always a floppy drive and continue to include FS Thunder 2 3 D all local and network drives The hand under the drive gel E icon indicates this is a shared drive Ae fF ASS D on Elarson 98 G c Indicates a CD Drive 3 He IA E Control Panel Indicates a network drive which is a drive or directory ial eee located on another computer and connected over a ak Network Neighborhood network E Recycle Bin My Computer displays all drive resources located locally on your computer Desktop indicates all resources and Shortcuts mapped to your desktop space You can customize this space Network Neighborhood provides access to all network connections available on your computer P b E The Control Panel folder gives you shortcut access to your computer s Control Panels directory This folder contains a number of useful utilities to modify the settings on your computer For instance the Date Time utility allows you to set the clock and calendar for your computer This Clock Setting is used when you create a CG clock in Deko If your C drive is highlighted click on the Up One Level button on the Tool bar This will place you at the My Computer level Note If you are at a file level clicking File Edit View Tools Help on the Up One Level button will take you to the next folder up or to the drive TAS z sia Eel level if there are no folders At the drive All Folders Contents of Ls level
312. y and press the assigned key for the Macro 1 If this is a new macro record your macro with the macro recorder Press the Macro Edit key SK F2 FAK Macro Edit to open the Lele Macro Window You will see several lines of K language that define your actions in code Save the macro SK F12 FAK Save File Press the Preset Macro key in the bottom left on the FAK This will open a window where you can enter up to 26 macros as character assignments Preset Macros Macro a K Selected Macro kep A File Scroll to the desired key assignment and click on the key Press the Select File button The Select Preset Macro dialog box appears Navigate to the desired Macro file Select the file and click OK The Macro will appear assigned to the desired key UFI Cancel Select File E dit EE EEE Close Select Preset Macro x Directores d dekostutorial File Hame SETTIMER MCA 2020 mer 2030 mer Hine No Secs mcr TIMER TIM MCR ki List Files of Type Drives Clack mcr MACRO Files mcr jad Network DAY TIME MCAR File info 100397 12 12 46PM 4 685 Cancel TAIN QuIMers mer Deko Training 11 8 Using Macros Preset Macros CANFHDeko N TSC Samples SETT 10 Click close to accept the assignment 11 To run the Preset Macro press the Preset Macro key the assigned key Deko Training Using Macros 11 9 Exercise Build
313. yers Layers can contain xt ellipse shapes or rectangles When a new graphic is created it opens with a default background usually black which is determined in your Preference settings and a default text layer which occupies the safe title area of the screen Creating Additional Layers The Tool window provides three tools that can be used to create additional layers Layers can be e Text layers created with the Text layer tool T e Rectangle layers created with the Rectangle layer tool e Ellipse layers created with the Ellipse layer tool aT ools Creating a Text Layer a W Peles A 1 From the Tools window click on the Text layer tool ololese Qah l 2 Position the cursor placing it in the upper left corner of where you want the new text layer to go Notice that the cursor over the Program window changes K II You should see a pointer with an I beam denoting that this is a Text layer 3 Click and drag the cursor down to the right until you have a rectangular outline the size of your desired text layer then release the mouse button You should now have two layers in your graphic the default layer and a second text layer representing the smaller rectangle Note The process of creating a shape layer rectangle or ellipse is basically the same Select the appropriate tool Position the cursor and drag till the desired shape is produced We will discuss shape layers a little later Moving and Resi
314. ze of the graphic middle and will preclude modifications to the texture when editing the original source files e Group specifies how the ramp should be applied letter applies the same texture to each letter word applies the same texture to each word row applies the same texture to each row of text page applies the texture to the entire page of text e Opacity controls the texture s opacity from zero transparent to 100 opaque e Auto Scale scales texture based on the group setting Works in conjunction with specific horizontal and vertical scaling e Replace tags the texture for replacement with a user specified texture o H offset offsets the texture relative to its horizontal alignment e V offset offsets the texture relative to its vertical alionment Deko Training 4 22 Type and Modify Text e H Alignment e left aligns the left edge of the texture with the left edge of the group e center aligns the center of the texture with the center of the group e right aligns the right edge of the texture with the center of the group e V Alignment top aligns the top of the texture with the top of the group middle aligns the middle of the texture with the middle of the group baseline aligns the middle of the texture with the baseline of the group bottom aligns the bottom of the texture with the bottom of the group Keyhol
315. zing a Text Layer To change the size and position of a text layer you use the Move tool To select the Move tool do one of the following e Click on the Move tool in the Tool window e Press Ctrl M SK or Move FAK Deko Training 5 2 Working with Layers and Tabs To Move a Text Layer 1 Move the mouse so the cursor is over the edge of the text layer 2 Left click to select it SK or Page Up or Down FAK The text layer outline will turn black and eight small gray squares will appear on the outline one on each corner and one in the middle of each line These handles are used to resize the layer 3 To move the layer place the cursor on one of the black lines but not near one of the squares Click and hold the left mouse button down A crosshair pattern cursor appears Drag the layer to the new location Note You can also move the layer by selecting it and using Alt Arrow Keys Up Down or Left Right Ctrl Spacebar will toggle between Coarse 10 pixels and Fine 1 pixel movements To Change the Size of a Text Layer 1 Position the mouse so the cursor is next to one of the handles and click Then do one of the following e Place the cursor near one of the centered box handles will allow you to adjust the width or height of the layer The cursor will change to an up down arrow or a left right arrow e Placing the cursor near one of the boxes on the corners will allow you to resize both height and width

Pinnacle DekoTraining Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents